WO2013115268A1 - Colored photosensitive composition, black photo spacer, and color filter - Google Patents

Colored photosensitive composition, black photo spacer, and color filter Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2013115268A1
WO2013115268A1 PCT/JP2013/052082 JP2013052082W WO2013115268A1 WO 2013115268 A1 WO2013115268 A1 WO 2013115268A1 JP 2013052082 W JP2013052082 W JP 2013052082W WO 2013115268 A1 WO2013115268 A1 WO 2013115268A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
acid
pigment
group
weight
photosensitive composition
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2013/052082
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
訓志 岩田
良尚 沢井
麗華 裴
Original Assignee
三菱化学株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 三菱化学株式会社 filed Critical 三菱化学株式会社
Priority to KR1020147019632A priority Critical patent/KR101985564B1/en
Priority to CN201910370357.1A priority patent/CN110244513B/en
Priority to JP2013556472A priority patent/JP6036708B2/en
Priority to KR1020197014126A priority patent/KR102078989B1/en
Priority to CN201380007458.3A priority patent/CN104081280B/en
Publication of WO2013115268A1 publication Critical patent/WO2013115268A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08FMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
    • C08F2/00Processes of polymerisation
    • C08F2/46Polymerisation initiated by wave energy or particle radiation
    • C08F2/48Polymerisation initiated by wave energy or particle radiation by ultraviolet or visible light
    • C08F2/50Polymerisation initiated by wave energy or particle radiation by ultraviolet or visible light with sensitising agents
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09BORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
    • C09B67/00Influencing the physical, e.g. the dyeing or printing properties of dyestuffs without chemical reactions, e.g. by treating with solvents grinding or grinding assistants, coating of pigments or dyes; Process features in the making of dyestuff preparations; Dyestuff preparations of a special physical nature, e.g. tablets, films
    • C09B67/0033Blends of pigments; Mixtured crystals; Solid solutions
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/20Filters
    • G02B5/22Absorbing filters
    • G02B5/223Absorbing filters containing organic substances, e.g. dyes, inks or pigments
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/0005Production of optical devices or components in so far as characterised by the lithographic processes or materials used therefor
    • G03F7/0007Filters, e.g. additive colour filters; Components for display devices
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/09Photosensitive materials characterised by structural details, e.g. supports, auxiliary layers
    • G03F7/105Photosensitive materials characterised by structural details, e.g. supports, auxiliary layers having substances, e.g. indicators, for forming visible images

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a colored photosensitive composition and the like.
  • a colored photosensitive composition preferably used for forming a black photo spacer in a color filter such as a liquid crystal display, a black photo spacer formed using the colored photosensitive composition, and a color including the black photo spacer Regarding filters.
  • Liquid crystal display utilizes the property that the arrangement of liquid crystal molecules is switched by turning on / off the voltage to the liquid crystal.
  • each member constituting the LCD cell is often formed using a photosensitive composition typified by photolithography.
  • the range of application of the photosensitive composition tends to further expand in the future because it is easy to form a fine structure and it is easy to process a substrate for a large screen.
  • Patent Document 1 describes that a spacer is made light-shielding.
  • a coloring agent including ordinary pigment in the photosensitive composition, curable spacer layer by a decrease in the clear component as the addition of a colorant
  • Patent Document 2 discloses that spacer shapes and steps having different desired heights can be realized by controlling the exposure amount and the remaining film ratio.
  • Patent Document 2 relates to a spacer to which no pigment is added, and when applied to the batch formation of colored spacers to which a pigment is added, the pigment absorbs light in the ultraviolet region contributing to photopolymerization, and thus the light transmittance of the opening. It has been found that a pattern having a small amount has poor curability, and it is difficult to achieve characteristics such as desired spacer shape and step difference in height and adhesion to a substrate.
  • a main object of the present invention is a method of collectively forming different black photospacer height by photolithography, after securing the light shielding property and a voltage holding ratio of the liquid crystal, can control the shape or steps,
  • An object of the present invention is to provide a colored photosensitive composition capable of forming a black photospacer excellent in adhesion to a substrate.
  • Another object of the present invention is to provide a black photospacer formed from such a colored photosensitive composition.
  • Still another object of the present invention is to provide a color filter having such a black photo spacer.
  • the present inventors have found that the above problems can be solved by using a specific pigment as a colorant, and have completed the present invention. That is, the gist of the present invention is as follows.
  • a colored photosensitive composition containing a pigment, a binder resin, a photopolymerizable monomer, and a photopolymerization initiator, wherein the pigment contains a pigment shown in (A) below and a pigment shown in (B) Photosensitive composition.
  • the pigment is C.I. I. Pigment orange 64 and C.I. I.
  • the pigment is C.I. I.
  • pigment types having different light absorption characteristics are appropriately combined to ensure a balance between light absorption in the ultraviolet region and visible region.
  • the light shielding property and the voltage holding ratio of the liquid crystal it is possible to control the shape and the level difference and realize high adhesion with the substrate.
  • Embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail below, but the description of the constituent elements described below is an example (representative example) of the embodiments of the present invention, and the present invention does not exceed the gist thereof. It is not limited to the contents of.
  • (meth) acryl and the like mean “at least one of acryl and methacryl”, and “(meth) acrylate” and the like mean “at least one of acrylate and methacrylate”.
  • Etc. and “(meth) acrylic acid” means “at least one of acrylic acid and methacrylic acid”. The same applies to “(meth) acryloyl”.
  • (acid) anhydride” and “(anhydrous)... Acid” mean that both an acid and its anhydride are included.
  • total solid content means all components other than the solvent components described later, which are contained in the colored photosensitive composition or the pigment dispersion.
  • a weight average molecular weight refers to the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of standard polystyrene conversion by GPC (gel permeation chromatography).
  • C.I.” means a color index (c.I.).
  • the “amine value” means an amine value in terms of effective solid content unless otherwise specified, and is a value represented by the amount of base and the equivalent weight of KOH per 1 g of the solid content of the dispersant. is there. The measuring method will be described later.
  • the “acid value” represents an acid value in terms of effective solid content unless otherwise specified, and is calculated by neutralization titration.
  • the term “monomer” means a so-called high-molecular substance and includes a dimer, a trimer, an oligomer and the like in addition to a monomer (monomer) in a narrow sense.
  • the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention includes a pigment, a binder resin, a photopolymerizable monomer, and a photopolymerization initiator, and includes the following (A) and (B) as the pigment: In particular, it is preferably used as a colored photosensitive composition for collectively forming black photo spacers having different heights by photolithography.
  • A C.I. I. Pigment orange 43, C.I. I. Pigment orange 64, and C.I. I. One selected from the group consisting of CI Pigment Orange 72
  • B C.I. I. Pigment Blue 60
  • the exposure mask has a light shielding layer that blocks light transmission and a plurality of openings that transmit light, and the average light transmittance of some openings is smaller than the average light transmittance of other openings.
  • a method of using is known. This has a light shielding layer (light transmittance of 0%) and a plurality of openings, and has the highest average light transmittance (usually light transmittance of 100%, hereinafter referred to as “completely transmissive opening”). And using an exposure mask having an opening having a small average light transmittance (average light transmittance exceeding 0% and less than 100%, preferably exceeding 5% and less than 50%, hereinafter referred to as “intermediate transmission opening”). is there.
  • the degree of cure of the formed pattern depends on the difference in average light transmittance between the intermediate transmission opening and the complete transmission opening, that is, the difference in exposure amount. Differences can be made, and then black photo spacers of different heights can be formed through development and thermosetting processes.
  • Pigment refers to one that colors the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention.
  • various color pigments such as a blue pigment, a green pigment, a red pigment, a yellow pigment, a purple pigment, an orange pigment, a brown pigment, and a black pigment can be used.
  • organic pigments such as azo, phthalocyanine, quinacridone, benzimidazolone, isoindolinone, dioxazine, indanthrene, perylene, and various inorganic pigments can be used. is there.
  • the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention contains the following (A) and (B) as essential components as pigments.
  • the pigment to be used is not particularly limited, except that it contains the above-mentioned (A) and (B) as essential components, and it depends on the mixing of each color such as red, green, and blue.
  • a black color material can be used.
  • black pigments, other inorganic or organic pigments, and dyes can be appropriately selected and used in combination.
  • C.I. I. Pigment Red 48 1, 122, 168, 177, 202, 206, 207, 209, 224, 242, 254, more preferably C.I. I. Pigment red 177, 179, 209, 224, 254.
  • C.I. I. And CI Pigment Red 254 (R254).
  • C.I. I. Pigment Blue 1 As blue pigment, C.I. I. Pigment Blue 1, 1: 2, 9, 14, 15, 15: 1, 15: 2, 15: 3, 15: 4, 15: 6, 16, 17, 19, 25, 27, 28, 29, 33, 35, 36, 56, 56: 1, 61, 61: 1, 62, 63, 66, 67, 68, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 78, 79. Of these, C.I. I. And CI Pigment Blue 15, 15: 1, 15: 2, 15: 3, 15: 4, and 15: 6.
  • Green pigments include C.I. I. Pigment green 1, 2, 4, 7, 8, 10, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 26, 36, 45, 48, 50, 51, 54, 55. Of these, C.I. I. And CI Pigment Green 7 and 36.
  • ⁇ As yellow pigment C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 1, 1: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10, 12, 13, 14, 16, 17, 24, 31, 32, 34, 35, 35: 1, 36, 36: 1, 37, 37: 1, 40, 41, 42, 43, 48, 53, 55, 61, 62, 62: 1, 63, 65, 73, 74, 75, 81, 83, 87, 93, 94, 95, 97, 100, 101, 104, 105, 108, 109, 110, 111, 116, 117, 119, 120, 126, 127, 127: 1, 128, 129, 133, 134, 136, 138, 139, 142, 147, 148, 150, 151, 153, 154, 155, 157, 158, 159, 160, 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 166, 167, 168, 169, 170, 172, 17 174, 175, 176, 180, 181, 182, 183,
  • C.I. I. Pigment yellow 83, 117, 129, 138, 139, 150, 154, 155, 180, 185 more preferably C.I. I. Pigment yellow 83, 138, 139, 150, 180.
  • C.I. I. Pigment Orange 1 2, 5, 13, 16, 17, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 34, 36, 38, 39, 43, 46, 48, 49, 61, 62, 64, 65, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 77, 78, 79.
  • black pigments examples include perylene black (BA0084, K0084, K0086), cyanine black, first black HB (CI. 26150), Irgaphor Black S 0100 CF (BASF), carbon black, and titanium black. it can.
  • Examples of commercially available carbon black include the following brands. Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation: MA7, MA8, MA11, MA100, MA100R, MA220, MA230, MA600, # 5, # 10, # 20, # 25, # 30, # 32, # 33, # 40, # 44, # 45 , # 47, # 50, # 52, # 55, # 650, # 750, # 850, # 950, # 960, # 970, # 980, # 990, # 1000, # 2200, # 2300, # 2350, # 2400, # 2600, # 3050, # 3150, # 3250, # 3600, # 3750, # 3950, # 4000, # 4010, OIL7B, OIL9B, OIL11B, OIL30B, OIL31 Degussa: Printex3, Printex3OP, Printex30, Printex30OP, Printex40, Printex45, Printex55, Printex60, Printex75, Printex80, Printex85, Printex90, Printex A, Printex L, Printex
  • Examples of commercially available titanium black include the following brands. Mitsubishi Materials Corporation: 10S, 12S, 13R, 13M, 13M-C, 14M, 15M, L-15M, etc. Akaho Kasei Co., Ltd .: TilacD M, M-50, M-50A, M-AM, V, UV-3 , UV-6, F, S, C, X, etc.
  • the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention includes C.I. as a pigment from the viewpoint of light shielding properties, voltage holding ratio of liquid crystal, control of shape and level difference, and adhesion to a substrate.
  • C.I. as a pigment from the viewpoint of light shielding properties, voltage holding ratio of liquid crystal, control of shape and level difference, and adhesion to a substrate.
  • I. Pigment orange 64 and C.I. I. Pigment Blue 60 is preferably included.
  • the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention may further contain C.I. I. Pigment red 254, C.I. I. Pigment violet 23, and C.I. I. It is preferable to include one selected from the group consisting of CI Pigment Violet 29.
  • the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention has, as a pigment, the following (1) to (1) to the following to improve the light shielding property, the voltage holding ratio of liquid crystal, the control of shape and level difference, and the adhesion to the substrate. It is preferable to include the three types of pigments shown in any one of (3), and in particular, from the viewpoint of the voltage holding ratio of the liquid crystal, it is preferable to include the three types of pigments shown in (1) or (2). (1) C.I. I. Pigment orange 64, C.I. I. Pigment blue 60, C.I. I. Pigment Red 254 (2) C.I. I. Pigment orange 64, C.I. I. Pigment blue 60, C.I. I. Pigment Violet 29 (3) C.I. I. Pigment orange 64, C.I. I. Pigment blue 60, C.I. I. Pigment Violet 23
  • the proportion of the pigment in the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention is usually 5 to 50% by weight, preferably 10 to 45% by weight, more preferably 20 to 42% by weight, based on the total solid content. If there is more pigment than this range, the spacer shape and level difference, adhesion to the substrate may deteriorate, or the curable component may decrease and the pigment etc. may elute into the liquid crystal layer may cause a decrease in voltage holding ratio. is there. On the other hand, if it is less than this range, sufficient light shielding properties as a black photo spacer may not be ensured.
  • the ratio of (A) and (B) in the pigment may be either too much or too little, and the light shielding property and voltage holding ratio, shape, and level difference of the liquid crystal according to the present invention by using these in combination. Control and the effect of improving the adhesion to the substrate may not be sufficiently obtained, so that (A) is 25 to 70 wt% with respect to 100 wt% of (A) and (B) in total. %, Particularly 30 to 60% by weight, especially 35 to 60% by weight. That is, in (A), the absorption of light in the vicinity of wavelengths from 330 nm to 380 nm is relatively small, and the absorption of light in the vicinity of wavelengths from 400 nm to 550 nm is large.
  • the pigment used in the present invention may contain various pigments other than (A) and (B).
  • the total proportion of (A) and (B) in the total 100% by weight of the pigments contained in the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention is 50% by weight or more, particularly 60 to 95% by weight, especially 70 to 90%. It is preferable that it is weight%.
  • (A) in a total of 100% by weight of (A), (B) and R254, (A) is 20 to 40% by weight, (B) is 45 to 65% by weight, R254 is 5 to 25% by weight, In particular, it is preferable to use (A) in a proportion of 25 to 35% by weight, (B) in a proportion of 50 to 60% by weight, and R254 in a proportion of 10 to 20% by weight.
  • pigments other than (A), (B) and R254 may be used, the total ratio of (A), (B) and R254 in all pigments in the colored photosensitive composition is 70% by weight or more, In particular, it is preferably used so as to be 90 to 100% by weight.
  • (A) is 30 to 50% by weight
  • (B) is 30 to 50% by weight
  • V23 is 10 to 30% by weight
  • (B) in a proportion of 35 to 45% by weight
  • V23 in a proportion of 15 to 25% by weight.
  • pigments other than (A), (B), and V23 may be used, the total ratio of (A), (B), and V23 in all pigments in the colored photosensitive composition is 70% by weight or more. In particular, it is preferably used in an amount of 90 to 100% by weight.
  • (A) is 30 to 50% by weight
  • (B) is 30 to 50% by weight
  • V29 is 10 to 30% by weight
  • (B) in a proportion of 35 to 45% by weight
  • V29 in a proportion of 15 to 25% by weight.
  • pigments other than these (A), (B), and V29 may be used, the total ratio of (A), (B), and V29 in all pigments in the colored photosensitive composition is 70% by weight or more. In particular, it is preferably used in an amount of 90 to 100% by weight.
  • the pigments used in the present invention are (A) and (B), and C.I. I. Pigment Red 272 (R272) is preferably included. Since R272 has a large absorption in the visible region, it is advantageous for high OD. *
  • the binder resin used in the colored photosensitive composition of the binder resin present invention if the resin member used for the color filter can be used without particular limitations, epoxy acrylate examples based resin, novolac resin , Polyvinyl phenol resin, acrylic resin, carboxyl group-containing epoxy resin, carboxyl group-containing urethane resin, etc., from the viewpoint of shape and step control, adhesion to the substrate, epoxy acrylate resin having a carboxyl group, It is preferable to use an acrylic resin, and it is more preferable to use an epoxy acrylate resin having a carboxyl group.
  • the above-mentioned epoxy acrylate resin means that an ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated monocarboxylic acid or an ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated monocarboxylic acid ester having a carboxyl group is added to an epoxy resin (or epoxy compound), and further a polybasic It is synthesized by reacting an acid or its anhydride.
  • an epoxy resin or epoxy compound
  • Such a reaction product has substantially no epoxy group in terms of chemical structure and is not limited to “acrylate”, but epoxy resin (or epoxy compound) is a raw material, and “acrylate” is representative. Since it is an example, it is named in this way according to common usage.
  • the raw material epoxy resin includes (o, m, p-) cresol novolac type epoxy resin, phenol novolac type epoxy resin, bisphenol A type epoxy resin, bisphenol F type epoxy resin, trisphenol methane type epoxy resin, or Examples thereof include epoxy resins (or epoxy compounds) represented by the general formulas (1-a) to (1-a ′ ′′) described.
  • the particularly preferable binder resin in the present invention will be described below.
  • One particularly preferable binder resin in the present invention is a reaction product of an epoxy compound (a ′′) represented by the following general formula (1-a ′′) and an unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b ′′). And an alkali-soluble resin (A ′′) obtained by reacting at least one of a polybasic acid and its anhydride (c ′′).
  • X represents a linking group represented by the following general formula (2a), (2b) or (3).
  • adamantane structures are included in the molecular structure.
  • l represents an integer of 2 or 3.
  • R 1 to R 4 and R 13 to R 15 each independently have an adamantyl group optionally having a substituent, a hydrogen atom, and a substituent. And an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms or an optionally substituted phenyl group.
  • R 5 to R 12 may each independently have a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a substituent.
  • Y represents a divalent linking group containing an adamantane structure, which may have a substituent.
  • * represents a bonding site with the glycidyloxy group in the general formula (1-a ′′).
  • Epoxy compound (a ′′) represented by general formula (1-a ′′) First, the group X in the epoxy compound (a ′′) represented by the general formula (1-a ′′) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “component (a ′′)”) will be described.
  • the general formulas (2a) and (2b) each have an adamantane structure of 2 or more and 4 or less.
  • the adamantane structure is 1, the developer resistance tends to decrease and the resolution tends to be inferior.
  • Y in the general formula (3) is “a divalent linking group including an adamantyl structure which may have a substituent”. If it is, there is no restriction
  • the epoxy compound (a ′′) represented by the general formula (1-a ′′) is preferably represented by the following general formula (6) or (7).
  • the adamantane ring represented by the general formula (6) and the adamantyl group represented by (7) may have a substituent.
  • R 16 to R 23 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted phenyl group. Indicates a group.
  • R 24 and R 25 are each independently an adamantyl group which may have a substituent, a hydrogen atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. Or a phenyl group which may have a substituent.
  • the alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms of R 1 to R 25 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • substituents that these alkyl groups may have include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, a phenyl group, a carboxyl group, a sulfanyl group, A phosphino group, an amino group, a nitro group, etc. are mentioned.
  • examples of the substituent that the phenyl group of R 1 to R 25 in the general formulas (2a), (2b), (3), (6), and (7) may have include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, examples thereof include an alkoxyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, a phenyl group, a carboxyl group, a sulfanyl group, a phosphino group, an amino group, and a nitro group.
  • the adamantyl group in the general formula (7), the adamantyl group of R 24 and R 25 in the general formula (7), and the adamantane ring in the general formulas (4) and (5) may have a halogen Examples thereof include an atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, a phenyl group, a carboxyl group, a sulfanyl group, a phosphino group, an amino group, and a nitro group.
  • R 16 to R 23 are particularly preferably an alkyl group, a halogen atom, an alkoxyl group, an alkenyl group, or a phenyl group.
  • R 24 and R 25 are particularly preferably an alkyl group, a halogen atom, an alkoxyl group, an alkenyl group, or a phenyl group.
  • the molecular weight of X represented by the general formula (1-a ′′) is preferably 200 or more and 1000 or less. When the molecular weight of X is 200 or more, sufficient chemical resistance can be secured, and when it is 1000 or less, good sensitivity can be secured.
  • the epoxy equivalent of the epoxy compound (a ′′) represented by the general formula (1-a ′′) is preferably 210 or more, and more preferably 230 or more.
  • the epoxy equivalent is preferably 450 or less, and more preferably 400 or less.
  • epoxy compound (a ′′) one type may be used alone, or two or more types may be used in combination.
  • epoxy compound (a ′′) a commercially available product may be used, or it may be synthesized from a phenol compound as described below by a known method.
  • an alkali metal hydroxide such as sodium hydroxide or potassium hydroxide is added in advance to a dissolved mixture of the compound represented by the general formula (9a) or (9b) and an excess of epihalohydrin such as epichlorohydrin or epibromhydrin.
  • X in the general formula (1-a ′′) is represented by the general formula (2a) or (2b).
  • An epoxy compound (a ′′) as a group can be obtained.
  • an alkali metal hydroxide such as sodium hydroxide or potassium hydroxide is added in advance or added to a dissolved mixture of the compound represented by the general formula (10) and an epihalohydrin such as excess epichlorohydrin or epibromohydrin.
  • the epoxy compound (a ′′) in which X in the general formula (1-a ′′) is represented by the general formula (3) is obtained by reacting at a temperature of 20 to 120 ° C. for 1 to 10 hours. Can do.
  • an aqueous solution thereof may be used as an alkali metal hydroxide.
  • the aqueous solution of the alkali metal hydroxide is continuously added to the reaction system, and water and epihalohydrin are continuously distilled off under reduced pressure or normal pressure. Epihalohydrin may be continuously returned to the reaction system.
  • a quaternary ammonium salt such as tetramethylammonium chloride, tetramethylammonium bromide, trimethylbenzylammonium chloride or the like is catalyzed to a dissolved mixture of the compound represented by the general formula (9a), (9b) or (10) and epihalohydrin.
  • a quaternary ammonium salt such as tetramethylammonium chloride, tetramethylammonium bromide, trimethylbenzylammonium chloride or the like is catalyzed to a dissolved mixture of the compound represented by the general formula (9a), (9b) or (10) and epihalohydrin.
  • To the halohydrin etherified product of the compound represented by the general formula (9a), (9b), or (10) obtained by reacting at 50 to 150 ° C. for 1 to 5 hours.
  • the epoxy compound represented by the general formula (1-a ′′) can also be obtained by adding a solid or aqueous solution of the product and react
  • the amount of epihalohydrin used in such a reaction is usually 1 to 20 mol, preferably 2 to 10 mol, relative to 1 equivalent of the hydroxyl group of the compound represented by formula (9a), (9b), or (10). It is.
  • the amount of the alkali metal hydroxide used is usually 0.8 to 15 mol, preferably 0.9 to 0.1 mol per 1 equivalent of the hydroxyl group of the compound represented by the general formula (9a), (9b), or (10). 11 moles.
  • an aprotic polar solvent such as dimethyl sulfone and dimethyl sulfoxide may be added to carry out the reaction smoothly.
  • the amount used is 2 to 20% by weight, preferably 4 to 15% by weight, based on the amount of epihalohydrin.
  • the amount used is 5 to 100% by weight, preferably 10 to 90% by weight, based on the amount of epihalohydrin.
  • Unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b ′′) examples include unsaturated carboxylic acids having an ethylenically unsaturated group.
  • (Meth) acrylic acid, crotonic acid, o-vinylbenzoic acid, m-vinylbenzoic acid, p-vinylbenzoic acid, cinnamic acid, ⁇ -position is haloalkyl group, alkoxyl group, halogen atom, nitro group, or cyano group monocarboxylic acids such as substituted (meth) acrylic acid in; 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl succinate, 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl adipic acid, 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl phthalate 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl hexahydrophthalic acid, 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethylmaleic acid, 2- (meth) acryloyloxypropyl succinic acid, 2 (Meth) acryloyloxy propyl adipate, 2- (meth) acryloy
  • anhydrous hydroxyl-containing unsaturated compounds such as pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane diacrylate, glycidyl methacrylate acrylic acid adduct, and glycidyl methacrylate methacrylic acid adduct.
  • the compound which added acid anhydrides such as succinic acid, maleic anhydride, tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, and phthalic anhydride, is also mentioned. Particularly preferred is (meth) acrylic acid. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the component (a ′′) and the component (b ′′) are mixed with tertiary amines such as triethylamine and benzylmethylamine, dodecyltrimethylammonium chloride, tetramethylammonium chloride, tetraethylammonium chloride, benzyltriethylammonium chloride and the like.
  • tertiary amines such as triethylamine and benzylmethylamine, dodecyltrimethylammonium chloride, tetramethylammonium chloride, tetraethylammonium chloride, benzyltriethylammonium chloride and the like.
  • Carboxylic acid can be added to the epoxy compound by reacting with a quaternary ammonium salt, pyridine, triphenylphosphine or the like in an organic solvent at a reaction temperature of 50 to 150 ° C. for several to several tens of hours.
  • the amount of the catalyst used is preferably 0.01 to 10% by weight, particularly preferably 0.3 to 5% by weight, based on the reaction raw material mixture (the sum of the components (a ′′) and (b ′′). %.
  • a polymerization inhibitor for example, methoquinone, hydroquinone, methylhydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, pyrogallol, tert-butylcatechol, phenothiazine, etc.
  • the amount is preferably 0.01 to 10% by weight, particularly preferably 0.03 to 5% by weight, based on the reaction raw material mixture.
  • the ratio of adding the (b ′′) component to the epoxy group of the (a ′′) component is usually 90 to 100 mol%. Since the remaining epoxy group tends to adversely affect the storage stability, the component (b ′′) is usually 0.8 to 1.5 equivalents relative to 1 equivalent of the epoxy group of the component (a ′′). In particular, the reaction is preferably carried out at a ratio of 0.9 to 1.1 equivalents.
  • polybasic acid and its anhydride As at least one of the polybasic acid and its anhydride (c ′′) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “component (c ′′)” or “polybasic acid (anhydride)”), a dibasic acid and as at least one of the anhydride (hereinafter referred to as “tribasic acid (anhydride)”) (hereinafter, referred to as “dibasic acid (anhydride)”), 3 at least one of the nucleotide acid and its anhydride, At least one of the 4-basic acid and its anhydride (hereinafter referred to as “4-basic acid (anhydride)”) or the like can be used.
  • the 4-basic acid (anhydride) (at least one of tetracarboxylic acid and dianhydride thereof), known ones can be used, for example, pyromellitic acid, benzophenone tetracarboxylic acid, biphenyl tetracarboxylic acid, biphenyl ether tetracarboxylic acid. And tetracarboxylic acids such as these, or their dianhydrides. These may be used individually by 1 type and may be used in combination of 2 or more type.
  • the 4-basic acid (anhydride) among the above exemplified compounds, biphenyltetracarboxylic acid or an anhydride thereof is particularly preferable.
  • the molecular weight is increased by a crosslinking reaction. For this reason, there exist effects, such as an adhesive improvement to a board
  • dibasic acid examples include, for example, maleic acid, succinic acid, itaconic acid, phthalic acid, tetrahydrophthalic acid, hexahydrophthalic acid, methylendomethylenetetrahydrophthalic acid , Chlorendic acid, methyltetrahydrophthalic acid, or anhydrides thereof.
  • tetrahydrophthalic acid, succinic acid, or anhydrides thereof are preferable. These may be used individually by 1 type and may be used in combination of 2 or more type.
  • tribasic acid anhydride
  • trimellitic acid hexahydrotrimellitic acid
  • anhydrides thereof Particularly preferred are trimellitic anhydride and hexahydrotrimellitic anhydride. These may be used individually by 1 type and may be used in combination of 2 or more type.
  • the molecular weight of the alkali-soluble resin (A ′′) can be increased, branching can be introduced into the molecule, and the balance between molecular weight and viscosity can be improved. Can take. Moreover, the amount of acid groups introduced into the molecule can be increased, and a resin having a good balance of sensitivity, adhesion, and the like can be obtained.
  • the addition rate of the 4-basic acid (anhydride) is usually 10 to 100 mol%, preferably 10 to 100 mol%, based on the hydroxyl group produced when the component (b ′′) is added to the component (a ′′). It is 20 to 100 mol%, more preferably 30 to 100 mol%.
  • 4-basic acid is used. It is preferable to use at least one of (anhydride) and dibasic acid (anhydride) in combination with tribasic acid (anhydride).
  • the total addition rate of the component (c ′′) is usually 10 to 100 mol%, preferably 20 to 20%, based on the hydroxyl group produced when the component (b ′′) is added to the component (a ′′). 100 mol%, more preferably 30 to 100 mol%.
  • the component (c ′′) can be added to the component (a ′′) (b ′) in addition to reacting with the hydroxyl group produced when the component (b ′′) is added to the component (a ′′).
  • a component is added and a polyhydric alcohol (d ′′) described later is mixed, it may be reacted with any hydroxyl group present in the mixture.
  • a known method can be used as a method of adding the component (c ′′) after adding the component (b ′′) to the component (a ′′) or mixing the polyhydric alcohol (d ′′) described later to this component.
  • the reaction temperature is usually 80 to 130 ° C, preferably 90 to 125 ° C.
  • the reaction temperature exceeds 130 ° C.
  • polymerization of a part of unsaturated groups in the component (b ′′) occurs, which may lead to a rapid increase in molecular weight.
  • the temperature is lower than 80 ° C., the reaction does not proceed smoothly, and the component (c ′′) may remain.
  • the binder resin used in the present invention is obtained by adding a polyhydric alcohol (d ′′) (hereinafter referred to as “(d ′′)” to the reaction product obtained by adding the component (b ′′) to the component (a ′′) described above.
  • An alkali-soluble resin (A1 ′′) obtained by mixing the above component (c ′′) with any hydroxyl group present in the mixture. It may be.
  • Examples of the component (d ′′) include one or two or more kinds selected from trimethylolpropane, ditrimethylolpropane, pentaerythritol, dipentaerythritol, trimethylolethane, and 1,2,3-propanetriol.
  • a monohydric alcohol is preferred.
  • the molecular weight of the alkali-soluble resin (A1 ′′) can be increased, branching can be introduced into the molecule, and the molecular weight and the viscosity can be balanced. Moreover, the rate of introduction of acid groups into the molecule can be increased, and an organic binder having a good balance of sensitivity and adhesion can be obtained.
  • component (d ′′) used is usually 0.01 to 0.5 times by weight, preferably 0.02 to 0.2 times by weight.
  • Acid value and molecular weight of alkali-soluble resins (A ′′) and (A1 ′′) are usually 10 mg ⁇ KOH / g or more, preferably 50 mg-KOH / g or more.
  • the acid value is preferably not less than the above lower limit value, and sufficient alkali resistance of the colored photosensitive composition is ensured (that is, the rough surface of the pattern surface by the alkaline developer).
  • the acid value is preferably 200 mg-KOH / g or less, and more preferably 150 mg-KOH / g or less.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) in terms of standard polystyrene as measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC) of the alkali-soluble resins (A ′′) and (A1 ′′) is preferably 1,500 or more, and 2,000. More preferably. Moreover, it is preferable that it is 20,000 or less, and it is more preferable that it is 10,000 or less.
  • GPC gel permeation chromatography
  • the alkali-soluble resin (A) is obtained by reacting a reaction product of a specific epoxy resin (a) with an unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b) with at least one of a polybasic acid and its anhydride (c). Is obtained.
  • Epoxy resin (a) The epoxy resin (a) is represented by the following general formula (1-a).
  • n represents an average value and represents a number from 0 to 10.
  • R 41 represents any one of a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, and a biphenyl group. A plurality of R 41 present in one molecule may be the same or different.
  • G represents a glycidyl group.
  • R 41 in the general formula (1-a) represents any of a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, or a biphenyl group.
  • R 41 is particularly preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • a plurality of R 41 present in one molecule may be the same or different.
  • the epoxy resin (a) represented by the general formula (1-a) includes, for example, a compound represented by the following general formula (1-a-1) and an epihalohydrin in the presence of an alkali metal hydroxide. It can be obtained by reacting.
  • n and R 41 represent the same meaning as in formula (1-a).
  • the compound represented by the general formula (1-a-1) is obtained, for example, by subjecting a compound represented by the following general formula (1-a-2) and a phenol to a condensation reaction in the presence of an acid catalyst. be able to.
  • Z represents a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, or a lower alkoxy group.
  • R 41 represents the same meaning as in the general formula (1-a).
  • the halogen atom is preferably a chlorine atom, a bromine atom or the like
  • the lower alkoxy group is preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms such as a methoxy group or an ethoxy group. As a group.
  • phenols are aromatic compounds having one phenolic hydroxyl group per molecule. Specific examples thereof include phenol, cresol, ethylphenol, n-propylphenol, isobutylphenol, t-butylphenol, octylphenol.
  • the amount of phenol used is preferably 0.5 to 20 mol, particularly preferably 2 to 15 mol, per 1 mol of the compound represented by the general formula (1-a-2). .
  • an acid catalyst is preferably used, and various acid catalysts can be used, such as hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid, oxalic acid, boron trifluoride, anhydrous aluminum chloride, zinc chloride, etc.
  • p-toluenesulfonic acid, sulfuric acid, and hydrochloric acid are preferable.
  • the amount of the acid catalyst used is not particularly limited, but it is preferably 0.1 to 30% by weight based on the compound represented by the general formula (1-a-2).
  • the above condensation reaction can be carried out in the absence of a solvent or in the presence of an organic solvent.
  • an organic solvent include toluene, xylene, methyl isobutyl ketone and the like.
  • the amount of the organic solvent used is preferably 50 to 300% by weight, particularly preferably 100 to 250% by weight, based on the total weight of the charged raw materials.
  • the reaction temperature is preferably in the range of 40 to 180 ° C., and the reaction time is preferably 1 to 8 hours.
  • neutralization treatment or water washing treatment is performed to adjust the pH value of the product to 3-7, preferably 5-7.
  • alkali metal hydroxides such as sodium hydroxide and potassium hydroxide
  • alkaline earth metal hydroxides such as calcium hydroxide and magnesium hydroxide
  • ammonia sodium dihydrogen phosphate, diethylenetriamine
  • organic amines such as a triethylenetetramine, aniline, and phenylenediamine
  • the epoxy resin (a) represented by the general formula (1-a) As a method for obtaining the epoxy resin (a) according to the present invention represented by the general formula (1-a) from the compound represented by the general formula (1-a-1), a known method can be employed. For example, an alkali metal hydroxide such as sodium hydroxide or potassium hydroxide is previously added to a dissolved mixture of the compound represented by the general formula (1-a-1) and an excess of epihalohydrin such as epichlorohydrin or epibromohydrin. Alternatively, the epoxy resin (a) represented by the general formula (1-a) can be obtained by reacting at a temperature of 20 to 120 ° C. for 1 to 10 hours while being added.
  • an alkali metal hydroxide such as sodium hydroxide or potassium hydroxide
  • epihalohydrin such as epichlorohydrin or epibromohydrin.
  • the epoxy resin (a) represented by the general formula (1-a) can be obtained by reacting at a temperature of 20 to 120 °
  • an aqueous solution of the alkali metal hydroxide may be used.
  • the aqueous solution of the alkali metal hydroxide is continuously added to the reaction system and the pressure is reduced.
  • water and epihalohydrin may be continuously distilled off under normal pressure, followed by liquid separation, water may be removed, and epihalohydrin may be continuously returned to the reaction system.
  • a quaternary ammonium salt such as tetramethylammonium chloride, tetramethylammonium bromide, trimethylbenzylammonium chloride or the like is added to a dissolved mixture of the compound represented by the general formula (1-a-1) and epihalohydrin as a catalyst
  • a solid or aqueous solution of an alkali metal hydroxide is added, and again 20 Alternatively, the reaction may be carried out at a temperature of ⁇ 120 ° C. for 1 to 10 hours to dehydrohalogenate (ring closure).
  • the amount of epihalohydrin used in such a reaction is usually 1 to 20 mol, preferably 2 to 10 mol, relative to 1 equivalent of the hydroxyl group of the compound represented by the general formula (1-a-1).
  • the amount of the alkali metal hydroxide used is usually 0.8 to 15 mol, preferably 0.9 to 11 mol, per 1 equivalent of the hydroxyl group of the compound represented by the general formula (1-a-1).
  • the reaction may be carried out by adding an aprotic polar solvent such as dimethylsulfone or dimethylsulfoxide in addition to alcohols such as methanol and ethanol.
  • an aprotic polar solvent such as dimethylsulfone or dimethylsulfoxide
  • the amount used is 2 to 20% by weight, preferably 4 to 15% by weight, based on the amount of epihalohydrin.
  • the amount used is 5 to 100% by weight, preferably 10 to 90% by weight, based on the amount of epihalohydrin.
  • Epihalohydrin and other added solvents can be obtained after washing the reaction product of such an epoxidation reaction with or without washing with water under reduced pressure by heating, for example, at 110 to 250 ° C. and a pressure of 1.3 kPa (10 mmHg) or less. Are removed to obtain the desired epoxy resin (a).
  • the obtained epoxy resin is dissolved again in a solvent such as toluene or methyl isobutyl ketone, and an alkali metal hydroxide such as sodium hydroxide or potassium hydroxide is dissolved.
  • the reaction can be carried out by adding an aqueous solution to ensure ring closure.
  • the amount of the alkali metal hydroxide used is preferably 0.01 to 0.3 mol, particularly with respect to 1 equivalent of the hydroxyl group of the compound represented by the general formula (1-a-1) used for epoxidation.
  • the amount is preferably 0.05 to 0.2 mol.
  • the reaction temperature is 50 to 120 ° C., and the reaction time is usually 0.5 to 2 hours.
  • Resin (a) can be obtained.
  • unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid examples include unsaturated carboxylic acids having an ethylenically unsaturated double bond, and specific examples include (meth) acrylic acid, crotonic acid, o-, m-, p -Monocarboxylic acids such as vinyl benzoic acid, ⁇ -position haloalkyl, alkoxyl, halogen, nitro, and cyano substituents of (meth) acrylic acid, 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl succinic acid, 2-acryloyloxyethyl adipic acid , 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl phthalate, 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl hexahydrophthalic acid, 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl maleate, 2- (meth) acryloyloxy propyl acid 2- (meth)
  • (meth) acrylic acid is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of sensitivity. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • Carboxylic acid can be added to the epoxy resin by reacting in an organic solvent at a reaction temperature of 50 to 150 ° C. for several to several tens of hours using a quaternary ammonium salt, pyridine or triphenylphosphine as a catalyst.
  • the amount of the catalyst used is preferably from 0.01 to 10% by weight, particularly preferably from 0.3 to 10% by weight based on the reaction raw material mixture (total of epoxy resin (a) and unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b)). 5% by weight.
  • a polymerization inhibitor for example, methoquinone, hydroquinone, methylhydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, pyrogallol, tert-butylcatechol, phenothiazine, etc.
  • the amount is preferably 0.01 to 10% by weight, particularly preferably 0.1 to 5% by weight, based on the reaction raw material mixture.
  • the proportion of the unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b) added to the epoxy group of the epoxy resin (a) is usually 90 to 100 mol%. Residual epoxy groups adversely affect storage stability. Therefore, the unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b) is usually 0.8 to 1.5 equivalents, particularly 0, to 1 equivalent of the epoxy group of the epoxy resin (a). It is preferable to carry out the reaction at a ratio of 9 to 1.1 equivalents.
  • polybasic acid and its anhydride As the polybasic acid to be added to the hydroxyl group of the reaction product of the epoxy resin (a) and the unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b) and its anhydride (c), known ones can be used, maleic acid, succinic acid, Itaconic acid, phthalic acid, tetrahydrophthalic acid, hexahydrophthalic acid, methylendomethylenetetrahydrophthalic acid, chlorendic acid, methyltetrahydrophthalic acid, 5-norbornene-2,3-dicarboxylic acid, methyl-5-norbornene-2,3 A dibasic carboxylic acid such as dicarboxylic acid or an anhydride thereof; a polybasic carboxylic acid such as trimellitic acid, pyromellitic acid, benzophenone tetracarboxylic acid, biphenyltetracarboxylic acid, or an anhydride thereof. Among these, t
  • the addition rate of at least one of the polybasic acid and its anhydride (c) is usually 10 to 100 of the hydroxyl group produced when the unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b) is added to the epoxy resin (a).
  • the mol% preferably 20 to 100 mol%, more preferably 30 to 100 mol%. If the addition rate is too high, the remaining film rate during development may decrease, and if it is too low, the solubility may be insufficient or the adhesion to the substrate may be insufficient.
  • the said addition rate represents the total addition rate of a polybasic acid and its anhydride.
  • the epoxy group-containing compound (d) may be added to a part of the generated carboxyl group.
  • the epoxy group-containing compound (d) in order to improve photosensitivity, glycidyl (meth) acrylate, 3,4-epoxycyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, glycidyl ether compound having a polymerizable unsaturated group, etc.
  • a glycidyl ether compound having no polymerizable unsaturated group can be added, or both of them may be used in combination.
  • the glycidyl ether compound having no polymerizable unsaturated group include a glycidyl ether compound having a phenyl group or an alkyl group (manufactured by Nagase Chemical Industries, Ltd., trade names: Denacol EX-111, Denacol EX-121, Denacol). EX-141, Denacol EX-145, Denacol EX-146, Denacol EX-171, Denacol EX-192) and the like.
  • the alkali-soluble resin (A) according to the present invention is a reaction product of the epoxy resin (a) and the unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b), and at least one of a polybasic acid and its anhydride (c). It may be a resin obtained by adding such an epoxy group-containing compound (d) to a part of the carboxyl group of a resin obtained by reacting with.
  • the weight-average molecular weight (Mw) in terms of polystyrene measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC) of the alkali-soluble resin (A) used in the present invention is usually 1500 or more, preferably Is 2000 or more, usually 50000 or less, preferably 30000 or less, more preferably 10,000 or less. If the weight average molecular weight of the alkali-soluble resin (A) is too small, the sensitivity is inferior, and if it is too large, the solubility in the developer is insufficient, which is not preferable.
  • the acid value (mgKOH / g) of the alkali-soluble resin (A) used in the present invention is usually 10 or more, preferably 50 or more, and usually 200 or less, preferably 150 or less. If the acid value of the alkali-soluble resin (A) is too low, sufficient solubility may not be obtained. If the acid value is too high, curability is insufficient and the surface properties of the coating film tend to deteriorate.
  • the condensation reaction of the compound represented by the general formula (1-a-2) and the phenol compound, and the compound represented by the general formula (1-a-1) obtained by the condensation reaction and the epihalohydrin The synthesis reaction of the alkali-soluble resin (A) such as reaction, addition reaction with at least one of the unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b) and the polybasic acid and its anhydride (c) can be performed by a known method. For example, it can be performed by the method described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-55814.
  • Alkali-soluble resin (A ' ) As the binder resin in the present invention, particularly preferred other examples of things, 'epoxy compound represented by (a following general formula (1-a)' and), the reaction product of an unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b ') And an alkali-soluble resin (A ′ ) obtained by reacting with at least one of a polybasic acid and its anhydride (c ′ ).
  • p and q each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4, and R 31 and R 32 each independently represent an alkyl group or a halogen atom. R 33 and R 34 each independently represents an alkylene group. x and y each independently represents an integer of 0 or more. ]
  • the alkyl group of R 31 and R 32 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and the halogen atom includes Cl, Br, F and the like.
  • R 31 and R 32 are particularly preferably each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • the bonding position of R 31 and R 32 to the benzene ring is not particularly limited,
  • the o-position is preferred.
  • R 31 and R 32 may be the same group or different groups, but are preferably the same group from the viewpoint of production cost.
  • Examples of the alkylene group for R 33 and R 34 include an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and it is particularly preferable that they are each independently an ethylene group or a propylene group.
  • X and y each independently represents an integer of 0 or more, but is usually 0 to 6, preferably 0 to 3. In general, the larger x and y, the higher the solubility, but if it is too large, the sensitivity may decrease.
  • R 33 and R 34 may be the same group or different groups, but are preferably the same group from the viewpoint of production cost.
  • the molecular weight of these components (a ′ ) is usually in the range of 200 to 200,000, preferably 300 to 100,000, as the weight average molecular weight (Mw) in terms of standard polystyrene as measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC). .
  • Mw weight average molecular weight
  • GPC gel permeation chromatography
  • Unsaturated carboxylic acid (b ' ) examples include those in ⁇ Alkali-soluble resin (A ′′), Alkali-soluble resin (A1 ′′)>.
  • the same compounds as those mentioned as the saturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b ′′) can be used.
  • (meth) acrylic acid is preferred among ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated carboxylic acids, and acrylic acid is particularly preferred because of its high reactivity.
  • ⁇ -unsaturated carboxylic acid esters having a carboxyl group in the ester moiety
  • 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl phthalic acid and 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl maleic acid are preferred.
  • the amount of component (b ′ ) used is preferably in the range of 0.5 to 1.2 equivalents, more preferably in the range of 0.7 to 1.1 equivalents, relative to 1 equivalent of the epoxy group of component (a ′ ). .
  • B ' By making the usage-amount of a component more than a lower limit, a sufficient quantity of unsaturated groups can be introduce
  • polybasic acid and its anhydride (c ′ ) As the polybasic acid and its anhydride (c ′ ), those listed as the polybasic acid and its anhydride (c ′′ ) in ⁇ Alkali-soluble resin (A ′′), Alkali-soluble resin (A1 ′′)> And the like, and tetrahydrophthalic acid, biphenyltetracarboxylic acid, and anhydrides thereof are preferable.
  • the addition rate of at least one of the polybasic acid and its anhydride (c ′) should be such that the final alkali-soluble resin (A ′) has an acid value of 10 to 150 mg-KOH / g. More preferably, it is 20 to 140 mg-KOH / g.
  • the acid value By setting the acid value to be equal to or higher than the above lower limit, alkali developability is improved, and by setting the acid value to be equal to or lower than the upper limit, sufficient photocurability is obtained.
  • transduced polyfunctional alcohol (d ' ) such as a trimethylol propane, a pentaerythritol, a dipentaerythritol, and introduce
  • the polyhydric alcohol (d ′) include compounds similar to those described above as the polyhydric alcohol (d ′′ ) in ⁇ Alkali-soluble resin (A ′′), Alkali-soluble resin (A1 ′′)>. The same applies to the preferred compounds and preferred amounts.
  • the weight average molecular weight in terms of standard polystyrene by gel permeation chromatography (GPC) of the alkali-soluble resin (A ') (Mw) is usually 1,000 or more, preferably 1,500 or more, usually 30,000 or less , Preferably 20,000 or less, more preferably 10,000 or less, particularly preferably 8,000 or less.
  • GPC gel permeation chromatography
  • Other examples of particularly preferable binder resins in the present invention include an epoxy resin (a ′ ′′) represented by the following general formula (1-a ′ ′′) and an unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b ′ ′′). And an alkali-soluble resin (A ′ ′′) obtained by reacting the reaction product with at least one of a polybasic acid and its anhydride (c ′ ′′).
  • R 51 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms
  • R 52 represents a divalent polycyclic hydrocarbon group having 5 to 16 carbon atoms
  • R 53 and R 54 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a glycidyl group.
  • s represents 1 or 2.
  • t and z represent the proportion of each repeating unit, and t ⁇ z ⁇ 0.5t.
  • R 51 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. Among them, a hydrogen atom or a methyl group is preferable from the viewpoint of photocurability.
  • S represents 1 or 2, and is preferably 1.
  • R 52 represents a divalent polycyclic hydrocarbon group having 5 to 16 carbon atoms. Such a group refers to an unsaturated polycyclic hydrocarbon ring compound having the same skeleton and at least two carbon-carbon double bonds (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “unsaturated polycyclic hydrocarbon compound”). It can be formed by using the raw material and carrying out the reaction described below.
  • Examples of the unsaturated polycyclic hydrocarbon ring compound as a raw material include the following compounds, but are not limited thereto.
  • a bridged carbocycle is more preferable, and dicyclopentadiene is particularly preferable.
  • the epoxy resin (a ′ ′′) represented by the general formula (1-a ′ ′′) is a polyaddition of the unsaturated polycyclic hydrocarbon compound described above and a phenol compound represented by the following general formula. It can be obtained by glycidylation of the hydroxyl group of the reaction product.
  • R 51 and s are as defined in the general formula (1-a ′ ′′).
  • epoxy resin (a ′ ′′) a compound represented by the following general formula (1-a ′ ′′-1) obtained by glycidylation of a polyaddition reaction product of dicyclopentadiene and the above-described phenol compound is used. Particularly preferred.
  • the introduction ratio of the glycidyl group in the general formula (1-a ′ ′′) and the general formula (1-a ′ ′′-1) is 50 to 100 mol of the phenolic hydroxyl group in the phenol resin before glycidylation.
  • % That is, t and z in the general formula (1-a ′ ′′) and the general formula (1-a ′ ′′-1) must have a relationship of t ⁇ z ⁇ 0.5t, preferably It is preferable that 70 to 100 mol% is substituted with a glycidyl group.
  • the alkali-soluble resin (A ′ ′′) is a reaction product of the epoxy resin (a ′ ′′) represented by the general formula (1-a ′ ′′) and the unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b ′ ′′). Is a resin obtained by reacting at least one of a polybasic acid and its anhydride (c ′ ′′).
  • unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b ′ ′′) those listed as unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b ′′) in ⁇ Alkali-soluble resin (A ′′), alkali-soluble resin (A1 ′′)>
  • a ′′ alkali-soluble resin
  • A1 ′′ alkali-soluble resin
  • the proportion of the unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b ′ ′′) added to the epoxy group of the epoxy resin (a ′′ ′′) is usually 90 to 100 mol%. Since the remaining epoxy group adversely affects storage stability, the unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b ′ ′′) is usually 0.8 to 1 with respect to 1 equivalent of the epoxy group of the epoxy resin (a ′′ ′). It is preferable to carry out the reaction at a ratio of 0.5 equivalent, particularly 0.9 to 1.1 equivalent.
  • Polybasic acid and its anhydride (c ′ ′′) are also exemplified as polybasic acid and its anhydride (c ′′) in ⁇ Alkali-soluble resin (A ′′), Alkali-soluble resin (A1 ′′)>.
  • a ′′ Alkali-soluble resin
  • A1 ′′ Alkali-soluble resin
  • the addition rate of at least one of the polybasic acid and its anhydride is generated when an unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b ′ ′′) is added to the epoxy resin (a ′ ′′).
  • the hydroxyl group is usually 15 to 100 mol%, preferably 20 to 90 mol%, and the final acid-soluble resin (A ′ ′′) has an acid value of 45 to 160 mg-KOH / g. Is preferred.
  • this addition rate not more than the above upper limit value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the remaining film rate during development, and by making it not less than the above lower limit value, good solubility and adhesion to the substrate can be obtained. Can do.
  • the said addition rate represents the total addition rate of a polybasic acid and its anhydride.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the alkali-soluble resin (A '' ') is usually 1,500 to 4,000, preferably 2,000 to 3,500, more preferably 2,500 to 3,000. If the weight average molecular weight is too small, there may be a problem that the developing solubility is too high, and if it is too large, there may be a problem that the developing solubility is too low.
  • these binder resins may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the binder resin in the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention among the above alkali-soluble resins (A), (A ′), (A ′′), (A ′ ′′), (A1 ′′), the shape Alkali-soluble resins (A) and (A ′ ′′) are preferable from the viewpoints of control of the level difference and the balance of adhesion to the substrate.
  • the content of the binder resin is usually 5% by weight or more, preferably 10% by weight or more, and usually 80% by weight or less, preferably 70% by weight or less, based on the total solid content of the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention. It is.
  • the content of the binder resin is usually 5% by weight or more, preferably 10% by weight or more, and usually 80% by weight or less, preferably 70% by weight or less, based on the total solid content of the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention. It is.
  • the content of the binder resin is usually 5% by weight or more, preferably 10% by weight or more, and usually 80% by weight or less, preferably 70% by weight or less, based on the total solid content of the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention. It is.
  • Photopolymerizable monomer In the present invention, the photopolymerization initiator is used together with a photopolymerizable monomer such as an ethylenically unsaturated compound.
  • an ethylenically unsaturated compound means a compound having at least one ethylenically unsaturated bond in the molecule, but it is polymerizable, crosslinkable, and a developer for exposed and non-exposed areas associated therewith.
  • a compound having two or more ethylenically unsaturated bonds in the molecule is preferable from the viewpoint that the difference in solubility can be expanded, and the ethylenically unsaturated bond is derived from a (meth) acryloyloxy group. More preferred are (meth) acrylate compounds.
  • a compound having three or more ethylenically unsaturated bonds in the molecule for example, (meth) acrylic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, itaconic acid, unsaturated carboxylic acids such as citraconic acid, and their alkyl esters , (Meth) acrylonitrile, (meth) acrylamide, styrene and the like.
  • the compounds having two or more ethylenically unsaturated bonds are typically esters of unsaturated carboxylic acids and polyhydroxy compounds, (meth) acryloyloxy group-containing phosphates, hydroxy (meth) acrylates.
  • esters of unsaturated carboxylic acids and polyhydroxy compounds include (meth) acryloyloxy group-containing phosphates, hydroxy (meth) acrylates.
  • examples include urethane (meth) acrylates of a compound and a polyisocyanate compound, and epoxy (meth) acrylates of a (meth) acrylic acid or hydroxy (meth) acrylate compound and a polyepoxy compound.
  • esters of an unsaturated carboxylic acid and a polyhydroxy compound include the following compounds.
  • sugar alcohol includes ethylene glycol, polyethylene glycol (addition number 2-14), propylene glycol, polypropylene glycol (addition number 2-14), trimethylene glycol, Examples include tetramethylene glycol, hexamethylene glycol, trimethylolpropane, glycerol, pentaerythritol, dipentaerythritol and the like.
  • Reaction product of unsaturated carboxylic acid and alkylene oxide adduct of sugar alcohol; sugar alcohol is the same as above.
  • Specific examples of the alkylene oxide adduct include an ethylene oxide adduct and a propylene oxide adduct.
  • Reaction product of unsaturated carboxylic acid and alcohol amine; specific examples of alcohol amines include diethanolamine and triethanolamine.
  • esters of unsaturated carboxylic acid and polyhydroxy compound are as follows. Ethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, diethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, propylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane di (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane ethylene oxide addition tri (meta) ) Acrylate, glycerol di (meth) acrylate, glycerol tri (meth) acrylate, glycerol propylene oxide addition tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol di (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate , Dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (me
  • esters of unsaturated carboxylic acids and polyhydroxy compounds include unsaturated carboxylic acids and aromatic polyhydroxy compounds such as hydroquinone, resorcinol, pyrogallol, bisphenol F, bisphenol A, or their ethylene oxide adducts. And the reaction product.
  • (meth) acryloyloxy group-containing phosphates those represented by the following general formulas (6), (7) and (8) are preferable.
  • R A represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • e and g are integers of 1 to 25, and f is 1, 2 or 3.
  • e and g are preferably 1 to 10, particularly 1 to 4. Specific examples thereof include (meth) acryloyloxyethyl phosphate, bis [(meth) acryloyloxyethyl] phosphate, ( (Meth) acryloyloxyethylene glycol phosphate and the like, and these may be used alone or as a mixture.
  • urethane (meth) acrylates of a hydroxy (meth) acrylate compound and a polyisocyanate compound examples include hydroxy (meth) acrylates such as hydroxymethyl (meth) acrylate, hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, and tetramethylolethane tri (meth) acrylate.
  • aliphatic polyisocyanate such as hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,8-diisocyanate-4-isocyanate methyloctane, cyclohexane diisocyanate, dimethylcyclohexane diisocyanate, 4,4-methylenebis (cyclohexyl isocyanate), isophorone diisocyanate, bicycloheptanetri Cycloaliphatic polyisocyanates such as isocyanate, 4,4-diphenylmethane diisocyanate, tri Aromatic polyisocyanates such as (isocyanate phenyl) thiophosphate, heterocyclic polyisocyanates such as isocyanurate, a reaction product of a polyisocyanate compounds and the like.
  • aliphatic polyisocyanate such as hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,8-diisocyanate-4-isocyanate methyloctane, cyclohexane
  • Examples of such products include trade names “U-4HA”, “UA-306A”, “UA-MC340H”, “UA-MC340H”, “U6LPA” manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., and the like.
  • a compound having 4 or more urethane bonds [—NH—CO—O—] and 4 or more (meth) acryloyloxy groups in one molecule is preferable, and examples of the compound include pentaerythritol, poly A compound obtained by reacting a diisocyanate compound such as hexamethylene diisocyanate, trimethylhexamethylene diisocyanate, isophorone diisocyanate, tolylene diisocyanate with a compound having 4 or more hydroxyl groups in one molecule such as glycerin, or ethylene glycol
  • Biuret type A compound having 3 or more isocyanate groups in one molecule such as adduct type such as “Duranate P-301-75E”, “Duranate E-402-90T” and “Duranate E-405-80T” is reacted.
  • a compound having 4 or more, preferably 6 or more isocyanate groups in one molecule such as a compound obtained by polymerizing or copolymerizing isocyanate ethyl (meth) acrylate or the like,
  • a compound obtained by polymerizing or copolymerizing isocyanate ethyl (meth) acrylate or the like For example, “Duranate ME20-100” manufactured by Asahi Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd., pentaerythritol di (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, etc.
  • One or more hydroxyl groups in one molecule and FOB can preferably be obtained by a compound having three or more (meth) acryloyloxy group, it is reacted.
  • epoxy (meth) acrylates of (meth) acrylic acid or a hydroxy (meth) acrylate compound and a polyepoxy compound examples include (meth) acrylic acid, or a hydroxy (meth) acrylate compound as described above, and (poly) Ethylene glycol polyglycidyl ether, (poly) propylene glycol polyglycidyl ether, (poly) tetramethylene glycol polyglycidyl ether, (poly) pentamethylene glycol polyglycidyl ether, (poly) neopentyl glycol polyglycidyl ether, (poly) hexamethylene Glycol polyglycidyl ether, (poly) trimethylolpropane polyglycidyl ether, (poly) glycerol polyglycidyl ether, (poly) sorbitol polyglycidyl ether Aliphatic polyepoxy compounds such as ruthenium,
  • ethylenically unsaturated compounds include, for example, (meth) acrylamides such as ethylenebis (meth) acrylamide, allyl esters such as diallyl phthalate, vinyl group-containing compounds such as divinyl phthalate, ether bonds Thioether bond-containing compounds in which the ether bond of the ethylenically unsaturated compound is sulfurized with phosphorus pentasulfide or the like to change to a thioether bond to improve the crosslinking rate, and for example, Japanese Patent No.
  • a polyfunctional (meth) acrylate compound and a silica sol having a particle diameter of 5 to 30 nm for example, isopropanol-dispersed organosilica sol (“IPA-ST” manufactured by Nissan Chemical Co., Ltd.)), methyl ethyl ketone-dispersed organo described in JP-A-9-100111, etc.
  • Silica sol (Nissan Chemical Co., Ltd.) MEK-ST ”), methyl isobutyl ketone-dispersed organosilica sol (“ MIBK-ST ”manufactured by NISSAN CHEMICAL CO., LTD.)] And the like, and the like, by using an isocyanate group or a mercapto group-containing silane coupling agent.
  • silica sol Nisan Chemical Co., Ltd.) MEK-ST
  • MIBK-ST methyl isobutyl ketone-dispersed organosilica sol
  • MIBK-ST methyl isobutyl ketone-dispersed organosilica sol
  • examples thereof include compounds in which the strength and heat resistance as a cured product are improved by reacting and bonding a silica sol with a functional unsaturated compound via a silane coupling agent.
  • ester (meth) acrylates or urethane (meth) acrylates are preferable, and among them, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate and the like. Those having 5 or more functional groups are particularly preferred.
  • ethylenically unsaturated compounds may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the proportion of the photopolymerizable monomer in the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention is usually 1 to 60% by weight, preferably 5 to 40% by weight, particularly preferably 12 to 30% by weight, based on the total solid content. If the proportion of the photopolymerizable monomer is too much within this range, the degree of curing tends to decrease as the proportion of the other components decreases, so the voltage holding ratio tends to deteriorate. On the other hand, if the amount is too small, the amount of the alkali resin increases, so that the developability tends to decrease.
  • Photopolymerization initiator is usually used as a mixture (photopolymerization initiator system) with an accelerator, and a sensitizing dye added as necessary is used in combination.
  • the photopolymerization initiator system is a component that directly absorbs light or is photosensitized to cause a decomposition reaction or a hydrogen abstraction reaction to generate a polymerization active radical.
  • photopolymerization initiator constituting the photopolymerization initiator system component
  • various compounds described in International Publication No. 2008/153000 can be used.
  • the photopolymerization initiator used in the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention is particularly preferably an oxime ester compound from the viewpoint of good generation efficiency of polymerization active radicals.
  • the compounds exemplified below are preferably used. Can do.
  • Examples of the accelerator and the sensitizing dye constituting the photopolymerization initiator component include, for example, various compounds described in International Publication No. 2008/153000, and preferable compounds are also described in International Publication No. 2008/153000. It is the same as the prepared compound.
  • the content ratio of the photopolymerization initiator system component is usually 0.1 to 40% by weight, preferably 0.8% in the total solid content in the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention. 5 to 30% by weight. If this content is extremely low, the sensitivity to exposure light may be reduced. On the other hand, if it is extremely high, the solubility of the unexposed portion in the developer may be reduced, leading to poor development.
  • the content of the sensitizing dye in the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention is usually 0 to 20% by weight, preferably 0 to 15% by weight, more preferably 0 to 0% by weight based on the total solid content in the colored photosensitive composition. 10% by weight.
  • Dispersant / dispersion aid In the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention, at least one of a pigment dispersant and a dispersion aid is used in combination in order to improve the dispersibility and dispersion stability of the pigment. Is preferred. Among them, it is particularly preferable to use a polymer dispersant as the pigment dispersant because it is excellent in dispersion stability with time.
  • the polymer dispersant is a polymer having a completely different structure from the pigment for ensuring the dispersion stability of the pigment, and the dispersion aid means a pigment derivative or the like for enhancing the dispersibility of the pigment. .
  • polymer dispersant examples include a urethane dispersant, a polyethyleneimine dispersant, a polyoxyethylene alkyl ether dispersant, a polyoxyethylene glycol diester dispersant, a sorbitan aliphatic ester dispersant, and an aliphatic modified polyester. And the like, and the like.
  • Specific examples of these dispersants are trade names of EFKA (manufactured by BASF), DisperBYK (manufactured by Big Chemie), Disparon (manufactured by Enomoto Kasei Co., Ltd.), SOLPERSE (manufactured by Geneca), KP (Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd. Co., Ltd.), Polyflow (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.) and the like.
  • These polymer dispersants can be used singly or in combination of two or more.
  • pigment derivatives azo, phthalocyanine, quinacridone, benzimidazolone, quinophthalone, isoindolinone, dioxazine, anthraquinone, indanthrene, perylene, perinone, diketopyrrolopyrrole, dioxazine
  • Derivatives such as quinophthalone are preferable, among which quinophthalone is preferable.
  • Substituents of pigment derivatives include sulfonic acid groups, sulfonamide groups and quaternary salts thereof, phthalimidomethyl groups, dialkylaminoalkyl groups, hydroxyl groups, carboxyl groups, amide groups, etc.
  • pigment skeleton or alkyl groups, aryl groups, and complex groups examples thereof include those bonded via a ring group and the like, and a sulfonic acid group is preferable. Further, a plurality of these substituents may be substituted on one pigment skeleton.
  • pigment derivatives include phthalocyanine sulfonic acid derivatives, quinophthalone sulfonic acid derivatives, anthraquinone sulfonic acid derivatives, quinacridone sulfonic acid derivatives, diketopyrrolopyrrole sulfonic acid derivatives, and dioxazine sulfonic acid derivatives.
  • These pigment derivatives can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of at least one of the dispersant and the dispersion aid is usually 5% by weight to 120% by weight, preferably 5% by weight to 90% by weight, based on the pigment.
  • it is 5 wt% or more and 60 wt% or less, and a particularly preferred range is 5 wt% or more and 40 wt% or less. If the content of the dispersant and the dispersion aid is too small, sufficient dispersibility may not be obtained. If the content is too large, the ratio of other components may be relatively decreased, and the voltage holding ratio may be decreased.
  • the said content represents content of the sum total of a dispersing agent and a dispersing aid.
  • the amount used is usually 0.1 to 30% by weight, preferably 0.1 to 20% by weight, more preferably 0.1 to 10% by weight, based on the pigment in the colored photosensitive composition. More preferably, it is 0.1 to 5% by weight.
  • the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention generally contains the above-described pigment, binder resin, photopolymerizable monomer, photopolymerization initiator, dispersant and dispersion aid, and the solid content of other components described below as a solvent. It is prepared by dissolving or dispersing in.
  • the solvent has a function of adjusting the viscosity by dissolving or dispersing the pigment, binder resin, photopolymerizable monomer, photopolymerization initiator, and the like in the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention.
  • a solvent having a boiling point in the range of 100 to 300 ° C. is preferably selected.
  • a solvent having a boiling point of 120 to 280 ° C. is more preferable. Examples of such a solvent include various solvents described in International Publication No. 2008/153000.
  • solvents may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • a solvent having a boiling point in the range of 100 to 200 ° C. (under a pressure of 101.25 [hPa], the same applies to the boiling points hereinafter) is selected. More preferably. Particularly preferred are those having a boiling point of 120 to 170 ° C.
  • glycol alkyl ether acetates are preferred from the viewpoint of good balance of coating properties, surface tension, etc., and relatively high solubility of constituents in the composition. .
  • glycol alkyl ether acetates may be used alone or in combination with other solvents.
  • glycol monoalkyl ethers are particularly preferable.
  • propylene glycol monomethyl ether is particularly preferred because of the solubility of the constituent components in the composition.
  • Glycol monoalkyl ethers are highly polar, and if the amount added is too large, the pigment is likely to aggregate, and the storage stability such as the viscosity of the colored photosensitive composition tends to increase over time tends to decrease.
  • the proportion of glycol monoalkyl ethers in the solvent is preferably 5 to 30% by weight, more preferably 5 to 20% by weight.
  • a solvent having a boiling point of 150 ° C. or higher (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “high boiling point solvent”).
  • high boiling point solvent a solvent having a boiling point of 150 ° C. or higher
  • diethylene glycol mono-n-butyl ether, diethylene glycol mono-n-butyl ether acetate, and diethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate are particularly preferred. preferable.
  • the content of the high boiling point solvent in the solvent is preferably 3% to 50% by weight, more preferably 5% to 40% by weight, and particularly preferably 5% to 30% by weight.
  • the high boiling point solvent having a boiling point of 150 ° C. or higher may be glycol alkyl ether acetates or glycol alkyl ethers. In this case, a high boiling point solvent having a boiling point of 150 ° C. or higher is not separately contained. It doesn't matter.
  • Preferred high boiling solvents include, for example, diethylene glycol mono-n-butyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, dipropylene glycol methyl ether acetate, 1,3-butylene glycol diacetate, and 1,6-hexanol diester. Examples include acetate and triacetin.
  • the content of the solvent in the entire colored photosensitive composition of the present invention is not particularly limited, but is usually 99% by weight or less, usually 50% by weight or more, preferably 55% by weight or more, more preferably 60% by weight or more. It is.
  • the ratio of the solvent to the above upper limit or less, the colored photosensitive composition can contain a necessary and sufficient amount of solids such as a pigment, a binder resin, and a photopolymerizable monomer.
  • thickening can be suppressed and favorable applicability
  • the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention is prepared by using a solvent so that the solid content concentration is usually 5 to 50% by weight, preferably 10 to 30% by weight.
  • the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention further includes a polymerization accelerator, a sensitizing dye, a surfactant, a photoacid generator, a crosslinking agent, an adhesion improver, A plasticizer, a storage stabilizer, a surface protective agent, an organic carboxylic acid, an organic carboxylic acid anhydride, a development improver, a thermal polymerization inhibitor and the like may be contained.
  • Photoacid generator is a compound capable of generating an acid by ultraviolet rays, and there is a crosslinking agent such as a melamine compound by the action of the acid generated upon exposure. As a result, the crosslinking reaction proceeds.
  • a crosslinking agent such as a melamine compound by the action of the acid generated upon exposure.
  • the crosslinking reaction proceeds.
  • photoacid generators those having a high solubility in a solvent, particularly in a solvent used in a colored photosensitive composition, are preferred.
  • a photoacid generator When a photoacid generator is used, its content is preferably 0 to 20% by weight, particularly preferably 2 to 15% by weight, based on the total solid content of the colored photosensitive composition.
  • crosslinking agent To the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention, a crosslinking agent can be further added.
  • a crosslinking agent can be further added.
  • a melamine or guanamine compound can be used.
  • these crosslinking agents include melamine or guanamine compounds represented by the following general formula (XI).
  • R 61 represents a —NR 66 R 67 group or an aryl group, and when R 61 is a —NR 66 R 67 group, one of R 62 , R 63 , R 64 , R 65 , R 66 and R 67 And when R 61 is an aryl group, one of R 62 , R 63 , R 64 and R 65 represents a —CH 2 OR 68 group, and R 62 , R 63 , R 64 , R 65 , R 66 and R 65
  • the rest of 67 independently of each other, represents a hydrogen atom or a —CH 2 OR 68 group, where R 68 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
  • the aryl group is typically a phenyl group, a 1-naphthyl group, or a 2-naphthyl group, and a substituent such as an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or a halogen atom is bonded to the phenyl group or naphthyl group. It may be.
  • the alkyl group and the alkoxy group can each have 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • Alkyl group represented by R 68 is, among the above, methyl group or ethyl group, especially common that a methyl group.
  • Melamine compounds corresponding to the general formula (XI), that is, compounds of the following general formula (XI-1) include hexamethylol melamine, pentamethylol melamine, tetramethylol melamine, hexamethoxymethyl melamine, pentamethoxymethyl melamine, tetra Methoxymethyl melamine, hexaethoxymethyl melamine and the like are included.
  • R 62 , R 63 , R 64 , R 65 , R 66 and R 67 is an aryl group
  • one of R 62 , R 63 , R 64 and R 65 represents a —CH 2 OR 68 group.
  • the remainder of R 62 , R 63 , R 64 , R 65 , R 66 and R 67 independently of one another represents a hydrogen atom or a —CH 2 OR 68 group, wherein R 68 represents a hydrogen atom or alkyl.
  • guanamine compounds corresponding to the general formula (XI), that is, compounds in which R 61 in the general formula (XI) is an aryl group include tetramethylol benzoguanamine, tetramethoxymethyl benzoguanamine, trimethoxymethyl benzoguanamine, tetraethoxymethyl. Benzoguanamine and the like are included.
  • a crosslinking agent having a methylol group or a methylol alkyl ether group can also be used. Examples are given below. 2,6-bis (hydroxymethyl) -4-methylphenol, 4-tert-butyl-2,6-bis (hydroxymethyl) phenol, 5-ethyl-1,3-bis (hydroxymethyl) perhydro-1,3 , 5-triazin-2-one (commonly known as N- ethyl-dimethylol triazone) or its dimethyl ether thereof, dimethylol trimethylene urea or dimethyl ether thereof, 3,5-bis (hydroxymethyl) perhydro-1,3,5 Oxadiazin-4-one (commonly called dimethyloluron) or a dimethyl ether thereof, tetramethylol glyoxal diurein or a tetramethyl ether thereof.
  • crosslinking agents may be used individually by 1 type, or may be used in combination of 2 or more type.
  • the amount when the crosslinking agent is used is preferably from 0.1 to 15% by weight, particularly preferably from 0.5 to 10% by weight, based on the total solid content of the colored photosensitive composition.
  • the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention may contain an adhesion improving agent in order to sufficiently adhere fine lines and dots.
  • a compound containing a nitrogen atom, a phosphoric acid group-containing compound, a silane coupling agent and the like are preferable.
  • the compound containing a nitrogen atom include diamines (described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-184080).
  • other azoles are preferred. Among them, azoles are preferable, and in particular, imidazoles (adhesion improvers described in JP-A-9-236923, etc.), benzimidazoles, benzotriazoles (adhesion improvement described in JP-A-2000-171968). Agents, etc.) are preferred, and imidazoles and benzimidazoles are most preferred.
  • 2-hydroxybenzimidazole, 2-hydroxyethylbenzimidazole, benzimidazole, 2-hydroxyimidazole, imidazole, 2-mercaptoimidazole, 2 are less likely to cause fogging and greatly improve the adhesion.
  • -Aminoimidazole is preferred, and 2-hydroxybenzimidazole, benzimidazole, 2-hydroxyimidazole, and imidazole are particularly preferred.
  • silane coupling agents such as epoxy, methacrylic, amino, etc. can be used, and epoxy and isocyanate silane coupling agents are particularly preferred.
  • the blending ratio varies depending on the type of the adhesion improver used, but is 0.01 to 5% by weight, particularly 0.05%, based on the total solid content of the colored photosensitive composition. It is preferable to set it to 3% by weight. If it is less than this, sufficient adhesion improving effect may not be obtained, and if it is too much, developability may be lowered.
  • Sensitizing dyes examples include xanthene dyes described in JP-A-4-221958 and JP-A-4-219756, JP-A-3-239703, and Japan.
  • Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 60-88005 Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 59-56403, Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No.
  • the content of the sensitizing dye in the total solid content in the colored photosensitive composition is usually 0.01 to 5% by weight, preferably 0.05 to 3% by weight. If it is less than this, the sensitization effect may not be obtained, and if it is too much, developability may be lowered.
  • surfactant As the surfactant, one or more of anionic, cationic, nonionic, amphoteric surfactants and the like can be used, but they adversely affect various properties. In view of low possibility, it is preferable to use a nonionic surfactant. In addition, fluorine-based and silicon-based materials are effective in terms of coating properties.
  • the blending ratio is usually 0.001 to 10% by weight, preferably 0.005 to 1% by weight, more preferably 0.8%, based on the total solid content in the colored photosensitive composition.
  • the range is from 01 to 0.5% by weight, most preferably from 0.03 to 0.3% by weight. If the addition amount of the surfactant is less than the above range, the smoothness and uniformity of the coating film may not be expressed. If the addition amount is large, the smoothness and uniformity of the coating film may not be expressed, and other characteristics may be exhibited. It may get worse.
  • the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention contains at least one of an organic carboxylic acid and an organic carboxylic anhydride for the purpose of improving developability and improving background stains. You may go out.
  • organic carboxylic acids include aliphatic carboxylic acids and aromatic carboxylic acids.
  • aliphatic carboxylic acid include monoacids such as formic acid, acetic acid, propionic acid, butyric acid, valeric acid, pivalic acid, caproic acid, diethyl acetic acid, enanthic acid, caprylic acid, glycolic acid, acrylic acid, and methacrylic acid.
  • dicarboxylic acids such as succinic acid, cyclohexanedicarboxylic acid, cyclohexenedicarboxylic acid, itaconic acid, citraconic acid, maleic acid, and fumaric acid
  • tricarboxylic acids such as tricarbaryl acid, aconitic acid, and camphoric acid.
  • aromatic carboxylic acid examples include benzoic acid, toluic acid, cumic acid, hemellitic acid, mesitylene acid, phthalic acid, phthalic acid, isophthalic acid, terephthalic acid, trimellitic acid, trimesic acid, and melophane. Acids, pyromellitic acid, phenylacetic acid, hydroatropic acid, hydrocinnamic acid, mandelic acid, phenylsuccinic acid, atropaic acid, cinnamic acid, methyl cinnamate, benzyl cinnamate, cinnamylidene acetic acid, coumaric acid, umberic acid, etc. Examples thereof include carboxylic acids in which a carboxyl group is directly bonded to a phenyl group, and carboxylic acids in which a carboxyl group is bonded to the phenyl group through a carbon bond.
  • organic carboxylic acids monocarboxylic acids and dicarboxylic acids are preferable, among which malonic acid, glutaric acid, and glycolic acid are more preferable, and malonic acid is particularly preferable.
  • the molecular weight of the organic carboxylic acid is usually 1000 or less and usually 50 or more. If the molecular weight of the organic carboxylic acid is too large, the effect of improving background stains may be insufficient. If the molecular weight is too small, the addition amount may decrease or process contamination may occur due to sublimation or volatilization.
  • organic carboxylic acid anhydrides include aliphatic carboxylic acid anhydrides and aromatic carboxylic acid anhydrides.
  • aliphatic carboxylic acid anhydrides include acetic anhydride, trichloroacetic anhydride, trifluoroacetic anhydride, Tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, succinic anhydride, maleic anhydride, itaconic anhydride, citraconic anhydride, glutaric anhydride, 1,2-cyclohexenedicarboxylic anhydride, n-octadecyl succinic anhydride, 5-norbornene-2,3- Aliphatic carboxylic acid anhydrides such as dicarboxylic acids are mentioned.
  • aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride include phthalic anhydride, trimellitic anhydride, pyromellitic anhydride, and naphthalic anhydride.
  • maleic anhydride succinic anhydride, itaconic anhydride, and citraconic anhydride are preferable, and maleic anhydride is more preferable.
  • the molecular weight of the organic carboxylic acid anhydride is usually 800 or less, preferably 600 or less, more preferably 500 or less, and usually 50 or more. If the molecular weight of the organic carboxylic acid anhydride is too large, the effect of improving scumming may be insufficient. If the molecular weight is too small, the amount added may be reduced or process contamination may occur due to sublimation or volatilization.
  • organic carboxylic acids and organic carboxylic acid anhydrides may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the amount added is usually 0.01% by weight to 5% by weight, preferably 0%, based on the total solid content of the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention. 0.03% to 3% by weight. If the addition amount is too small, a sufficient addition effect may not be obtained. If the addition amount is too large, surface smoothness and sensitivity may be deteriorated, and undissolved peeling pieces may be generated.
  • thermal polymerization inhibitor examples include one or two of hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, pyrogallol, catechol, 2,6-t-butyl-p-cresol, ⁇ -naphthol and the like. More than seeds are used.
  • the blending ratio of the thermal polymerization inhibitor is preferably in the range of 0 to 2% by weight with respect to the total solid content in the colored photosensitive composition, and if it is more than this, the light shielding property and the sensitivity of the colored photosensitive composition are improved. It may cause a decrease.
  • Plasticizers examples include dioctyl phthalate, didodecyl phthalate, triethylene glycol dicaprylate, dimethyl glycol phthalate, tricresyl phosphate, dioctyl adipate, dibutyl sebacate, and triacetyl glycerin. Species or two or more are used.
  • the blending ratio of these plasticizers is preferably in the range of 0 to 5% by weight with respect to the total solid content of the colored photosensitive composition, and if it is more than this, the curing point of the black photospacer is lowered.
  • the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention is prepared according to a conventional method. Hereinafter, examples will be described in detail, but the method for preparing the colored photosensitive composition in the present invention is not limited to this method.
  • the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention is preferably prepared by preparing a pigment dispersion in advance and mixing other components thereto as described below.
  • the dispersion treatment is performed using a sand grinder or a paint shaker, it is preferable to use glass beads or zirconia beads having a diameter of 0.1 to 8 mm.
  • the temperature during the dispersion treatment is usually set in the range of 0 to 100 ° C., preferably in the range of room temperature to 80 ° C.
  • the dispersion time needs to be appropriately adjusted because the appropriate time varies depending on the composition of the pigment dispersion (pigment, solvent, dispersant, etc.) and the size of the apparatus.
  • the standard of dispersion is to control the gloss of the pigment dispersion so that the 20 ° specular gloss in JIS Z8741 (1997) is in the range of 100 to 200.
  • the dispersion treatment is not sufficient and rough pigment particles often remain, which may be insufficient in terms of developability, adhesion, resolution, and the like. Further, when the dispersion treatment is performed until the gloss value exceeds the above range, a large number of ultrafine particles are generated, so that the dispersion stability tends to be impaired.
  • the binder resin or the dispersion aid may be appropriately used in combination.
  • the binder resin By including the binder resin, it is possible to improve the dispersion stability when producing the pigment dispersion.
  • the addition amount of the binder resin is usually 5 to 100% by weight, preferably 10 to 60% by weight, based on the pigment in the pigment dispersion.
  • the addition amount of the binder resin By making the addition amount of the binder resin more than the above lower limit value, it can have higher dispersion stability and patterning characteristics, and by making it less than the above upper limit value, it is possible to ensure a high pigment concentration and higher light shielding properties. Is preferable.
  • the solid content concentration of the pigment dispersion is usually 10 to 40% by weight.
  • total solid content refers to all components of the pigment dispersion other than the solvent.
  • the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention is prepared by adding the other components contained in the colored photosensitive composition to the pigment dispersion obtained by the above steps and mixing them. It is prepared by making a uniform solution.
  • blended as a coloring photosensitive composition simultaneously has a possibility that a highly reactive component may modify
  • fine dust is often mixed in the liquid in the manufacturing process, it is desirable that the obtained colored photosensitive composition solution is filtered by a filter or the like.
  • the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention is used in the same applications as known colored photosensitive compositions for color filters.
  • the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention is used as a black photospacer. This will be described according to a specific example of a method for forming a black photospacer using.
  • a colored photosensitive composition solution is supplied in a film shape or a pattern shape by a method such as coating on a substrate on which a black photospacer is to be provided, and the solvent is dried. Subsequently, pattern formation is performed by a method such as exposure-development photolithography. Thereafter, a black photo spacer is formed on the substrate by performing additional exposure or thermosetting treatment as necessary.
  • the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention is usually supplied onto a substrate in a state dissolved or dispersed in a solvent.
  • a conventionally known method such as a spinner method, a wire bar method, a flow coating method, a die coating method, a roll coating method, a spray coating method, or the like can be used. Further, it may be supplied in a pattern by an inkjet method or a printing method.
  • the reduction of consumption is much coating liquid, and there is no influence of mist adhering upon by a spin coating method, a foreign substance generation is suppressed, a comprehensive It is preferable from the viewpoint.
  • the coating amount varies depending on the application, but in the case of a black photospacer, for example, the dry film thickness is usually in the range of 0.5 ⁇ m to 10 ⁇ m, preferably 1 ⁇ m to 9 ⁇ m, particularly preferably 1 ⁇ m to 7 ⁇ m.
  • the dry film thickness or the height of the finally formed spacer is uniform over the entire area of the substrate. When the variation is large, a nonuniformity defect occurs in the liquid crystal panel.
  • the final height of the black photosensitive spacers is different.
  • a known substrate such as a glass substrate can be used as the substrate.
  • the substrate surface is preferably a flat surface.
  • Drying method The drying after supplying the colored photosensitive composition solution onto the substrate is preferably performed by a drying method using a hot plate, an IR oven, or a convection oven. Moreover, you may combine the reduced pressure drying method of drying in a reduced pressure chamber, without raising temperature.
  • Drying conditions can be appropriately selected according to the type of solvent component and the performance of the dryer used.
  • the drying time is usually selected within a range of 15 seconds to 5 minutes at a temperature of 40 ° C. to 130 ° C., preferably 50 ° C. to 110 ° C., depending on the type of solvent component and the performance of the dryer used.
  • the temperature is selected in the range of 30 seconds to 3 minutes.
  • Exposure is performed by superimposing a negative mask pattern on the coating film of the colored photosensitive composition and irradiating an ultraviolet light source or a visible light source through this mask pattern.
  • the exposure mask is placed close to the coating film of the colored photosensitive composition, or the exposure mask is placed at a position away from the coating film of the colored photosensitive composition, and the exposure is performed.
  • a method of projecting exposure light through a mask may be used. Further, a scanning exposure method using a laser beam without using a mask pattern may be used.
  • the exposure is performed in a deoxygenated atmosphere or after forming an oxygen blocking layer such as a polyvinyl alcohol layer on the photopolymerizable layer. Or you may.
  • a light shielding portion (light transmittance of 0%) and a plurality of openings are used as an average light.
  • An exposure mask having an opening (intermediate transmission opening) having a small average light transmittance relative to an opening having the highest transmittance (complete transmission opening) is used.
  • a method of creating the intermediate transmission opening by a matrix-shaped light shielding pattern having a minute polygonal light shielding unit is known. Also known is a method of controlling the light transmittance with a film of a material such as chromium, molybdenum, tungsten, or silicon as the absorber.
  • the light source used for the above exposure is not particularly limited.
  • the light source include a xenon lamp, a halogen lamp, a tungsten lamp, a high-pressure mercury lamp, an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp, a metal halide lamp, a medium-pressure mercury lamp, a low-pressure mercury lamp, a carbon arc, and a fluorescent lamp, an argon ion laser, a YAG laser,
  • laser light sources such as excimer laser, nitrogen laser, helium cadmium laser, blue-violet semiconductor laser, and near infrared semiconductor laser.
  • An optical filter can also be used when used by irradiating light of a specific wavelength.
  • the optical filter may be of a type that can control the light transmittance at the exposure wavelength with a thin film, for example, and the material in that case is, for example, a Cr compound (Cr oxide, nitride, oxynitride, fluoride, etc.), Examples include MoSi, Si, W, and Al.
  • a Cr compound Cr oxide, nitride, oxynitride, fluoride, etc.
  • Energy of exposure generally, 1 mJ / cm 2 or more, preferably 5 mJ / cm 2 or more, more preferably 10 mJ / cm 2 or more, usually 300 mJ / cm 2 or less, preferably 200 mJ / cm 2 or less, more preferably 150 mJ / cm 2 or less.
  • the distance between the exposure target and the mask pattern is usually 10 ⁇ m or more, preferably 50 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 75 ⁇ m or more, and usually 500 ⁇ m or less, preferably 400 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 300 ⁇ m or less.
  • an image pattern can be formed on the substrate by development using an aqueous solution of an alkaline compound or an organic solvent.
  • This aqueous solution may further contain a surfactant, an organic solvent, a buffering agent, a complexing agent, a dye or a pigment.
  • Alkaline compounds include sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, lithium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate, sodium bicarbonate, potassium bicarbonate, sodium silicate, potassium silicate, sodium metasilicate, sodium phosphate, potassium phosphate
  • Inorganic alkaline compounds such as sodium hydrogen phosphate, potassium hydrogen phosphate, sodium dihydrogen phosphate, potassium dihydrogen phosphate, ammonium hydroxide, mono-di- or triethanolamine, mono-di- or trimethylamine , Mono-di- or triethylamine, mono- or diisopropylamine, n-butylamine, mono-di- or triisopropanolamine, ethyleneimine, ethylenediimine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH), choline, etc.
  • Organic alkaline compounds. These alkaline compounds may be a mixture of two or more.
  • surfactant examples include nonionic surfactants such as polyoxyethylene alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene alkyl aryl ethers, polyoxyethylene alkyl esters, sorbitan alkyl esters, monoglyceride alkyl esters; Anionic surfactants such as acid salts, alkylnaphthalene sulfonates, alkyl sulfates, alkyl sulfonates, sulfosuccinic acid ester salts; amphoteric surfactants such as alkylbetaines and amino acids.
  • nonionic surfactants such as polyoxyethylene alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene alkyl aryl ethers, polyoxyethylene alkyl esters, sorbitan alkyl esters, monoglyceride alkyl esters
  • Anionic surfactants such as acid salts, alkylnaphthalene sulfonates, alkyl sulfates, alkyl sulfon
  • organic solvent examples include isopropyl alcohol, benzyl alcohol, ethyl cellosolve, butyl cellosolve, phenyl cellosolve, propylene glycol, diacetone alcohol and the like.
  • the organic solvent can be used alone or in combination with an aqueous solution.
  • the development processing method is not particularly limited, but is usually performed at a development temperature of 10 ° C. to 50 ° C., preferably 15 ° C. to 45 ° C., by a method such as immersion development, spray development, brush development, or ultrasonic development. .
  • thermosetting treatment The substrate after development may be subjected to additional exposure by a method similar to the above exposure method, if necessary, or may be subjected to thermosetting treatment.
  • the thermosetting treatment conditions at this time are selected such that the temperature is in the range of 100 ° C. to 280 ° C., preferably in the range of 150 ° C. to 250 ° C., and the time is selected in the range of 5 minutes to 60 minutes.
  • the size, shape, etc. of the black photospacer of the present invention are appropriately adjusted according to the specifications of the color filter to which the black photospacer is applied, but the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention is particularly suitable for the spacer and sub-spacer by photolithography. It is useful for forming black photo spacers with different heights at the same time, in which case the height of the spacer is usually 2-7 ⁇ m and the sub-spacer is usually 0.2-1.5 ⁇ m lower than the spacer Have
  • the color filter of the present invention comprises the black photo spacer of the present invention as described above.
  • a black matrix, red, green, and blue pixel coloring layers, and an overcoat are laminated to form a black photo spacer, and then an alignment film is formed.
  • a liquid crystal cell is formed by bonding the color filter of the present invention having the black photo spacer of the present invention and the liquid crystal driving side substrate, and a liquid crystal is injected into the formed liquid crystal cell to manufacture a liquid crystal display device. it can.
  • the components of the colored photosensitive composition used in the following examples and comparative examples are as follows.
  • the binder resin-1 corresponds to the “alkali-soluble resin (A)” in the present invention.
  • the binder resin-2 corresponds to the “alkali-soluble resin (A)” in the present invention.
  • the binder resin-3 can be synthesized according to the following method.
  • ⁇ Synthesis Example 1 Synthesis of Binder Resin-3> 50 g of the epoxy compound having the structure (11) (epoxy equivalent 264), 13.65 g of acrylic acid, 60.5 g of methoxybutyl acetate, 0.936 g of triphenylphosphine, and 0.032 g of paramethoxyphenol were added to a thermometer, a stirrer, and cooling. It puts into the flask which attached the pipe
  • TMP trimethylolpropane
  • BPDA biphenyltetracarboxylic dianhydride
  • THPA tetrahydrophthalic anhydride
  • This binder resin-3 corresponds to the “alkali-soluble resin (A1”) ”in the present invention.
  • DPHA Dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.
  • pigment dispersions 1 to 10 The pigment, dispersant, dispersion aid, binder resin, and solvent described in Table 1 were mixed at a weight ratio described in Table 1. Here, 80% of the volume of the dispersion container is mixed with zirconia beads (average particle size 0.3 mm), and then filled into a picomil dispersion container and dispersed at the necessary retention time (RT) shown in Table 1. Each pigment dispersion was prepared.
  • the exposure gap (distance between the mask and the coated surface) was 250 ⁇ m.
  • the light Shako, intensity at a wavelength of 365nm is used ultraviolet is 32 mW / cm 2, the exposure amount was 6 levels of 40 ⁇ 90mJ / cm 2.
  • ultraviolet irradiation was performed under air.
  • a developer composed of an aqueous solution containing 0.05% by weight of potassium hydroxide and 0.08% by weight of a nonionic surfactant (“A-60” manufactured by Kao Corporation) was used.
  • the development was stopped with pure water and washed with a water spray.
  • the shower development time was adjusted between 10 and 120 seconds, and was 1.5 times as long as the unexposed coating film was dissolved and removed.
  • substrate with which the said pattern was formed was heated at 230 degreeC for 20 minute (s) in oven, the pattern was hardened, and the substantially cylindrical spacer pattern was obtained.
  • step ⁇ H The height difference (step ⁇ H) between the complete transmission opening of the circular pattern with a diameter of 15 ⁇ m and the intermediate transmission opening of the circular pattern with a diameter of 35 ⁇ m is calculated, and the maximum value at an exposure amount of 40 to 90 mJ / cm 2 is obtained.
  • step ⁇ H 0.5 ⁇ m or more: ⁇ 0.3 ⁇ m or more and less than 0.5 ⁇ m: ⁇ Less than 0.3 ⁇ m: ⁇
  • ⁇ Evaluation of substrate adhesion> The pattern remains with good resolution at a completely transmissive aperture of a circular pattern of 5 to 50 ⁇ m and an intermediate transmissive aperture of 5 to 50 ⁇ m at an exposure amount that maximizes the height difference ( ⁇ H).
  • the minimum opening diameter ( ⁇ m) is shown in Table 2 as the minimum adhesion. The smaller this value, the better the substrate adhesion. “Remaining with good resolution” means that 24 patterns of the same size are formed and all the patterns are formed normally.
  • optical density (OD) ⁇ Evaluation of optical density (OD)>
  • the optical density (OD) of the solid part was measured with a transmission densitometer (“D 200-II” manufactured by Gretag Macbeth). Furthermore, the film thickness at the measurement location was also measured, and the optical density per unit film thickness (unit OD) was calculated and evaluated according to the following criteria.
  • the OD value is a numerical value indicating the light shielding ability, and the larger the numerical value, the higher the light shielding property. (Evaluation criteria for unit OD) 0.8 or more: ⁇ Less than 0.8: ⁇
  • VHR Voltage holding ratio evaluation
  • An extraction substrate having a width of 2 mm was connected to the center of one side of the 2.5 cm square glass substrate and the electrode substrate A (Ec Sea, glass ITO solid for evaluation) having an ITO film formed on the entire surface of a 5 cm square piece.
  • An electrode substrate B manufactured by ECH, evaluation glass SZ-B111MIN (B)) on which a 1 cm square ITO film was formed was prepared.
  • Each colored photosensitive composition was applied on the electrode substrate A, vacuum-dried for 1 minute, and then pre-baked on a hot plate at 90 ° C. for 1.5 minutes to obtain a coating film having a dry film thickness of 2.0 ⁇ m. . Thereafter, the outer edge portion was masked by 2 mm, and image exposure was performed using 3 kW high-pressure mercury under exposure conditions of 50 mJ / cm 2 . Next, a developer composed of an aqueous solution containing about 0.06% by weight of potassium hydroxide and about 0.14% by weight of a nonionic surfactant (“A-60” manufactured by Kao Corporation) was used at 25 ° C.
  • A-60 nonionic surfactant
  • the shower development time was adjusted between 10 and 120 seconds, and was about 1.5 times the time (break time) during which the non-photosensitive layer was dissolved and removed.
  • the electrode substrate thus image-formed was post-baked at 230 ° C. for 20 minutes to obtain a resist-coated electrode substrate (resist substrate). Thereafter, a polyimide solution was applied to the resist substrate, pre-baked on a hot plate at 70 ° C. for 2 minutes, and post-baked at 220 ° C. for 24 minutes.
  • the resist substrate thus obtained was cut into a 2.5 cm square substrate to complete an evaluation electrode substrate A.
  • a polyimide solution was also applied onto the electrode substrate B, pre-baked at 70 ° C. for 2 minutes on a hot plate, and post-baked at 220 ° C. for 24 minutes to complete the evaluation electrode substrate B.
  • an epoxy resin sealant containing silica beads having a diameter of 5 ⁇ m is applied on the outer periphery of the electrode substrate B using a dispenser, and then the electrode substrate A for evaluation is placed on the front side (the sealant side) of the electrode substrate B.
  • the application surface was pasted and bonded to complete the empty cell. Heating was performed at 180 ° C. for 2 hours in a hot air circulating furnace.
  • a liquid crystal (MLC-6608 manufactured by Merck Japan Co., Ltd.) was injected into the empty cell thus obtained, and the peripheral portion was sealed with a UV curable sealant to complete a voltage holding ratio liquid crystal cell.
  • VHR voltage holding ratio
  • the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention containing Or64 and B60 as essential components as pigments, and the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention containing Or72 and B60 as essential components as pigments have light shielding properties. It can be seen that it is useful for simultaneously forming cured products having different heights from the same material while maintaining adhesion and voltage holding ratio.

Abstract

A colored photosensitive composition containing a pigment, a binder resin, a photopolymerizable monomer, and a photopolymerization initiator, wherein the pigment contains the following: (A) one pigment selected from the group consisting of C.I. pigment orange 43, C.I. pigment orange 64, and C.I. pigment orange 72; and (B) C.I. pigment blue 60.

Description

着色感光性組成物、ブラックフォトスペーサー、及びカラーフィルターColored photosensitive composition, black photo spacer, and color filter
 本発明は、着色感光性組成物等に関する。詳しくは、例えば液晶ディスプレイ等のカラーフィルターにおいてブラックフォトスペーサー等の形成に好ましく用いられる着色感光性組成物及びこの着色感光性組成物を用いて形成されたブラックフォトスペーサーとこのブラックフォトスペーサーを含むカラーフィルターに関する。 The present invention relates to a colored photosensitive composition and the like. Specifically, for example, a colored photosensitive composition preferably used for forming a black photo spacer in a color filter such as a liquid crystal display, a black photo spacer formed using the colored photosensitive composition, and a color including the black photo spacer Regarding filters.
 液晶ディスプレイ(LCD)は液晶への電圧のオン・オフにより液晶分子の並び方が切り替わる性質を利用している。一方、LCDのセルを構成する各部材は、フォトリソグラフィーに代表される感光性組成物を利用して形成されるものが多い。微細な構造を形成し易い、大画面用の基板に対しての処理がし易いといった理由からも、今後さらに感光性組成物の適用範囲は広がる傾向である。 Liquid crystal display (LCD) utilizes the property that the arrangement of liquid crystal molecules is switched by turning on / off the voltage to the liquid crystal. On the other hand, each member constituting the LCD cell is often formed using a photosensitive composition typified by photolithography. The range of application of the photosensitive composition tends to further expand in the future because it is easy to form a fine structure and it is easy to process a substrate for a large screen.
 しかしながら、感光性組成物を用いたLCDでは、感光性組成物自体の電気特性や、感光性組成物中に含まれる不純物の影響で、液晶にかかる電圧が保持されず、これによってディスプレイの表示ムラといった問題が発生する。特に、カラー液晶表示装置において液晶層により近い部材、例えば、液晶パネルにおける2枚の基板の間隔を一定に保つために使用されているもの、所謂、柱状スペーサー、フォトスペーサーなどではその影響は大きい。 However, in an LCD using a photosensitive composition, the voltage applied to the liquid crystal is not maintained due to the electrical characteristics of the photosensitive composition itself and the influence of impurities contained in the photosensitive composition, thereby causing display unevenness of the display. Such a problem occurs. In particular, a member closer to the liquid crystal layer in a color liquid crystal display device, for example, a so-called columnar spacer, photospacer, or the like that is used to keep the distance between two substrates in a liquid crystal panel constant has a great influence.
 従来、遮光性を有さないスペーサーをTFT型LCDに使用する場合、スペーサーを透過してくる光によりスイッチング素子としてのTFTが誤作動を起こすことがあった。これを防止するため、例えば、特許文献1にスペーサーを遮光性とすることが記載されている。
 しかしながら、スペーサーを遮光性にするためには、通常顔料を含めた着色剤等を感光性組成物に添加することが考えられるが、着色剤を添加するにつれクリア成分の減少によりスペーサー層の硬化性が減ること及び顔料に由来する不純物等の影響により、特性を損なう恐れがある。
Conventionally, when a spacer that does not have a light shielding property is used in a TFT type LCD, a TFT as a switching element sometimes malfunctions due to light transmitted through the spacer. In order to prevent this, for example, Patent Document 1 describes that a spacer is made light-shielding.
However, in order to make the spacer shielding property, it is conceivable to add a coloring agent including ordinary pigment in the photosensitive composition, curable spacer layer by a decrease in the clear component as the addition of a colorant There is a risk that the properties are impaired due to the effect of impurities and impurities derived from the pigment.
 電圧保持率を制御するためには、硬化性を向上させる手法や、感光性組成物の硬化性樹脂や分散剤等をコントロールする手法などが提案されている。 In order to control the voltage holding ratio, a technique for improving curability, a technique for controlling a curable resin, a dispersant, and the like of the photosensitive composition have been proposed.
 一方で、近年、スペーサーをフォトリソグラフィー法により製造するに際して、パネルの構造の変化に伴い、高さの異なるスペーサーを一括形成する方法が提案されている。特許文献2には、露光量と残膜率をコントロールすることによって、所望の高さの異なるスペーサーの形状、段差を実現できることが開示されている。 On the other hand, in recent years, when a spacer is manufactured by a photolithography method, a method has been proposed in which spacers having different heights are collectively formed as the structure of the panel changes. Patent Document 2 discloses that spacer shapes and steps having different desired heights can be realized by controlling the exposure amount and the remaining film ratio.
日本国特開平8-234212号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 8-234212 日本国特開2009-31778号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2009-31778
 しかしながら、特許文献2は顔料を添加しないスペーサーに関するもので、顔料を添加する着色スペーサーの一括形成に適用すると、顔料が光重合に寄与する紫外領域の光を吸収するため、開口部の光透過率が少ないパターンでは硬化性が劣り、高さの異なる所望のスペーサーの形状及び段差のコントロール、基板との密着性等の特性を達成することは困難であることが判明した。 However, Patent Document 2 relates to a spacer to which no pigment is added, and when applied to the batch formation of colored spacers to which a pigment is added, the pigment absorbs light in the ultraviolet region contributing to photopolymerization, and thus the light transmittance of the opening. It has been found that a pattern having a small amount has poor curability, and it is difficult to achieve characteristics such as desired spacer shape and step difference in height and adhesion to a substrate.
 本発明は、このような事情に鑑みてなされたものである。即ち、本発明の主たる課題は、フォトリソグラフィー法により高さの異なるブラックフォトスペーサーを一括形成する方法において、遮光性と液晶の電圧保持率を確保した上で、形状や段差のコントロールが可能で、基板との密着性に優れたブラックフォトスペーサーを形成し得る着色感光性組成物を提供することにある。
 また、本発明の他の課題は、このような着色感光性組成物により形成されたブラックフォトスペーサーを提供することにある。
 また更に、本発明の他の課題は、このようなブラックフォトスペーサーを備えるカラーフィルターを提供することにある。
The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances. That is, a main object of the present invention is a method of collectively forming different black photospacer height by photolithography, after securing the light shielding property and a voltage holding ratio of the liquid crystal, can control the shape or steps, An object of the present invention is to provide a colored photosensitive composition capable of forming a black photospacer excellent in adhesion to a substrate.
Another object of the present invention is to provide a black photospacer formed from such a colored photosensitive composition.
Still another object of the present invention is to provide a color filter having such a black photo spacer.
 本発明者らは、上記課題について鋭意検討した結果、着色剤として特定の顔料を使用することにより、上記課題を解決できることを見出し、本発明を完成するに至った。即ち、本発明の要旨は以下の通りである。 As a result of intensive studies on the above problems, the present inventors have found that the above problems can be solved by using a specific pigment as a colorant, and have completed the present invention. That is, the gist of the present invention is as follows.
[1] 顔料、バインダー樹脂、光重合性モノマー、及び光重合開始剤を含む着色感光性組成物であって、前記顔料が、下記(A)に示す顔料及び(B)に示す顔料を含む着色感光性組成物。 
(A)C.I.ピグメントオレンジ43、C.I.ピグメントオレンジ64、及びC.I.ピグメントオレンジ72からなる群より選ばれる1つ
(B)C.I.ピグメントブルー60
[2] 前記顔料が、C.I.ピグメントオレンジ64及びC.I.ピグメントブルー60を含む上記[1]に記載の着色感光性組成物。
[3] 前記顔料が、C.I.ピグメントレッド254、C.I.ピグメントバイオレット23、及びC.I.ピグメントバイオレット29からなる群より選ばれる1つをさらに含む上記[1]又は[2]に記載の着色感光性組成物。
[4] 前記顔料が、下記(1)に示す顔料又は(2)に示す顔料を含む上記[1]に記載の着色感光性組成物。
 (1) C.I.ピグメントオレンジ64、C.I.ピグメントブルー60、及びC.I.ピグメントレッド254
 (2) C.I.ピグメントオレンジ64、C.I.ピグメントブルー60、及びC.I.ピグメントバイオレット29
[5] 上記[1]乃至[4]のいずれかに記載の着色感光性組成物を用いて形成されたブラックフォトスペーサー。
[6] 上記[5]に記載のブラックフォトスペーサーを含むカラーフィルター。
[1] A colored photosensitive composition containing a pigment, a binder resin, a photopolymerizable monomer, and a photopolymerization initiator, wherein the pigment contains a pigment shown in (A) below and a pigment shown in (B) Photosensitive composition.
(A) C.I. I. Pigment orange 43, C.I. I. Pigment orange 64, and C.I. I. One selected from the group consisting of CI Pigment Orange 72 (B) C.I. I. Pigment Blue 60
[2] The pigment is C.I. I. Pigment orange 64 and C.I. I. The colored photosensitive composition according to the above [1], comprising CI Pigment Blue 60.
[3] The pigment is C.I. I. Pigment red 254, C.I. I. Pigment violet 23, and C.I. I. The colored photosensitive composition according to the above [1] or [2], further comprising one selected from the group consisting of CI Pigment Violet 29.
[4] The colored photosensitive composition according to [1], wherein the pigment includes the pigment shown in (1) below or the pigment shown in (2).
(1) C.I. I. Pigment orange 64, C.I. I. Pigment blue 60, and C.I. I. Pigment Red 254
(2) C.I. I. Pigment orange 64, C.I. I. Pigment blue 60, and C.I. I. Pigment Violet 29
[5] A black photospacer formed using the colored photosensitive composition according to any one of [1] to [4].
[6] A color filter comprising the black photo spacer according to [5].
 本発明によれば、フォトリソグラフィー法により高さの異なるブラックフォトスペーサーを一括形成する方法において、光吸収特性の異なる顔料種を適切に組み合わせ、紫外領域と可視領域の光吸収のバランスを確保することで、遮光性と液晶の電圧保持率を維持しつつ、形状や段差をコントロールすると共に、基板との高い密着性を実現することができる。 According to the present invention, in the method of collectively forming black photo spacers having different heights by photolithography, pigment types having different light absorption characteristics are appropriately combined to ensure a balance between light absorption in the ultraviolet region and visible region. Thus, while maintaining the light shielding property and the voltage holding ratio of the liquid crystal, it is possible to control the shape and the level difference and realize high adhesion with the substrate.
 以下に本発明の実施の形態を詳細に説明するが、以下に記載する構成要件の説明は、本発明の実施様態の一例(代表例)であり、本発明はその要旨を超えない限り、これらの内容に限定されるものではない。 Embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail below, but the description of the constituent elements described below is an example (representative example) of the embodiments of the present invention, and the present invention does not exceed the gist thereof. It is not limited to the contents of.
 なお、本明細書において、「(メタ)アクリル」等は「アクリル及びメタクリルのうち少なくとも一つ」を意味するものとし、「(メタ)アクリレート」等は、「アクリレート及びメタクリレートのうち少なくとも一つ」等を意味するものとし、「(メタ)アクリル酸」は「アクリル酸及びメタクリル酸のうち少なくとも一つ」を意味するものとする。「(メタ)アクリロイル」も同様である。また、「(酸)無水物」、「(無水)…酸」とは、酸とその無水物の双方を含むことを意味する。
 また、「全固形分」とは、着色感光性組成物又は顔料分散液に含まれる、後記する溶剤成分以外の全成分を意味するものとする。
In the present specification, “(meth) acryl” and the like mean “at least one of acryl and methacryl”, and “(meth) acrylate” and the like mean “at least one of acrylate and methacrylate”. Etc., and “(meth) acrylic acid” means “at least one of acrylic acid and methacrylic acid”. The same applies to “(meth) acryloyl”. In addition, “(acid) anhydride” and “(anhydrous)... Acid” mean that both an acid and its anhydride are included.
Further, “total solid content” means all components other than the solvent components described later, which are contained in the colored photosensitive composition or the pigment dispersion.
 また、本発明において、特に断りの無い限り、重量平均分子量とは、GPC(ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィー)による標準ポリスチレン換算の重量平均分子量(Mw)を指す。「C.I.」は、カラーインデックス(c.I.)を意味する。
 更に、本発明において、「アミン価」とは、特に断りのない限り有効固形分換算のアミン価を表し、分散剤の固形分1gあたりの塩基量と当量のKOHの重量で表される値である。尚、測定方法については後述する。一方、「酸価」とは、特に断りのない限り有効固形分換算の酸価を表し、中和滴定により算出される。
Moreover, in this invention, unless there is particular notice, a weight average molecular weight refers to the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of standard polystyrene conversion by GPC (gel permeation chromatography). “C.I.” means a color index (c.I.).
Furthermore, in the present invention, the “amine value” means an amine value in terms of effective solid content unless otherwise specified, and is a value represented by the amount of base and the equivalent weight of KOH per 1 g of the solid content of the dispersant. is there. The measuring method will be described later. On the other hand, the “acid value” represents an acid value in terms of effective solid content unless otherwise specified, and is calculated by neutralization titration.
 また、本発明において「モノマー」とは、いわゆる高分子物質に相対する意味であり、狭義の単量体(モノマー)の外に、二量体、三量体、オリゴマー等も含む意味である。 In the present invention, the term “monomer” means a so-called high-molecular substance and includes a dimer, a trimer, an oligomer and the like in addition to a monomer (monomer) in a narrow sense.
 本発明の着色感光性組成物は、顔料、バインダー樹脂、光重合性モノマー、及び光重合開始剤を含み、顔料として、下記(A)及び(B)を含むことを特徴とするものであって、特に、フォトリソグラフィー法により高さの異なるブラックフォトスペーサーを一括形成するための着色感光性組成物として好ましく用いられる。
(A)C.I.ピグメントオレンジ43、C.I.ピグメントオレンジ64、及びC.I.ピグメントオレンジ72からなる群より選ばれる1つ
(B)C.I.ピグメントブルー60
The colored photosensitive composition of the present invention includes a pigment, a binder resin, a photopolymerizable monomer, and a photopolymerization initiator, and includes the following (A) and (B) as the pigment: In particular, it is preferably used as a colored photosensitive composition for collectively forming black photo spacers having different heights by photolithography.
(A) C.I. I. Pigment orange 43, C.I. I. Pigment orange 64, and C.I. I. One selected from the group consisting of CI Pigment Orange 72 (B) C.I. I. Pigment Blue 60
[高さの異なるブラックフォトスペーサーの一括形成方法]
 まず、本発明の着色感光性組成物が好適に使用されるフォトリソグラフィー法により高さの異なるブラックフォトスペーサーを一括形成する方法について説明する。この方法は、主として露光工程における露光マスクに特徴を有する。
[Batch formation method of black photo spacers with different heights]
First, a method for collectively forming black photo spacers having different heights by a photolithography method in which the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention is suitably used will be described. This method is mainly characterized by an exposure mask in the exposure process.
 その露光マスクとして、光の透過を遮る遮光層と光を透過させる複数の開口部とを有し、一部の開口部の平均光透過率が他の開口部の平均光透過率より小さい露光マスクを用いる方法が知られている。これは、遮光層(光透過率0%)と複数の開口部を有し、平均光透過率の最も高い開口部(通常、光透過率100%。以下「完全透過開口部」という)に対して平均光透過率の小さい開口部(平均光透過率が0%超過100%未満。好ましくは、5%超過50%未満。以下「中間透過開口部」という)、を有する露光マスクを用いる方法である。この方法により、例えばネガ型の着色感光性組成物の場合であれば、中間透過開口部と完全透過開口部の平均光透過率の差異、即ち露光量の差異により、形成したパターンの硬化度の差異を生じさせ、その後、現像及び熱硬化プロセスを経て高さの異なるブラックフォトスペーサーを形成することができる。 As an exposure mask, the exposure mask has a light shielding layer that blocks light transmission and a plurality of openings that transmit light, and the average light transmittance of some openings is smaller than the average light transmittance of other openings. A method of using is known. This has a light shielding layer (light transmittance of 0%) and a plurality of openings, and has the highest average light transmittance (usually light transmittance of 100%, hereinafter referred to as “completely transmissive opening”). And using an exposure mask having an opening having a small average light transmittance (average light transmittance exceeding 0% and less than 100%, preferably exceeding 5% and less than 50%, hereinafter referred to as “intermediate transmission opening”). is there. With this method, for example, in the case of a negative type colored photosensitive composition, the degree of cure of the formed pattern depends on the difference in average light transmittance between the intermediate transmission opening and the complete transmission opening, that is, the difference in exposure amount. Differences can be made, and then black photo spacers of different heights can be formed through development and thermosetting processes.
[着色感光性組成物]
 以下に本発明の着色感光性組成物の構成材料について説明する。
[Colored photosensitive composition]
The constituent materials of the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention will be described below.
[1]顔料
 顔料は、本発明の着色感光性組成物を着色するものをいう。
 顔料としては青色顔料、緑色顔料、赤色顔料、黄色顔料、紫色顔料、オレンジ顔料、ブラウン顔料、黒色顔料等各種の色の顔料を使用することができる。また、その構造としてはアゾ系、フタロシアニン系、キナクリドン系、ベンズイミダゾロン系、イソインドリノン系、ジオキサジン系、インダンスレン系、ペリレン系等の有機顔料や、種々の無機顔料等が利用可能である。
[1] Pigment The pigment refers to one that colors the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention.
As the pigment, various color pigments such as a blue pigment, a green pigment, a red pigment, a yellow pigment, a purple pigment, an orange pigment, a brown pigment, and a black pigment can be used. As its structure, organic pigments such as azo, phthalocyanine, quinacridone, benzimidazolone, isoindolinone, dioxazine, indanthrene, perylene, and various inorganic pigments can be used. is there.
 本発明の着色感光性組成物では、顔料として、下記(A)及び(B)を必須成分として含有する。
(A)C.I.ピグメントオレンジ43、C.I.ピグメントオレンジ64、及びC.I.ピグメントオレンジ72からなる群より選ばれる1つ
(B)C.I.ピグメントブルー60
 本発明の着色感光性組成物では、顔料として、上記(A)及び(B)を必須成分として含有する以外は、用いる顔料には特に制限はなく、赤、緑、青色等の各色の混合による黒色色材を用いることができる。更に、黒色顔料や、その他の無機又は有機の顔料、染料の中から適宜選択して併用することができる。
The colored photosensitive composition of the present invention contains the following (A) and (B) as essential components as pigments.
(A) C.I. I. Pigment orange 43, C.I. I. Pigment orange 64, and C.I. I. One selected from the group consisting of CI Pigment Orange 72 (B) C.I. I. Pigment Blue 60
In the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention, the pigment to be used is not particularly limited, except that it contains the above-mentioned (A) and (B) as essential components, and it depends on the mixing of each color such as red, green, and blue. A black color material can be used. Furthermore, black pigments, other inorganic or organic pigments, and dyes can be appropriately selected and used in combination.
 以下、使用できる顔料の具体例をピグメントナンバーで示す。 Hereinafter, specific examples of usable pigments are indicated by pigment numbers.
 赤色顔料としては、C.I.ピグメントレッド1、2、3、4、5、6、7、8、9、12、14、15、16、17、21、22、23、31、32、37、38、41、47、48、48:1、48:2、48:3、48:4、49、49:1、49:2、50:1、52:1、52:2、53、53:1、53:2、53:3、57、57:1、57:2、58:4、60、63、63:1、63:2、64、64:1、68、69、81、81:1、81:2、81:3、81:4、83、88、90:1、101、101:1、104、108、108:1、109、112、113、114、122、123、144、146、147、149、151、166、168、169、170、172、173、174、175、176、177、178、179、181、184、185、187、188、190、193、194、200、202、206、207、208、209、210、214、216、220、221、224、230、231、232、233、235、236、237、238、239、242、243、245、247、249、250、251、253、254、255、256、257、258、259、260、262、263、264、265、266、267、268、269、270、271、272、273、274、275、276を挙げることができる。この中でも、好ましくはC.I.ピグメントレッド48:1、122、168、177、202、206、207、209、224、242、254、さらに好ましくはC.I.ピグメントレッド177、179、209、224、254を挙げることができる。中でも好ましくはC.I.ピグメントレッド254(R254)を挙げることができる。 As red pigment, C.I. I. Pigment Red 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 12, 14, 15, 16, 17, 21, 22, 23, 31, 32, 37, 38, 41, 47, 48, 48: 1, 48: 2, 48: 3, 48: 4, 49, 49: 1, 49: 2, 50: 1, 52: 1, 52: 2, 53, 53: 1, 53: 2, 53: 3, 57, 57: 1, 57: 2, 58: 4, 60, 63, 63: 1, 63: 2, 64, 64: 1, 68, 69, 81, 81: 1, 81: 2, 81: 3, 81: 4, 83, 88, 90: 1, 101, 101: 1, 104, 108, 108: 1, 109, 112, 113, 114, 122, 123, 144, 146, 147, 149, 151, 166, 168, 169, 170, 172, 173, 174, 175, 176, 177, 178, 17 , 181, 184, 185, 187, 188, 190, 193, 194, 200, 202, 206, 207, 208, 209, 210, 214, 216, 220, 221, 224, 230, 231, 232, 233, 235 236, 237, 238, 239, 242, 243, 245, 247, 249, 250, 251, 253, 254, 255, 256, 257, 258, 259, 260, 262, 263, 264, 265, 266, 267 268, 269, 270, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275, 276. Of these, C.I. I. Pigment Red 48: 1, 122, 168, 177, 202, 206, 207, 209, 224, 242, 254, more preferably C.I. I. Pigment red 177, 179, 209, 224, 254. Among them, C.I. I. And CI Pigment Red 254 (R254).
 青色顔料としては、C.I.ピグメントブルー1、1:2、9、14、15、15:1、15:2、15:3、15:4、15:6、16、17、19、25、27、28、29、33、35、36、56、56:1、61、61:1、62、63、66、67、68、71、72、73、74、75、76、78、79を挙げることができる。この中でも、好ましくはC.I.ピグメントブルー15、15:1、15:2、15:3、15:4、15:6を挙げることができる。 As blue pigment, C.I. I. Pigment Blue 1, 1: 2, 9, 14, 15, 15: 1, 15: 2, 15: 3, 15: 4, 15: 6, 16, 17, 19, 25, 27, 28, 29, 33, 35, 36, 56, 56: 1, 61, 61: 1, 62, 63, 66, 67, 68, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 78, 79. Of these, C.I. I. And CI Pigment Blue 15, 15: 1, 15: 2, 15: 3, 15: 4, and 15: 6.
 緑色顔料としては、C.I.ピグメントグリーン1、2、4、7、8、10、13、14、15、17、18、19、26、36、45、48、50、51、54、55を挙げることができる。この中でも、好ましくはC.I.ピグメントグリーン7、36を挙げることができる。 Green pigments include C.I. I. Pigment green 1, 2, 4, 7, 8, 10, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 26, 36, 45, 48, 50, 51, 54, 55. Of these, C.I. I. And CI Pigment Green 7 and 36.
 黄色顔料としては、C.I.ピグメントイエロー1、1:1、2、3、4、5、6、9、10、12、13、14、16、17、24、31、32、34、35、35:1、36、36:1、37、37:1、40、41、42、43、48、53、55、61、62、62:1、63、65、73、74、75、81、83、87、93、94、95、97、100、101、104、105、108、109、110、111、116、117、119、120、126、127、127:1、128、129、133、134、136、138、139、142、147、148、150、151、153、154、155、157、158、159、160、161、162、163、164、165、166、167、168、169、170、172、173、174、175、176、180、181、182、183、184、185、188、189、190、191、191:1、192、193、194、195、196、197、198、199、200、202、203、204、205、206、207、208を挙げることができる。この中でも、好ましくはC.I.ピグメントイエロー83、117、129、138、139、150、154、155、180、185、さらに好ましくはC.I.ピグメントイエロー83、138、139、150、180を挙げることができる。 ¡As yellow pigment, C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 1, 1: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10, 12, 13, 14, 16, 17, 24, 31, 32, 34, 35, 35: 1, 36, 36: 1, 37, 37: 1, 40, 41, 42, 43, 48, 53, 55, 61, 62, 62: 1, 63, 65, 73, 74, 75, 81, 83, 87, 93, 94, 95, 97, 100, 101, 104, 105, 108, 109, 110, 111, 116, 117, 119, 120, 126, 127, 127: 1, 128, 129, 133, 134, 136, 138, 139, 142, 147, 148, 150, 151, 153, 154, 155, 157, 158, 159, 160, 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 166, 167, 168, 169, 170, 172, 17 174, 175, 176, 180, 181, 182, 183, 184, 185, 188, 189, 190, 191, 191: 1, 192, 193, 194, 195, 196, 197, 198, 199, 200, 202 , 203, 204, 205, 206, 207, 208. Of these, C.I. I. Pigment yellow 83, 117, 129, 138, 139, 150, 154, 155, 180, 185, more preferably C.I. I. Pigment yellow 83, 138, 139, 150, 180.
 オレンジ顔料としては、C.I.ピグメントオレンジ1、2、5、13、16、17、19、20、21、22、23、24、34、36、38、39、43、46、48、49、61、62、64、65、67、68、69、70、71、72、73、74、75、77、78、79を挙げることができる。この中でも、好ましくは、C.I.ピグメントオレンジ38、43、64、71、72を挙げることができる。さらに好ましくはC.I.ピグメントオレンジ43、64、72を挙げることができる。さらに好ましくはC.I.ピグメントオレンジ64(Or64)を挙げることができる。 】 As orange pigment, C.I. I. Pigment Orange 1, 2, 5, 13, 16, 17, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 34, 36, 38, 39, 43, 46, 48, 49, 61, 62, 64, 65, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 77, 78, 79. Of these, C.I. I. Pigment orange 38, 43, 64, 71, 72. More preferably, C.I. I. Pigment orange 43, 64, 72. More preferably, C.I. I. CI pigment orange 64 (Or64).
 紫色顔料としては、C.I.ピグメントバイオレット1、1:1、2、2:2、3、3:1、3:3、5、5:1、14、15、16、19、23、25、27、29、31、32、37、39、42、44、47、49、50を挙げることができる。この中でも、好ましくはC.I.ピグメントバイオレット19、23、29、さらに好ましくはC.I.ピグメントバイオレット23、29、さらに好ましくはC.I.ピグメントバイオレット29(V29)を挙げることができる。 As purple pigment, C.I. I. Pigment Violet 1, 1: 1, 2, 2: 2, 3, 3: 1, 3: 3, 5, 5: 1, 14, 15, 16, 19, 23, 25, 27, 29, 31, 32, 37, 39, 42, 44, 47, 49, 50. Of these, C.I. I. Pigment violet 19, 23, 29, more preferably C.I. I. Pigment violet 23, 29, more preferably C.I. I. And CI Pigment Violet 29 (V29).
 黒色顔料としては、ペリレンブラック(BASF社製 K0084、K0086)、シアニンブラック、ファーストブラックHB(C.I.26150)、Irgaphor Black S 0100 CF(BASF社製)、カーボンブラック、チタンブラックを挙げることができる。 Examples of black pigments include perylene black (BA0084, K0084, K0086), cyanine black, first black HB (CI. 26150), Irgaphor Black S 0100 CF (BASF), carbon black, and titanium black. it can.
 カーボンブラックの市販品の例としては、以下のような銘柄が挙げられる。
 三菱化学社製:MA7、MA8、MA11、MA100、MA100R、MA220、MA230、MA600、#5、#10、#20、#25、#30、#32、#33、#40、#44、#45、#47、#50、#52、#55、#650、#750、#850、#950、#960、#970、#980、#990、#1000、#2200、#2300、#2350、#2400、#2600、#3050、#3150、#3250、#3600、#3750、#3950、#4000、#4010、OIL7B、OIL9B、OIL11B、OIL30B、OIL31
 デグサ社製:Printex3、Printex3OP、Printex30、Printex30OP、Printex40、Printex45、Printex55、Printex60、Printex75、Printex80、Printex85、Printex90、Printex A、Printex L、Printex G、Printex P、Printex U、Printex V、PrintexG、SpecialBlack550、SpecialBlack350、SpecialBlack250、SpecialBlack100、SpecialBlack6、SpecialBlack5、SpecialBlack4、Color Black FW1、Color Black FW2、Color Black FW2V、Color Black FW18、Color Black FW18、Color Black FW200、Color Black S160、Color Black S170
 キャボット社製:Monarch120、Monarch280、Monarch460、Monarch800、Monarch880、Monarch900、Monarch1000、Monarch1100、Monarch1300、Monarch1400、Monarch4630、REGAL99、REGAL99R、REGAL415、REGAL415R、REGAL250、REGAL250R、REGAL330、REGAL400R、REGAL55R0、REGAL660R、BLACK PEARLS480、PEARLS130、VULCAN XC72R、ELFTEX-8
 コロンビヤン カーボン社製:RAVEN11、RAVEN14、RAVEN15、RAVEN16、RAVEN22RAVEN30、RAVEN35、RAVEN40、RAVEN410、RAVEN420、RAVEN450、RAVEN500、RAVEN760、RAVEN780RAVEN850、RAVEN890H、RAVEN1000、RAVEN1020、RAVEN1060U、RAVEN1080U、RAVEN1100URAVEN1040、RAVEN1060U、RAVEN1080U、RAVEN1170、RAVEN1190U、RAVEN1250、RAVEN1500、RAVEN2000、RAVEN2500U、RAVEN3500、RAVEN5000、RAVEN5250、RAVEN5750、RAVEN7000
Examples of commercially available carbon black include the following brands.
Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation: MA7, MA8, MA11, MA100, MA100R, MA220, MA230, MA600, # 5, # 10, # 20, # 25, # 30, # 32, # 33, # 40, # 44, # 45 , # 47, # 50, # 52, # 55, # 650, # 750, # 850, # 950, # 960, # 970, # 980, # 990, # 1000, # 2200, # 2300, # 2350, # 2400, # 2600, # 3050, # 3150, # 3250, # 3600, # 3750, # 3950, # 4000, # 4010, OIL7B, OIL9B, OIL11B, OIL30B, OIL31
Degussa: Printex3, Printex3OP, Printex30, Printex30OP, Printex40, Printex45, Printex55, Printex60, Printex75, Printex80, Printex85, Printex90, Printex A, Printex L, Printex G, Printex P, Printex U, Printex V, PrintexG, SpecialBlack550, Special Black 350, Special Black 250, Special Black 100, Special Black 6, Special Black 5, Special Black 4, Color Black FW1, Color Black FW2, Color Black FW2V, Color Black FW18, Color Black FW18, Color Black FW200, Color Black S160, Color Black S170
Cabot Corporation: Monarch120, Monarch280, Monarch460, Monarch800, Monarch880, Monarch900, Monarch1000, Monarch1100, Monarch1300, Monarch1400, Monarch4630, REGAL99, REGAL99R, REGAL415, REGAL415R, REGAL250, REGAL250R, REGAL330, REGAL400R, REGAL55R0, REGAL660R, BLACK PEARLS480, PEARLS130 , VULCAN XC72R, ELFTEX-8
Koronbiyan Carbon Co., Ltd.: RAVEN11, RAVEN14, RAVEN15, RAVEN16, RAVEN22RAVEN30, RAVEN35, RAVEN40, RAVEN410, RAVEN420, RAVEN450, RAVEN500, RAVEN760, RAVEN780RAVEN850, RAVEN890H, RAVEN1000, RAVEN1020, RAVEN1060U, RAVEN1080U, RAVEN1100URAVEN1040, RAVEN1060U, RAVEN1080U, RAVEN1170, RAVEN1190U , RAVEN1250, RAVEN1500, RAVEN2000, RAVEN2500U, RAVEN3500, RAVEN5000, RAVEN5250, RAVEN5750 , RAVEN 7000
 チタンブラックの市販品の例としては、以下のような銘柄が挙げられる。
 三菱マテリアル社製:10S、12S、13R、13M、13M-C、14M、15M、L-15M等
 赤穂化成社製:TilackD M、M-50、M-50A、M-AM、V、UV-3、UV-6、F、S、C、X等
Examples of commercially available titanium black include the following brands.
Mitsubishi Materials Corporation: 10S, 12S, 13R, 13M, 13M-C, 14M, 15M, L-15M, etc. Akaho Kasei Co., Ltd .: TilacD M, M-50, M-50A, M-AM, V, UV-3 , UV-6, F, S, C, X, etc.
 本発明の着色感光性組成物は、遮光性と液晶の電圧保持率、形状や段差のコントロール、及び基板との密着性の観点から、顔料として、C.I.ピグメントオレンジ64及びC.I.ピグメントブルー60を含むことが好ましい。
 本発明の着色感光性組成物は、顔料として、上記(A)及び(B)の他に、更にC.I.ピグメントレッド254、C.I.ピグメントバイオレット23、及びC.I.ピグメントバイオレット29からなる群より選ばれる1つを含むことが好ましい。
 本発明の着色感光性組成物は、遮光性と液晶の電圧保持率、形状や段差のコントロール、及び基板との密着性をより良好なものとするために、顔料として、以下の(1)乃至(3)のいずれかに示す3種の顔料を含むことが好ましく、特に、液晶の電圧保持率の観点から、(1)又は(2)に示す3種の顔料を含むことが好ましい。
 (1) C.I.ピグメントオレンジ64、C.I.ピグメントブルー60、C.I.ピグメントレッド254
 (2) C.I.ピグメントオレンジ64、C.I.ピグメントブルー60、C.I.ピグメントバイオレット29
 (3) C.I.ピグメントオレンジ64、C.I.ピグメントブルー60、C.I.ピグメントバイオレット23
The colored photosensitive composition of the present invention includes C.I. as a pigment from the viewpoint of light shielding properties, voltage holding ratio of liquid crystal, control of shape and level difference, and adhesion to a substrate. I. Pigment orange 64 and C.I. I. Pigment Blue 60 is preferably included.
In addition to the above (A) and (B), the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention may further contain C.I. I. Pigment red 254, C.I. I. Pigment violet 23, and C.I. I. It is preferable to include one selected from the group consisting of CI Pigment Violet 29.
The colored photosensitive composition of the present invention has, as a pigment, the following (1) to (1) to the following to improve the light shielding property, the voltage holding ratio of liquid crystal, the control of shape and level difference, and the adhesion to the substrate. It is preferable to include the three types of pigments shown in any one of (3), and in particular, from the viewpoint of the voltage holding ratio of the liquid crystal, it is preferable to include the three types of pigments shown in (1) or (2).
(1) C.I. I. Pigment orange 64, C.I. I. Pigment blue 60, C.I. I. Pigment Red 254
(2) C.I. I. Pigment orange 64, C.I. I. Pigment blue 60, C.I. I. Pigment Violet 29
(3) C.I. I. Pigment orange 64, C.I. I. Pigment blue 60, C.I. I. Pigment Violet 23
 本発明の着色感光性組成物中の顔料の割合は、全固形分に対して通常5~50重量%、好ましくは10~45重量%であり、更に好ましくは20~42重量%である。この範囲よりも顔料が多いと、スペーサーの形状や段差、基板との密着性が悪化したり、硬化性成分が減り顔料等が液晶層に溶出することによる電圧保持率低下の原因になる場合がある。一方、この範囲よりも少ないとブラックフォトスペーサーとしての十分な遮光性が確保できない場合がある。 The proportion of the pigment in the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention is usually 5 to 50% by weight, preferably 10 to 45% by weight, more preferably 20 to 42% by weight, based on the total solid content. If there is more pigment than this range, the spacer shape and level difference, adhesion to the substrate may deteriorate, or the curable component may decrease and the pigment etc. may elute into the liquid crystal layer may cause a decrease in voltage holding ratio. is there. On the other hand, if it is less than this range, sufficient light shielding properties as a black photo spacer may not be ensured.
 なお、顔料中の(A)と(B)の割合は、いずれか一方が多過ぎても少な過ぎても、これらを併用することによる本発明による遮光性と液晶の電圧保持率、形状や段差のコントロール、及び基板との密着性の向上効果を十分に得ることができない場合があることから、(A)と(B)との合計100重量%に対して、(A)を25~70重量%、特に30~60重量%、とりわけ35~60重量%で用いることが好ましい。
 即ち、(A)は波長330nmから380nm付近の光の吸収が比較的小さく、かつ波長400nmから550nm付近の光の吸収が大きい。一方で、(B)は同様に波長330nmから380nm付近の光の吸収が小さく、かつ波長550nmから700nm付近の光の吸収が大きい。従って、これらの2種の顔料をバランスよく組み合わせて用いることにより、紫外領域と可視領域の光吸収のバランスを良好なものとして、遮光性と液晶の電圧保持率、形状や段差のコントロール、及び基板との密着性を高めることができる。
In addition, the ratio of (A) and (B) in the pigment may be either too much or too little, and the light shielding property and voltage holding ratio, shape, and level difference of the liquid crystal according to the present invention by using these in combination. Control and the effect of improving the adhesion to the substrate may not be sufficiently obtained, so that (A) is 25 to 70 wt% with respect to 100 wt% of (A) and (B) in total. %, Particularly 30 to 60% by weight, especially 35 to 60% by weight.
That is, in (A), the absorption of light in the vicinity of wavelengths from 330 nm to 380 nm is relatively small, and the absorption of light in the vicinity of wavelengths from 400 nm to 550 nm is large. On the other hand, in (B), the absorption of light in the vicinity of wavelengths from 330 nm to 380 nm is similarly small, and the absorption of light in the vicinity of wavelengths from 550 nm to 700 nm is large. Therefore, by using these two types of pigments in a well-balanced combination, the light absorption balance in the ultraviolet region and the visible region is improved, the light shielding property, the voltage holding ratio of the liquid crystal, the shape and step control, and the substrate. Adhesion can be improved.
 また、本発明で用いる顔料は、(A)と(B)以外の他の様々な顔料を含んでいてもよいが、(A)と(B)との併用による上記効果を十分に得る上で、本発明の着色感光性組成物に含まれる顔料の合計100重量%中、(A)と(B)との合計の割合は、50重量%以上、特に60~95重量%、とりわけ70~90重量%であることが好ましい。 In addition, the pigment used in the present invention may contain various pigments other than (A) and (B). However, in order to sufficiently obtain the above-described effect by the combined use of (A) and (B). The total proportion of (A) and (B) in the total 100% by weight of the pigments contained in the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention is 50% by weight or more, particularly 60 to 95% by weight, especially 70 to 90%. It is preferable that it is weight%.
 また、本発明で用いる顔料の組み合わせにおいて、(A)と(B)と更にC.I.ピグメントレッド254(R254)を用いることにより、紫外領域の光吸収を抑えつつ可視領域の吸収を大きくすることができ、遮光性と液晶の電圧保持率、形状や段差のコントロール、及び基板との密着性を高めることができるという効果が奏される。この場合において、(A)と(B)とR254との合計100重量%中に、(A)を20~40重量%、(B)を45~65重量%、R254を5~25重量%、特に(A)を25~35重量%、(B)を50~60重量%、R254を10~20重量%の割合で用いることが好ましい。これら(A)、(B)及びR254以外の顔料を用いてもよいが、着色感光性組成物中の全顔料における(A)と(B)とR254との合計の割合が70重量%以上、特に90~100重量%となるように用いることが好ましい。 Also, in the combination of pigments used in the present invention, (A) and (B) and further C.I. I. By using CI Pigment Red 254 (R254), absorption in the visible region can be increased while suppressing light absorption in the ultraviolet region, and the light shielding property, voltage holding ratio of liquid crystal, control of shape and level difference, and adhesion to the substrate The effect that the property can be enhanced is exhibited. In this case, in a total of 100% by weight of (A), (B) and R254, (A) is 20 to 40% by weight, (B) is 45 to 65% by weight, R254 is 5 to 25% by weight, In particular, it is preferable to use (A) in a proportion of 25 to 35% by weight, (B) in a proportion of 50 to 60% by weight, and R254 in a proportion of 10 to 20% by weight. Although pigments other than (A), (B) and R254 may be used, the total ratio of (A), (B) and R254 in all pigments in the colored photosensitive composition is 70% by weight or more, In particular, it is preferably used so as to be 90 to 100% by weight.
 また、本発明で用いる顔料の組み合わせにおいて、(A)と(B)と更にC.I.ピグメントバイオレット23(V23)を用いることにより、紫外領域の光吸収を抑えつつ可視領域の吸収をさらに大きくすることができ、より遮光性と液晶の電圧保持率、形状や段差のコントロール、及び基板との密着性を高めることができるという効果が奏される。この場合において、(A)と(B)とV23との合計100重量%中に、(A)を30~50重量%、(B)を30~50重量%、V23を10~30重量%、特に(A)を35~45重量%、(B)を35~45重量%、V23を15~25重量%の割合で用いることが好ましい。これら(A)、(B)、及びV23以外の顔料を用いてもよいが、着色感光性組成物中の全顔料における(A)と(B)とV23との合計の割合が70重量%以上、特に90~100重量%となるように用いることが好ましい。 Also, in the combination of pigments used in the present invention, (A) and (B) and further C.I. I. By using Pigment Violet 23 (V23), the absorption in the visible region can be further increased while suppressing the absorption of light in the ultraviolet region, the light shielding property, the voltage holding ratio of the liquid crystal, the control of the shape and step, and the substrate The effect that the adhesiveness of can be improved is produced. In this case, in a total of 100% by weight of (A), (B) and V23, (A) is 30 to 50% by weight, (B) is 30 to 50% by weight, V23 is 10 to 30% by weight, In particular, it is preferable to use (A) in a proportion of 35 to 45% by weight, (B) in a proportion of 35 to 45% by weight, and V23 in a proportion of 15 to 25% by weight. Although pigments other than (A), (B), and V23 may be used, the total ratio of (A), (B), and V23 in all pigments in the colored photosensitive composition is 70% by weight or more. In particular, it is preferably used in an amount of 90 to 100% by weight.
 また、本発明で用いる顔料の組み合わせにおいて、(A)と(B)と更にC.I.ピグメントバイオレット29(V29)を用いることにより、紫外領域の光吸収を抑えつつ可視領域の吸収をさらに大きくすることができ、より遮光性と液晶の電圧保持率、形状や段差のコントロール、及び基板との密着性を高めることができるという効果が奏される。この場合において、(A)と(B)とV29との合計100重量%中に、(A)を30~50重量%、(B)を30~50重量%、V29を10~30重量%、特に(A)を35~45重量%、(B)を35~45重量%、V29を15~25重量%の割合で用いることが好ましい。これら(A)、(B)、及びV29以外の顔料を用いてもよいが、着色感光性組成物中の全顔料における(A)と(B)とV29との合計の割合が70重量%以上、特に90~100重量%となるように用いることが好ましい。 Also, in the combination of pigments used in the present invention, (A) and (B) and further C.I. I. By using Pigment Violet 29 (V29), the absorption in the visible region can be further increased while suppressing the light absorption in the ultraviolet region, and the light shielding property, the voltage holding ratio of the liquid crystal, the control of the shape and level difference, and the substrate The effect that the adhesiveness of can be improved is produced. In this case, in a total of 100% by weight of (A), (B) and V29, (A) is 30 to 50% by weight, (B) is 30 to 50% by weight, V29 is 10 to 30% by weight, In particular, it is preferable to use (A) in a proportion of 35 to 45% by weight, (B) in a proportion of 35 to 45% by weight, and V29 in a proportion of 15 to 25% by weight. Although pigments other than these (A), (B), and V29 may be used, the total ratio of (A), (B), and V29 in all pigments in the colored photosensitive composition is 70% by weight or more. In particular, it is preferably used in an amount of 90 to 100% by weight.
 また、本発明で用いる顔料は、(A)と(B)と更にC.I.ピグメントレッド272(R272)を含むことが好ましい。R272は可視域の吸収が大きいことから、高OD化に有利である。  The pigments used in the present invention are (A) and (B), and C.I. I. Pigment Red 272 (R272) is preferably included. Since R272 has a large absorption in the visible region, it is advantageous for high OD. *
[2]バインダー樹脂
 本発明の着色感光性組成物に用いられるバインダー樹脂としては、カラーフィルターに使用される部材の樹脂であれば特に制限無く使用でき、例としてはエポキシアクリレート系樹脂、ノボラック系樹脂、ポリビニルフェノール系樹脂、アクリル系樹脂、カルボキシル基含有エポキシ樹脂、カルボキシル基含有ウレタン樹脂等が挙げられるが、形状や段差のコントロール、基板との密着性の観点から、カルボキシル基を有するエポキシアクリレート樹脂やアクリル樹脂を用いることが好ましく、カルボキシル基を有するエポキシアクリレート樹脂を用いることがさらに好ましい。
[2] The binder resin used in the colored photosensitive composition of the binder resin present invention, if the resin member used for the color filter can be used without particular limitations, epoxy acrylate examples based resin, novolac resin , Polyvinyl phenol resin, acrylic resin, carboxyl group-containing epoxy resin, carboxyl group-containing urethane resin, etc., from the viewpoint of shape and step control, adhesion to the substrate, epoxy acrylate resin having a carboxyl group, It is preferable to use an acrylic resin, and it is more preferable to use an epoxy acrylate resin having a carboxyl group.
 上記エポキシアクリレート樹脂とは、エポキシ樹脂(又はエポキシ化合物)にα,β-不飽和モノカルボン酸又はエステル部分にカルボキシル基を有するα,β-不飽和モノカルボン酸エステルを付加させ、さらに、多塩基酸又はその無水物を反応させることにより合成される。かかる反応生成物は化学構造上、実質的にエポキシ基を有さず、かつ「アクリレート」に限定されるものではないが、エポキシ樹脂(又はエポキシ化合物)が原料であり、かつ「アクリレート」が代表例であるので、慣用に従いこのように命名したものである。 The above-mentioned epoxy acrylate resin means that an α, β-unsaturated monocarboxylic acid or an α, β-unsaturated monocarboxylic acid ester having a carboxyl group is added to an epoxy resin (or epoxy compound), and further a polybasic It is synthesized by reacting an acid or its anhydride. Such a reaction product has substantially no epoxy group in terms of chemical structure and is not limited to “acrylate”, but epoxy resin (or epoxy compound) is a raw material, and “acrylate” is representative. Since it is an example, it is named in this way according to common usage.
 原料となるエポキシ樹脂としては、(o,m,p-)クレゾールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂、フェノールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂、ビスフェノールA型エポキシ樹脂、ビスフェノールF型エポキシ樹脂、トリスフェノールメタン型エポキシ樹脂、又は以下に述べる一般式(1-a)~(1-a’’’)にて表されるエポキシ樹脂(又はエポキシ化合物)などが挙げられる。 The raw material epoxy resin includes (o, m, p-) cresol novolac type epoxy resin, phenol novolac type epoxy resin, bisphenol A type epoxy resin, bisphenol F type epoxy resin, trisphenol methane type epoxy resin, or Examples thereof include epoxy resins (or epoxy compounds) represented by the general formulas (1-a) to (1-a ′ ″) described.
 本発明におけるバインダー樹脂として特に好ましいものにつき、以下に説明する。 The particularly preferable binder resin in the present invention will be described below.
<アルカリ可溶性樹脂(A’’),アルカリ可溶性樹脂(A1’’)>
 本発明におけるバインダー樹脂として、特に好ましいものの一つに、下記一般式(1-a’’)で示されるエポキシ化合物(a’’)と不飽和基含有カルボン酸(b’’)との反応物を、多塩基酸及びその無水物(c’’)のうち少なくとも一方と反応させて得られるアルカリ可溶性樹脂(A’’)が挙げられる。
<Alkali-soluble resin (A ″), alkali-soluble resin (A1 ″)>
One particularly preferable binder resin in the present invention is a reaction product of an epoxy compound (a ″) represented by the following general formula (1-a ″) and an unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b ″). And an alkali-soluble resin (A ″) obtained by reacting at least one of a polybasic acid and its anhydride (c ″).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
〔上記一般式(1-a’’)において、Xは下記一般式(2a)、(2b)又は(3)で表される連結基を示す。但し、分子構造中に1つ以上のアダマンタン構造を含む。lは、2又は3の整数を示す。 [In the general formula (1-a ″), X represents a linking group represented by the following general formula (2a), (2b) or (3). However, one or more adamantane structures are included in the molecular structure. l represents an integer of 2 or 3.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
(上記一般式(2a)及び(2b)において、R~R及びR13~R15は、それぞれ独立に、置換基を有していてもよいアダマンチル基、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~12のアルキル基、又は置換基を有していてもよいフェニル基を示す。
 上記一般式(3)において、R~R12は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~12のアルキル基、又は置換基を有していてもよいフェニル基を示す。Yは、置換基を有していてもよい、アダマンタン構造を含む2価の連結基を示す。
 上記一般式(2a)、(2b)及び(3)において、*は、一般式(1-a’’)におけるグリシジルオキシ基との結合部位を示す。)〕
(In the above general formulas (2a) and (2b), R 1 to R 4 and R 13 to R 15 each independently have an adamantyl group optionally having a substituent, a hydrogen atom, and a substituent. And an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms or an optionally substituted phenyl group.
In the general formula (3), R 5 to R 12 may each independently have a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms which may have a substituent, or a substituent. Represents a phenyl group; Y represents a divalent linking group containing an adamantane structure, which may have a substituent.
In the above general formulas (2a), (2b) and (3), * represents a bonding site with the glycidyloxy group in the general formula (1-a ″). )]
(1) 一般式(1-a’’)で示されるエポキシ化合物(a’’)
 まず、前記一般式(1-a’’)で表されるエポキシ化合物(a’’)(以下、「(a’’)成分」と称することがある)における基Xについて説明する。
(1) Epoxy compound (a ″) represented by general formula (1-a ″)
First, the group X in the epoxy compound (a ″) represented by the general formula (1-a ″) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “component (a ″)”) will be described.
 前記基Xが前記一般式(2a)又は(2b)で表される構造である場合、前記一般式(2a)及び(2b)は、いずれもアダマンタン構造を2以上4以下有することが好ましい。アダマンタン構造が1では耐現像液性が低下して解像力に劣る傾向がある。 When the group X has a structure represented by the general formula (2a) or (2b), it is preferable that the general formulas (2a) and (2b) each have an adamantane structure of 2 or more and 4 or less. When the adamantane structure is 1, the developer resistance tends to decrease and the resolution tends to be inferior.
 前記基Xが前記一般式(3)で表される構造である場合、前記一般式(3)におけるYは、「置換基を有していてもよい、アダマンチル構造を含む2価の連結基」であれば、それ以外に特に制限は無いが、例えば下記一般式(4)又は(5)で表される連結基であることが好ましい。 When the group X is a structure represented by the general formula (3), Y in the general formula (3) is “a divalent linking group including an adamantyl structure which may have a substituent”. If it is, there is no restriction | limiting in particular other than that, For example, it is preferable that it is a coupling group represented by the following general formula (4) or (5).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
〔上記一般式(4)及び(5)は、いずれも置換基を有していてもよい。*は前記一般式(3)におけるベンゼン環との結合部位を示す。〕 [All of the above general formulas (4) and (5) may have a substituent. * Represents a binding site with the benzene ring in the general formula (3). ]
 特に、前記一般式(1-a’’)で表されるエポキシ化合物(a’’)は、下記一般式(6)又は(7)で表されることが好ましい。 In particular, the epoxy compound (a ″) represented by the general formula (1-a ″) is preferably represented by the following general formula (6) or (7).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
〔一般式(6)に示されるアダマンタン環及び(7)に示されるアダマンチル基は置換基を有していてもよい。
 一般式(6)において、R16~R23は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~12のアルキル基、又は置換基を有していてもよいフェニル基を示す。
 一般式(7)において、R24及びR25は、それぞれ独立に、置換基を有していてもよいアダマンチル基、水素原子、置換基を有していてもよい炭素数1~12のアルキル基、又は置換基を有していてもよいフェニル基を示す。〕
[The adamantane ring represented by the general formula (6) and the adamantyl group represented by (7) may have a substituent.
In the general formula (6), R 16 to R 23 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, or an optionally substituted phenyl group. Indicates a group.
In the general formula (7), R 24 and R 25 are each independently an adamantyl group which may have a substituent, a hydrogen atom, or an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms which may have a substituent. Or a phenyl group which may have a substituent. ]
 上記一般式(2a)、(2b)、(3)、(6)及び(7)におけるR~R25の炭素数1~12のアルキル基としては、好ましくは炭素数1~10のアルキル基が挙げられる。
 また、これらのアルキル基が有していてもよい置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、炭素数1~10のアルコキシル基、炭素数2~10のアルケニル基、フェニル基、カルボキシル基、スルファニル基、ホスフィノ基、アミノ基、及びニトロ基などが挙げられる。
In the general formulas (2a), (2b), (3), (6) and (7), the alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms of R 1 to R 25 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms. Is mentioned.
Examples of the substituent that these alkyl groups may have include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, a phenyl group, a carboxyl group, a sulfanyl group, A phosphino group, an amino group, a nitro group, etc. are mentioned.
 また、上記一般式(2a)、(2b)、(3)、(6)、(7)におけるR~R25のフェニル基が有していてもよい置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、炭素数1~10のアルコキシル基、炭素数2~10のアルケニル基、フェニル基、カルボキシル基、スルファニル基、ホスフィノ基、アミノ基、及びニトロ基などが挙げられる。 In addition, examples of the substituent that the phenyl group of R 1 to R 25 in the general formulas (2a), (2b), (3), (6), and (7) may have include a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, Examples thereof include an alkoxyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, a phenyl group, a carboxyl group, a sulfanyl group, a phosphino group, an amino group, and a nitro group.
 また、上記一般式(2a)及び(2b)におけるR~R及びR13~R15のアダマンチル基、一般式(3)のYに含まれるアダマンタン環、一般式(6)におけるアダマンタン環、一般式(7)におけるアダマンチル基、一般式(7)におけるR24、R25のアダマンチル基、並びに一般式(4)及び(5)のアダマンタン環が有していてもよい置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、炭素数1~10のアルコキシル基、炭素数2~10のアルケニル基、フェニル基、カルボキシル基、スルファニル基、ホスフィノ基、アミノ基、及びニトロ基などが挙げられる。 Further, the adamantyl group of R 1 to R 4 and R 13 to R 15 in the general formulas (2a) and (2b), the adamantane ring contained in Y of the general formula (3), the adamantane ring in the general formula (6), The adamantyl group in the general formula (7), the adamantyl group of R 24 and R 25 in the general formula (7), and the adamantane ring in the general formulas (4) and (5) may have a halogen Examples thereof include an atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, a phenyl group, a carboxyl group, a sulfanyl group, a phosphino group, an amino group, and a nitro group.
 前記一般式(6)において、R16~R23は、特に、アルキル基、ハロゲン原子、アルコキシル基、アルケニル基、又はフェニル基であることが好ましい。 In the general formula (6), R 16 to R 23 are particularly preferably an alkyl group, a halogen atom, an alkoxyl group, an alkenyl group, or a phenyl group.
 また、前記一般式(7)において、R24及びR25は、特に、アルキル基、ハロゲン原子、アルコキシル基、アルケニル基、又はフェニル基であることが好ましい。 In the general formula (7), R 24 and R 25 are particularly preferably an alkyl group, a halogen atom, an alkoxyl group, an alkenyl group, or a phenyl group.
 一般式(1-a’’)に示されるXの分子量は、200以上1000以下であることが好ましい。Xの分子量を200以上とすることにより十分な耐薬品性を確保することができ、また1000以下とすることにより、良好な感度を確保することができる。 The molecular weight of X represented by the general formula (1-a ″) is preferably 200 or more and 1000 or less. When the molecular weight of X is 200 or more, sufficient chemical resistance can be secured, and when it is 1000 or less, good sensitivity can be secured.
 また、一般式(1-a’’)で表されるエポキシ化合物(a’’)のエポキシ当量は、210以上であることが好ましく、230以上であることがより好ましい。また、このエポキシ当量は450以下であることが好ましく、400以下であることがより好ましい。エポキシ化合物(a’’)のエポキシ当量を210以上とすることにより十分な耐アルカリ性を確保することが可能となり、450以下とすることにより生成する有機結合剤の良好な感度を確保することができる。 The epoxy equivalent of the epoxy compound (a ″) represented by the general formula (1-a ″) is preferably 210 or more, and more preferably 230 or more. The epoxy equivalent is preferably 450 or less, and more preferably 400 or less. When the epoxy equivalent of the epoxy compound (a ″) is 210 or more, sufficient alkali resistance can be secured, and when it is 450 or less, good sensitivity of the organic binder to be produced can be secured. .
 エポキシ化合物(a’’)は、1種を単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。 As the epoxy compound (a ″), one type may be used alone, or two or more types may be used in combination.
 エポキシ化合物(a’’)は、市販のものを用いてもよいし、下記のようなフェノール化合物より公知の方法で合成して用いてもよい。 As the epoxy compound (a ″), a commercially available product may be used, or it may be synthesized from a phenol compound as described below by a known method.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
〔上記一般式(9a)、(9b)及び(10)におけるR~R15は、それぞれ一般式(2a)、(2b)及び(3)における定義と同義である。〕 [R 1 to R 15 in the general formulas (9a), (9b), and (10) have the same definitions as in the general formulas (2a), (2b), and (3), respectively. ]
 例えば、一般式(9a)又は(9b)で表される化合物と、過剰のエピクロルヒドリン、エピブロムヒドリン等のエピハロヒドリンの溶解混合物に、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム等のアルカリ金属水酸化物を予め添加し、又は添加しながら20~120℃の温度で1~10時間反応させることにより、一般式(1-a’’)におけるXが前記一般式(2a)又は(2b)で表される連結基であるエポキシ化合物(a’’)を得ることができる。 For example, an alkali metal hydroxide such as sodium hydroxide or potassium hydroxide is added in advance to a dissolved mixture of the compound represented by the general formula (9a) or (9b) and an excess of epihalohydrin such as epichlorohydrin or epibromhydrin. By adding or reacting at a temperature of 20 to 120 ° C. for 1 to 10 hours, X in the general formula (1-a ″) is represented by the general formula (2a) or (2b). An epoxy compound (a ″) as a group can be obtained.
 また、一般式(10)で表される化合物と、過剰のエピクロルヒドリン、エピブロムヒドリン等のエピハロヒドリンの溶解混合物に水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム等のアルカリ金属水酸化物を予め添加し、又は添加しながら20~120℃の温度で1~10時間反応させることにより、一般式(1-a’’)におけるXが前記一般式(3)で表されるエポキシ化合物(a’’)を得ることができる。 In addition, an alkali metal hydroxide such as sodium hydroxide or potassium hydroxide is added in advance or added to a dissolved mixture of the compound represented by the general formula (10) and an epihalohydrin such as excess epichlorohydrin or epibromohydrin. The epoxy compound (a ″) in which X in the general formula (1-a ″) is represented by the general formula (3) is obtained by reacting at a temperature of 20 to 120 ° C. for 1 to 10 hours. Can do.
 このエポキシ化合物(a’’)を得る反応において、アルカリ金属水酸化物として、その水溶液を使用してもよい。その場合、該アルカリ金属水酸化物の水溶液を連続的に反応系内に添加すると共に、減圧下又は常圧下に、連続的に水及びエピハロヒドリンを留出させ、更に分液し、水は除去し、エピハロヒドリンは反応系内に連続的に戻す方法であってもよい。 In the reaction for obtaining the epoxy compound (a ″), an aqueous solution thereof may be used as an alkali metal hydroxide. In that case, the aqueous solution of the alkali metal hydroxide is continuously added to the reaction system, and water and epihalohydrin are continuously distilled off under reduced pressure or normal pressure. Epihalohydrin may be continuously returned to the reaction system.
 また、前記一般式(9a)、(9b)、又は(10)で表される化合物とエピハロヒドリンの溶解混合物にテトラメチルアンモニウムクロライド、テトラメチルアンモニウムブロマイド、トリメチルベンジルアンモニウムクロライド等の4級アンモニウム塩を触媒として添加し、50~150℃で1~5時間反応させて得られる、一般式(9a)、(9b)、又は(10)で表される化合物のハロヒドリンエーテル化物に、アルカリ金属水酸化物の固体又は水溶液を加え、再び20~120℃の温度で1~10時間反応させて脱ハロゲン化水素(閉環)させる方法でも、一般式(1-a’’)で表されるエポキシ化合物(a’’)を製造することができる。 Further, a quaternary ammonium salt such as tetramethylammonium chloride, tetramethylammonium bromide, trimethylbenzylammonium chloride or the like is catalyzed to a dissolved mixture of the compound represented by the general formula (9a), (9b) or (10) and epihalohydrin. To the halohydrin etherified product of the compound represented by the general formula (9a), (9b), or (10) obtained by reacting at 50 to 150 ° C. for 1 to 5 hours. The epoxy compound represented by the general formula (1-a ″) can also be obtained by adding a solid or aqueous solution of the product and reacting again at a temperature of 20 to 120 ° C. for 1 to 10 hours to dehydrohalogenate (ring closure). a ″) can be produced.
 このような反応において使用されるエピハロヒドリンの量は、一般式(9a)、(9b)、又は(10)で表される化合物の水酸基1当量に対し通常1~20モル、好ましくは2~10モルである。また、アルカリ金属水酸化物の使用量は一般式(9a)、(9b)、又は(10)で表される化合物の水酸基1当量に対し通常0.8~15モル、好ましくは0.9~11モルである。 The amount of epihalohydrin used in such a reaction is usually 1 to 20 mol, preferably 2 to 10 mol, relative to 1 equivalent of the hydroxyl group of the compound represented by formula (9a), (9b), or (10). It is. The amount of the alkali metal hydroxide used is usually 0.8 to 15 mol, preferably 0.9 to 0.1 mol per 1 equivalent of the hydroxyl group of the compound represented by the general formula (9a), (9b), or (10). 11 moles.
 上述の反応において、更に、反応を円滑に進行させるためにメタノール、エタノールなどのアルコール類の他、ジメチルスルホン、ジメチルスルホキシド等の非プロトン性極性溶媒などを添加して反応を行ってもよい。アルコール類を使用する場合、その使用量はエピハロヒドリンの量に対し2~20重量%、好ましくは4~15重量%である。また、非プロトン性極性溶媒を用いる場合、その使用量はエピハロヒドリンの量に対し5~100重量%、好ましくは10~90重量%である。 In the above reaction, in addition to the alcohols such as methanol and ethanol, an aprotic polar solvent such as dimethyl sulfone and dimethyl sulfoxide may be added to carry out the reaction smoothly. When alcohols are used, the amount used is 2 to 20% by weight, preferably 4 to 15% by weight, based on the amount of epihalohydrin. When an aprotic polar solvent is used, the amount used is 5 to 100% by weight, preferably 10 to 90% by weight, based on the amount of epihalohydrin.
(2) 不飽和基含有カルボン酸(b’’)
 不飽和基含有カルボン酸(b’’)(以下、「(b’’)成分」と称することがある)としては、エチレン性不飽和基を有する不飽和カルボン酸が挙げられ、具体例としては、(メタ)アクリル酸、クロトン酸、o-ビニル安息香酸、m-ビニル安息香酸、p-ビニル安息香酸、ケイヒ酸、α-位がハロアルキル基、アルコキシル基、ハロゲン原子、ニトロ基、又はシアノ基で置換された(メタ)アクリル酸などのモノカルボン酸;2-(メタ)アクリロイロキシエチルコハク酸、2-(メタ)アクリロイロキシエチルアジピン酸、2-(メタ)アクリロイロキシエチルフタル酸、2-(メタ)アクリロイロキシエチルヘキサヒドロフタル酸、2-(メタ)アクリロイロキシエチルマレイン酸、2-(メタ)アクリロイロキシプロピルコハク酸、2-(メタ)アクリロイロキシプロピルアジピン酸、2-(メタ)アクリロイロキシプロピルテトラヒドロフタル酸、2-(メタ)アクリロイロキシプロピルフタル酸、2-(メタ)アクリロイロキシプロピルマレイン酸、2-(メタ)アクリロイロキシブチルコハク酸、2-(メタ)アクリロイロキシブチルアジピン酸、2-(メタ)アクリロイロキシブチルヒドロフタル酸、2-(メタ)アクリロイロキシブチルフタル酸、2-(メタ)アクリロイロキシブチルマレイン酸などの、2塩基酸の(メタ)アクリロイロキシアルキルエステル;(メタ)アクリル酸にε-カプロラクトン、β-プロピオラクトン、γ-ブチロラクトン、δ-バレロラクトン等のラクトン類を付加させたものである単量体;(メタ)アクリル酸ダイマーなどが挙げられる。
 また、ペンタエリスリトールトリ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパンジアクリレート、グリシジルメタクリレートのアクリル酸付加物、グリシジルメタクリレートのメタクリル酸付加物のような水酸基含有不飽和化合物に無水コハク酸、無水マレイン酸、無水テトラヒドロフタル酸、無水フタル酸などの酸無水物を付加させた化合物も挙げられる。
 特に好ましいものは、(メタ)アクリル酸である。
 これらは1種を単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を混合して用いてもよい。
(2) Unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b ″)
Examples of the unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b ″) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “(b ″) component”) include unsaturated carboxylic acids having an ethylenically unsaturated group. , (Meth) acrylic acid, crotonic acid, o-vinylbenzoic acid, m-vinylbenzoic acid, p-vinylbenzoic acid, cinnamic acid, α-position is haloalkyl group, alkoxyl group, halogen atom, nitro group, or cyano group monocarboxylic acids such as substituted (meth) acrylic acid in; 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl succinate, 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl adipic acid, 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl phthalate 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl hexahydrophthalic acid, 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethylmaleic acid, 2- (meth) acryloyloxypropyl succinic acid, 2 (Meth) acryloyloxy propyl adipate, 2- (meth) acryloyloxy propyl tetrahydrophthalic acid, 2- (meth) acryloyloxy propyl phthalate, 2- (meth) acryloyloxy propyl maleate, 2- ( meth) acryloyloxy butyl acid, 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl butyl adipate, 2- (meth) acryloyloxy butyl phthalate, 2- (meth) acryloyloxy-butyl phthalate, 2- (meth ) (Meth) acryloyloxyalkyl esters of dibasic acids such as acryloyloxybutylmaleic acid; (meth) acrylic acid and lactones such as ε-caprolactone, β-propiolactone, γ-butyrolactone, δ-valerolactone Monomers added with aldehydes; (meth) acrylic acid dimer, etc. The
Also, anhydrous hydroxyl-containing unsaturated compounds such as pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane diacrylate, glycidyl methacrylate acrylic acid adduct, and glycidyl methacrylate methacrylic acid adduct. The compound which added acid anhydrides, such as succinic acid, maleic anhydride, tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, and phthalic anhydride, is also mentioned.
Particularly preferred is (meth) acrylic acid.
These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 (a’’)成分中のエポキシ基と(b’’)成分とを反応させる方法としては公知の手法を用いることができる。例えば、上記(a’’)成分と(b’’)成分とを、トリエチルアミン、ベンジルメチルアミン等の3級アミン、ドデシルトリメチルアンモニウムクロライド、テトラメチルアンモニウムクロライド、テトラエチルアンモニウムクロライド、ベンジルトリエチルアンモニウムクロライド等の4級アンモニウム塩、ピリジン、トリフェニルホスフィン等を触媒として、有機溶剤中、反応温度50~150℃で数~数十時間反応させることにより、エポキシ化合物にカルボン酸を付加することができる。 As a method of reacting the epoxy group in the component (a ″) with the component (b ″), a known method can be used. For example, the component (a ″) and the component (b ″) are mixed with tertiary amines such as triethylamine and benzylmethylamine, dodecyltrimethylammonium chloride, tetramethylammonium chloride, tetraethylammonium chloride, benzyltriethylammonium chloride and the like. Carboxylic acid can be added to the epoxy compound by reacting with a quaternary ammonium salt, pyridine, triphenylphosphine or the like in an organic solvent at a reaction temperature of 50 to 150 ° C. for several to several tens of hours.
 該触媒の使用量は、反応原料混合物((a’’)成分と(b’’)成分との合計)に対して好ましくは0.01~10重量%、特に好ましくは0.3~5重量%である。また反応中の重合を防止するために、重合防止剤(例えばメトキノン、ハイドロキノン、メチルハイドロキノン、p-メトキシフェノール、ピロガロール、tert-ブチルカテコール、フェノチアジン等)を使用することが好ましく、その使用量は、反応原料混合物に対して好ましくは0.01~10重量%、特に好ましくは0.03~5重量%である。 The amount of the catalyst used is preferably 0.01 to 10% by weight, particularly preferably 0.3 to 5% by weight, based on the reaction raw material mixture (the sum of the components (a ″) and (b ″). %. In order to prevent polymerization during the reaction, it is preferable to use a polymerization inhibitor (for example, methoquinone, hydroquinone, methylhydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, pyrogallol, tert-butylcatechol, phenothiazine, etc.). The amount is preferably 0.01 to 10% by weight, particularly preferably 0.03 to 5% by weight, based on the reaction raw material mixture.
 (a’’)成分のエポキシ基に(b’’)成分を付加させる割合は、通常90~100モル%である。エポキシ基の残存は保存安定性に悪影響を与える傾向があるため、(b’’)成分は、(a’’)成分のエポキシ基1当量に対して、通常0.8~1.5当量、特に0.9~1.1当量の割合で反応を行うことが好ましい。 The ratio of adding the (b ″) component to the epoxy group of the (a ″) component is usually 90 to 100 mol%. Since the remaining epoxy group tends to adversely affect the storage stability, the component (b ″) is usually 0.8 to 1.5 equivalents relative to 1 equivalent of the epoxy group of the component (a ″). In particular, the reaction is preferably carried out at a ratio of 0.9 to 1.1 equivalents.
(3) 多塩基酸及びその無水物(c’’)
 多塩基酸及びその無水物(c’’)のうち少なくとも一方(以下、「(c’’)成分」又は「多塩基酸(無水物)」と称することがある)としては、2塩基酸及びその無水物のうち少なくとも一方(以下、「2塩基酸(無水物)」と称する)、3塩基酸及びその無水物のうち少なくとも一方(以下、「3塩基酸(無水物)」と称する)、4塩基酸及びその無水物のうち少なくとも一方(以下、「4塩基酸(無水物)」と称する)等を用いることができる。
(3) Polybasic acid and its anhydride (c ″)
As at least one of the polybasic acid and its anhydride (c ″) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “component (c ″)” or “polybasic acid (anhydride)”), a dibasic acid and as at least one of the anhydride (hereinafter referred to as "tribasic acid (anhydride)") (hereinafter, referred to as "dibasic acid (anhydride)"), 3 at least one of the nucleotide acid and its anhydride, At least one of the 4-basic acid and its anhydride (hereinafter referred to as “4-basic acid (anhydride)”) or the like can be used.
 4塩基酸(無水物)(テトラカルボン酸及びその二無水物のうち少なくとも一方)としては公知のものが使用でき、例えばピロメリット酸、ベンゾフェノンテトラカルボン酸、ビフェニルテトラカルボン酸、ビフェニルエーテルテトラカルボン酸等のテトラカルボン酸、又はこれらの二無水物等が挙げられる。これらは1種を単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。
 4塩基酸(無水物)としては、上記例示化合物の中でも、特にビフェニルテトラカルボン酸、又はその無水物が好ましい。
As the 4-basic acid (anhydride) (at least one of tetracarboxylic acid and dianhydride thereof), known ones can be used, for example, pyromellitic acid, benzophenone tetracarboxylic acid, biphenyl tetracarboxylic acid, biphenyl ether tetracarboxylic acid. And tetracarboxylic acids such as these, or their dianhydrides. These may be used individually by 1 type and may be used in combination of 2 or more type.
As the 4-basic acid (anhydride), among the above exemplified compounds, biphenyltetracarboxylic acid or an anhydride thereof is particularly preferable.
 (a’’)成分と(b’’)成分との反応物に、(c’’)成分として4塩基酸(無水物)を反応させることにより、架橋反応により分子量が増大する。このため、基板への密着性向上、溶解性の調節、感度やアルカリ耐性の向上等の効果があり好ましい。 By reacting the reaction product of the component (a ″) and the component (b ″) with a 4-basic acid (anhydride) as the component (c ″), the molecular weight is increased by a crosslinking reaction. For this reason, there exist effects, such as an adhesive improvement to a board | substrate, adjustment of solubility, an improvement of a sensitivity or alkali tolerance, and it is preferable.
 2塩基酸(無水物)(ジカルボン酸及びその無水物のうち少なくとも一方)としては、例えばマレイン酸、コハク酸、イタコン酸、フタル酸、テトラヒドロフタル酸、ヘキサヒドロフタル酸、メチルエンドメチレンテトラヒドロフタル酸、クロレンド酸、メチルテトラヒドロフタル酸、又はこれらの無水物等が挙げられる。中でも、テトラヒドロフタル酸、コハク酸、又はこれらの無水物が好ましい。これらは、1種を単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。 Examples of the dibasic acid (anhydride) (dicarboxylic acid and / or its anhydride) include, for example, maleic acid, succinic acid, itaconic acid, phthalic acid, tetrahydrophthalic acid, hexahydrophthalic acid, methylendomethylenetetrahydrophthalic acid , Chlorendic acid, methyltetrahydrophthalic acid, or anhydrides thereof. Among these, tetrahydrophthalic acid, succinic acid, or anhydrides thereof are preferable. These may be used individually by 1 type and may be used in combination of 2 or more type.
(a’’)成分と(b’’)成分との反応物に、(c’’)成分として2塩基酸(無水物)を反応させることにより、溶解性の調節が容易となり、また基板への密着性が向上するため好ましい。 By reacting a reaction product of the component (a ″) and the component (b ″) with a dibasic acid (anhydride) as the component (c ″), it is possible to easily adjust the solubility and to the substrate. This is preferable because of improving the adhesion.
 3塩基酸(無水物)(トリカルボン酸及びその無水物のうち少なくとも一方)としては、トリメリット酸、ヘキサヒドロトリメリット酸、又はこれらの無水物などが挙げられる。特に無水トリメリット酸、無水ヘキサヒドロトリメリット酸が好ましい。これらは、1種を単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。 Examples of the tribasic acid (anhydride) (tricarboxylic acid and at least one of the anhydrides) include trimellitic acid, hexahydrotrimellitic acid, and anhydrides thereof. Particularly preferred are trimellitic anhydride and hexahydrotrimellitic anhydride. These may be used individually by 1 type and may be used in combination of 2 or more type.
 (c’’)成分として3塩基酸(無水物)を用いることにより、アルカリ可溶性樹脂(A’’)の分子量を増大させ、分子中に分岐を導入することができ、分子量と粘度のバランスをとることができる。また、分子中への酸基の導入量を増やすことができ、感度、密着性等のバランスが取れた樹脂を得ることができる。 By using a tribasic acid (anhydride) as the component (c ″), the molecular weight of the alkali-soluble resin (A ″) can be increased, branching can be introduced into the molecule, and the balance between molecular weight and viscosity can be improved. Can take. Moreover, the amount of acid groups introduced into the molecule can be increased, and a resin having a good balance of sensitivity, adhesion, and the like can be obtained.
 (c’’)成分としては、特に4塩基酸(無水物)を用いることが好ましい。この場合、4塩基酸(無水物)の付加率は、(a’’)成分に(b’’)成分を付加させたときに生成される水酸基に対し、通常10~100モル%、好ましくは20~100モル%、より好ましくは30~100モル%である。(c’’)成分である4塩基酸(無水物)の付加率を上記下限値以上とすることにより、アルカリ可溶性樹脂(A’’)の十分な溶解性と基板への良好な密着性を確保することができる。 As the (c ″) component, it is particularly preferable to use tetrabasic acid (anhydride). In this case, the addition rate of the 4-basic acid (anhydride) is usually 10 to 100 mol%, preferably 10 to 100 mol%, based on the hydroxyl group produced when the component (b ″) is added to the component (a ″). It is 20 to 100 mol%, more preferably 30 to 100 mol%. By setting the addition rate of the 4-basic acid (anhydride) as the component (c ″) to the above lower limit or more, sufficient solubility of the alkali-soluble resin (A ″) and good adhesion to the substrate can be obtained. Can be secured.
 なお、着色感光性組成物の粘度調節や溶解性調節の点から、上述した4塩基酸(無水物)の一部を、2塩基酸(無水物)に置き換えることが好ましい。 In addition, it is preferable to replace a part of the 4-basic acid (anhydride) described above with a dibasic acid (anhydride) from the viewpoint of adjusting the viscosity and solubility of the colored photosensitive composition.
 (c’’)成分として4塩基酸(無水物)と2塩基酸(無水物)を併用する場合、そのモル比は、2塩基酸(無水物):4塩基酸(無水物)=99:1~20:80であることが好ましく、80:20~30:70であることがより好ましい。4塩基酸(無水物)の割合を上記下限値以上とすることにより、得られる塗膜の高い膜物性を得ることが可能となる、また2塩基酸(無水物)を上記下限値以上とすることにより、得られる樹脂溶液の粘度上昇を抑制し、取り扱い性を向上させることができる。 In the case of using a 4-basic acid (anhydride) and a 2-basic acid (anhydride) in combination as the component (c ″), the molar ratio is as follows: dibasic acid (anhydride): 4-basic acid (anhydride) = 99: It is preferably 1 to 20:80, and more preferably 80:20 to 30:70. By setting the ratio of 4-basic acid (anhydride) to the above lower limit value or higher, it becomes possible to obtain high film properties of the resulting coating film, and dibasic acid (anhydride) is set to the above lower limit value or more. As a result, an increase in the viscosity of the resulting resin solution can be suppressed and the handleability can be improved.
 また、基板への密着性向上、溶解性の容易な調節、感度やアルカリ耐性の向上等の効果に加え、分子量と粘度、感度、密着性等の様々なバランスを取るためには、4塩基酸(無水物)及び2塩基酸(無水物)のうち少なくとも一方と、3塩基酸(無水物)とを併用することが好ましい。 In addition to the effects of improving adhesion to the substrate, easy adjustment of solubility, improvement of sensitivity and alkali resistance, etc., in order to achieve various balances such as molecular weight, viscosity, sensitivity, and adhesion, 4-basic acid is used. It is preferable to use at least one of (anhydride) and dibasic acid (anhydride) in combination with tribasic acid (anhydride).
 (c’’)成分として4塩基酸(無水物)及び2塩基酸(無水物)のうち少なくとも一方と、3塩基酸(無水物)を併用する場合、3塩基酸(無水物)の使用量は、少なすぎると効果が薄く、アルカリ耐性低下の可能性があるので、3塩基酸(無水物)の使用量は、(a’’)成分に、(b’’)成分を付加させた時に生成される水酸基に対して、通常5~70モル%、好ましくは10~40モル%である。 (C '') When using at least one of four basic acids (anhydrides) and two basic acids (anhydrides) as a component and three basic acids (anhydrides) in combination, the amount of the three basic acids (anhydrides) used If the amount is too small, the effect is diminished and the alkali resistance may be lowered. Therefore, the amount of tribasic acid (anhydride) used is when (b '') component is added to (a '') component. The amount is usually 5 to 70 mol%, preferably 10 to 40 mol%, based on the hydroxyl group produced.
 (c’’)成分の付加率の合計は、(a’’)成分に(b’’)成分を付加させたときに生成される水酸基に対し、通常10~100モル%、好ましくは20~100モル%、より好ましくは30~100モル%である。(c’’)成分の付加率を上記下限値以上とすることにより、アルカリ可溶性樹脂(A’’)の溶解性や基板への密着性がより良好となる。 The total addition rate of the component (c ″) is usually 10 to 100 mol%, preferably 20 to 20%, based on the hydroxyl group produced when the component (b ″) is added to the component (a ″). 100 mol%, more preferably 30 to 100 mol%. By setting the addition rate of the component (c ″) to the above lower limit value or more, the solubility of the alkali-soluble resin (A ″) and the adhesion to the substrate are improved.
 なお(c’’)成分は、(a’’)成分に(b’’)成分を付加させたときに生成される水酸基に対して反応させる以外に、(a’’)成分に(b’’)成分を付加させ、これに後述する多価アルコール(d’’)を混合した時に、この混合物中に存在するいずれかの水酸基に対して反応させてもよい。
 (a’’)成分に(b’’)成分を付加させた後、或いはこれに、後述する多価アルコール(d’’)を混合した後、(c’’)成分を付加させる方法としては、公知の方法を用いることができる。
In addition, the component (c ″) can be added to the component (a ″) (b ′) in addition to reacting with the hydroxyl group produced when the component (b ″) is added to the component (a ″). ') When a component is added and a polyhydric alcohol (d ″) described later is mixed, it may be reacted with any hydroxyl group present in the mixture.
As a method of adding the component (c ″) after adding the component (b ″) to the component (a ″) or mixing the polyhydric alcohol (d ″) described later to this component, A known method can be used.
 その反応温度は通常80~130℃、好ましくは90~125℃である。反応温度が130℃を超えると、(b’’)成分における不飽和基の一部の重合が起こり、分子量の急激な増大につながる可能性がある。また、80℃未満では反応がスムーズに進まず、(c’’)成分が残存する可能性がある。 The reaction temperature is usually 80 to 130 ° C, preferably 90 to 125 ° C. When the reaction temperature exceeds 130 ° C., polymerization of a part of unsaturated groups in the component (b ″) occurs, which may lead to a rapid increase in molecular weight. Further, when the temperature is lower than 80 ° C., the reaction does not proceed smoothly, and the component (c ″) may remain.
(4) 多価アルコール(d’’)
 本発明で用いるバインダー樹脂は、前述した(a’’)成分に(b’’)成分を付加させてなる反応物に、更に多価アルコール(d’’)(以下、「(d’’)成分」と称することがある)を混合し、これら混合物中に存在するいずれかの水酸基に対して上述の(c’’)成分を付加反応させることにより得られる、アルカリ可溶性樹脂(A1’’)であってもよい。
(4) Polyhydric alcohol (d ″)
The binder resin used in the present invention is obtained by adding a polyhydric alcohol (d ″) (hereinafter referred to as “(d ″)” to the reaction product obtained by adding the component (b ″) to the component (a ″) described above. An alkali-soluble resin (A1 ″) obtained by mixing the above component (c ″) with any hydroxyl group present in the mixture. It may be.
 (d’’)成分としては、例えばトリメチロールプロパン、ジトリメチロールプロパン、ペンタエリスリトール、ジペンタエリスリトール、トリメチロールエタン、1,2,3-プロパントリオールの中から選ばれる1種又は2種以上の多価アルコールであることが好ましい。 Examples of the component (d ″) include one or two or more kinds selected from trimethylolpropane, ditrimethylolpropane, pentaerythritol, dipentaerythritol, trimethylolethane, and 1,2,3-propanetriol. A monohydric alcohol is preferred.
 (d’’)成分を用いることにより、アルカリ可溶性樹脂(A1’’)の分子量を増大させ、分子中に分岐を導入することが出来、分子量と粘度のバランスをとることができる。また、分子中への酸基の導入率を増やすことができ、感度や密着性等のバランスのとれた有機結合剤を得ることができる。 By using the component (d ″), the molecular weight of the alkali-soluble resin (A1 ″) can be increased, branching can be introduced into the molecule, and the molecular weight and the viscosity can be balanced. Moreover, the rate of introduction of acid groups into the molecule can be increased, and an organic binder having a good balance of sensitivity and adhesion can be obtained.
 (d’’)成分の使用量は、少な過ぎると効果が薄く、多過ぎると増粘やゲル化の可能性があるので、(a’’)成分と(b’’)成分との反応物に対して、通常0.01~0.5重量倍、好ましくは0.02~0.2重量倍である。 If the amount of component (d ″) used is too small, the effect will be diminished, and if it is too large, there is a possibility of thickening or gelation, so the reaction product of component (a ″) and component (b ″) On the other hand, it is usually 0.01 to 0.5 times by weight, preferably 0.02 to 0.2 times by weight.
(5) アルカリ可溶性樹脂(A’’)及び(A1’’)の酸価と分子量
 このようにして得られるアルカリ可溶性樹脂(A’’)及び(A1’’)の酸価は、通常10mg-KOH/g以上、好ましくは50mg-KOH/g以上である。良好な現像性を確保するには、酸価が上記下限値以上であることが好ましく、また着色感光性組成物の十分なアルカリ耐性を確保する(すなわち、アルカリ性現像液による、パターン表面の粗面化や、膜減りを生じさせない)には、酸価は200mg-KOH/g以下であることが好ましく、150mg-KOH/g以下であることがより好ましい。
(5) Acid value and molecular weight of alkali-soluble resins (A ″) and (A1 ″) The acid values of the alkali-soluble resins (A ″) and (A1 ″) thus obtained are usually 10 mg− KOH / g or more, preferably 50 mg-KOH / g or more. In order to ensure good developability, the acid value is preferably not less than the above lower limit value, and sufficient alkali resistance of the colored photosensitive composition is ensured (that is, the rough surface of the pattern surface by the alkaline developer). The acid value is preferably 200 mg-KOH / g or less, and more preferably 150 mg-KOH / g or less.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂(A’’)及び(A1’’)のゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィー(GPC)測定による標準ポリスチレン換算の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、1,500以上であることが好ましく、2,000以上であることがより好ましい。また、20,000以下であることが好ましく、10,000以下であることがより好ましい。重量平均分子量を上記下限値以上とすることにより、感度や塗膜強度、アルカリ耐性等がより良好になる。また上記上限値以下とすることにより、良好な現像性や再溶解性を得ることができる。 The weight average molecular weight (Mw) in terms of standard polystyrene as measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC) of the alkali-soluble resins (A ″) and (A1 ″) is preferably 1,500 or more, and 2,000. More preferably. Moreover, it is preferable that it is 20,000 or less, and it is more preferable that it is 10,000 or less. By setting the weight average molecular weight to the above lower limit value or more, sensitivity, coating film strength, alkali resistance and the like are improved. Moreover, favorable developability and re-dissolution property can be obtained by setting it as the said upper limit or less.
 <アルカリ可溶性樹脂(A)>
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂(A)は、特定のエポキシ樹脂(a)と、不飽和基含有カルボン酸(b)との反応物を、更に多塩基酸及びその無水物(c)のうち少なくとも一方と反応させて得られるものである。
<Alkali-soluble resin (A)>
The alkali-soluble resin (A) is obtained by reacting a reaction product of a specific epoxy resin (a) with an unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b) with at least one of a polybasic acid and its anhydride (c). Is obtained.
(1) エポキシ樹脂(a)
 エポキシ樹脂(a)は下記一般式(1-a)で表される。
(1) Epoxy resin (a)
The epoxy resin (a) is represented by the following general formula (1-a).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
〔上記一般式(1-a)において、nは平均値を示し0~10の数を示す。R41は水素原子、ハロゲン原子、炭素数1~8のアルキル基、炭素数3~10のシクロアルキル基、フェニル基、ナフチル基、又はビフェニル基のいずれかを表す。なお、1分子中に存在する複数のR41は、それぞれ同じであっても異なっていてもよい。Gはグリシジル基を表す。〕 [In the above general formula (1-a), n represents an average value and represents a number from 0 to 10. R 41 represents any one of a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, and a biphenyl group. A plurality of R 41 present in one molecule may be the same or different. G represents a glycidyl group. ]
 一般式(1-a)におけるR41は、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、炭素数1~8のアルキル基、炭素数3~10のシクロアルキル基、フェニル基、ナフチル基、又はビフェニル基のいずれかを表すが、感度及び溶解性の点から、R41としては、水素原子又はメチル基が特に好ましい。なお、1分子中に存在する複数のR41は、それぞれ同じであっても異なっていてもよい。 R 41 in the general formula (1-a) represents any of a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, or a biphenyl group. As represented, from the viewpoint of sensitivity and solubility, R 41 is particularly preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group. A plurality of R 41 present in one molecule may be the same or different.
 前記一般式(1-a)で表されるエポキシ樹脂(a)は、例えば、下記一般式(1-a-1)で表される化合物とエピハロヒドリンとを、アルカリ金属水酸化物の存在下に反応させることにより得ることができる。 The epoxy resin (a) represented by the general formula (1-a) includes, for example, a compound represented by the following general formula (1-a-1) and an epihalohydrin in the presence of an alkali metal hydroxide. It can be obtained by reacting.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
〔式中、n及びR41は、一般式(1-a)におけるのと同じ意味を表す。〕 [Wherein, n and R 41 represent the same meaning as in formula (1-a). ]
 前記一般式(1-a-1)で表される化合物は、例えば下記一般式(1-a-2)で表される化合物とフェノール類とを酸触媒の存在下で縮合反応させることにより得ることができる。 The compound represented by the general formula (1-a-1) is obtained, for example, by subjecting a compound represented by the following general formula (1-a-2) and a phenol to a condensation reaction in the presence of an acid catalyst. be able to.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
〔式中、Zはハロゲン原子、水酸基、又は低級アルコキシ基を表す。R41は前記一般式(1-a)におけるのと同じ意味を表す。〕 [In formula, Z represents a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, or a lower alkoxy group. R 41 represents the same meaning as in the general formula (1-a). ]
 上記一般式(1-a-2)のZにおいて、ハロゲン原子としては塩素原子、臭素原子などが、低級アルコキシ基としてはメトキシ基、エトキシ基等の炭素数1~4のアルコキシ基などがそれぞれ好ましい基として挙げられる。 In Z of the above general formula (1-a-2), the halogen atom is preferably a chlorine atom, a bromine atom or the like, and the lower alkoxy group is preferably an alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms such as a methoxy group or an ethoxy group. As a group.
 一方、フェノール類とは、フェノール性水酸基を1分子中に1個有する芳香族化合物であり、その具体例としては、フェノール、クレゾール、エチルフェノール、n-プロピルフェノール、イソブチルフェノール、t-ブチルフェノール、オクチルフェノール、キシレノール、メチルブチルフェノール、ジ-t-ブチルフェノール等を代表例とするアルキルフェノールの各種o-,m-,p-異性体、又はシクロペンチルフェノール、シクロヘキシルフェノール、シクロヘキシルクレゾール等を代表例とするシクロアルキルフェノール、又はフェニルフェノールなど、前記一般式(1-a)におけるR41として挙げた基で置換された置換フェノール類が挙げられる。これらのフェノール類は1種を単独で或いは2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。 On the other hand, phenols are aromatic compounds having one phenolic hydroxyl group per molecule. Specific examples thereof include phenol, cresol, ethylphenol, n-propylphenol, isobutylphenol, t-butylphenol, octylphenol. Various o-, m-, and p-isomers of alkylphenols typified by xylenol, methylbutylphenol, di-t-butylphenol, etc., or cycloalkylphenols typified by cyclopentylphenol, cyclohexylphenol, cyclohexylresole, etc., or And substituted phenols substituted with the groups listed as R 41 in the general formula (1-a), such as phenylphenol. These phenols can be used individually by 1 type or in combination of 2 or more types.
 上記縮合反応を行う場合、フェノール類の使用量は一般式(1-a-2)で表される化合物1モルに対して好ましくは0.5~20モル、特に好ましくは2~15モルである。 When the condensation reaction is carried out, the amount of phenol used is preferably 0.5 to 20 mol, particularly preferably 2 to 15 mol, per 1 mol of the compound represented by the general formula (1-a-2). .
 上記縮合反応においては酸触媒を用いるのが好ましく、酸触媒としては種々のものが使用できるが、塩酸、硫酸、p-トルエンスルホン酸、シュウ酸、三弗化ホウ素、無水塩化アルミニウム、塩化亜鉛などが好ましく、特にp-トルエンスルホン酸、硫酸、塩酸が好ましい。これら酸触媒の使用量は特に限定されるものではないが、一般式(1-a-2)で表される化合物に対して0.1~30重量%用いるのが好ましい。 In the above condensation reaction, an acid catalyst is preferably used, and various acid catalysts can be used, such as hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid, oxalic acid, boron trifluoride, anhydrous aluminum chloride, zinc chloride, etc. In particular, p-toluenesulfonic acid, sulfuric acid, and hydrochloric acid are preferable. The amount of the acid catalyst used is not particularly limited, but it is preferably 0.1 to 30% by weight based on the compound represented by the general formula (1-a-2).
 上記縮合反応は無溶剤下で、或いは有機溶剤の存在下で行うことができる。有機溶剤を使用する場合の具体例としてはトルエン、キシレン、メチルイソブチルケトンなどが挙げられる。有機溶剤の使用量は仕込んだ原料の総重量に対して50~300重量%が好ましく、特に100~250重量%が好ましい。反応温度は40~180℃の範囲が好ましく、反応時間は1~8時間が好ましい。 The above condensation reaction can be carried out in the absence of a solvent or in the presence of an organic solvent. Specific examples in the case of using an organic solvent include toluene, xylene, methyl isobutyl ketone and the like. The amount of the organic solvent used is preferably 50 to 300% by weight, particularly preferably 100 to 250% by weight, based on the total weight of the charged raw materials. The reaction temperature is preferably in the range of 40 to 180 ° C., and the reaction time is preferably 1 to 8 hours.
 反応終了後、中和処理或は水洗処理を行って生成物のpH値を3~7好ましくは5~7に調節する。水洗処理を行う場合、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウムなどのアルカリ金属水酸化物、水酸化カルシウム、水酸化マグネシウムなどのアルカリ土類金属水酸化物、アンモニア、リン酸二水素ナトリウム、更にはジエチレントリアミン、トリエチレンテトラミン、アニリン、フェニレンジアミンなどの有機アミンなどの様々な塩基性物質等を中和剤として用いて処理すればよい。また、水洗処理は常法に従って行えばよい。例えば反応混合物中に上記中和剤を溶解した水を加え、分液抽出操作を繰り返す方法を採用することができる。 After completion of the reaction, neutralization treatment or water washing treatment is performed to adjust the pH value of the product to 3-7, preferably 5-7. When performing the water washing treatment, alkali metal hydroxides such as sodium hydroxide and potassium hydroxide, alkaline earth metal hydroxides such as calcium hydroxide and magnesium hydroxide, ammonia, sodium dihydrogen phosphate, diethylenetriamine, What is necessary is just to process using various basic substances, such as organic amines, such as a triethylenetetramine, aniline, and phenylenediamine, as a neutralizing agent. Moreover, what is necessary is just to perform a washing process according to a conventional method. For example, a method in which water in which the neutralizing agent is dissolved is added to the reaction mixture and the liquid separation extraction operation is repeated can be employed.
 上記中和処理或いは水洗処理を行った後、減圧加熱下で未反応のジヒドロキシベンゼン類及び溶剤を留去して生成物の濃縮を行って、前記一般式(1-a-1)で表される化合物を得ることができる。 After the neutralization treatment or the water washing treatment, the unreacted dihydroxybenzenes and the solvent are distilled off under heating under reduced pressure to concentrate the product, which is represented by the general formula (1-a-1). Can be obtained.
 前記一般式(1-a-1)で表される化合物から、前記一般式(1-a)で表される本発明に係るエポキシ樹脂(a)を得る方法としては公知の方法が採用できる。例えば、一般式(1-a-1)で表される化合物と過剰のエピクロルヒドリン、エピブロムヒドリン等のエピハロヒドリンの溶解混合物に水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム等のアルカリ金属水酸化物を予め添加し、又は添加しながら20~120℃の温度で1~10時間反応させることにより、一般式(1-a)で表されるエポキシ樹脂(a)を得ることができる。 As a method for obtaining the epoxy resin (a) according to the present invention represented by the general formula (1-a) from the compound represented by the general formula (1-a-1), a known method can be employed. For example, an alkali metal hydroxide such as sodium hydroxide or potassium hydroxide is previously added to a dissolved mixture of the compound represented by the general formula (1-a-1) and an excess of epihalohydrin such as epichlorohydrin or epibromohydrin. Alternatively, the epoxy resin (a) represented by the general formula (1-a) can be obtained by reacting at a temperature of 20 to 120 ° C. for 1 to 10 hours while being added.
 このエポキシ樹脂(a)を得る反応において、アルカリ金属水酸化物はその水溶液を使用してもよく、その場合に該アルカリ金属水酸化物の水溶液を連続的に反応系内に添加すると共に減圧下、又は常圧下連続的に水及びエピハロヒドリンを留出させ、更に分液し、水は除去しエピハロヒドリンは反応系内に連続的に戻す方法であってもよい。 In the reaction for obtaining the epoxy resin (a), an aqueous solution of the alkali metal hydroxide may be used. In that case, the aqueous solution of the alkali metal hydroxide is continuously added to the reaction system and the pressure is reduced. Alternatively, water and epihalohydrin may be continuously distilled off under normal pressure, followed by liquid separation, water may be removed, and epihalohydrin may be continuously returned to the reaction system.
 また、前記一般式(1-a-1)で表される化合物とエピハロヒドリンの溶解混合物にテトラメチルアンモニウムクロライド、テトラメチルアンモニウムブロマイド、トリメチルベンジルアンモニウムクロライド等の4級アンモニウム塩を触媒として添加し、50~150℃で1~5時間反応させて得られる、一般式(1-a-1)で表される化合物のハロヒドリンエーテル化物に、アルカリ金属水酸化物の固体又は水溶液を加え、再び20~120℃の温度で1~10時間反応させて脱ハロゲン化水素(閉環)させる方法でもよい。 Further, a quaternary ammonium salt such as tetramethylammonium chloride, tetramethylammonium bromide, trimethylbenzylammonium chloride or the like is added to a dissolved mixture of the compound represented by the general formula (1-a-1) and epihalohydrin as a catalyst, To the halohydrin etherified product of the compound represented by the general formula (1-a-1) obtained by reacting at ˜150 ° C. for 1 to 5 hours, a solid or aqueous solution of an alkali metal hydroxide is added, and again 20 Alternatively, the reaction may be carried out at a temperature of ˜120 ° C. for 1 to 10 hours to dehydrohalogenate (ring closure).
 このような反応において使用されるエピハロヒドリンの量は、一般式(1-a-1)で表される化合物の水酸基1当量に対し通常1~20モル、好ましくは2~10モルである。また、アルカリ金属水酸化物の使用量は一般式(1-a-1)で表される化合物の水酸基1当量に対し通常0.8~15モル、好ましくは0.9~11モルである。 The amount of epihalohydrin used in such a reaction is usually 1 to 20 mol, preferably 2 to 10 mol, relative to 1 equivalent of the hydroxyl group of the compound represented by the general formula (1-a-1). The amount of the alkali metal hydroxide used is usually 0.8 to 15 mol, preferably 0.9 to 11 mol, per 1 equivalent of the hydroxyl group of the compound represented by the general formula (1-a-1).
 更に、反応を円滑に進行させるためにメタノール、エタノールなどのアルコール類の他、ジメチルスルホン、ジメチルスルホキシド等の非プロトン性極性溶媒などを添加して反応を行ってもよい。アルコール類を使用する場合、その使用量はエピハロヒドリンの量に対し2~20重量%、好ましくは4~15重量%である。また、非プロトン性極性溶媒を用いる場合、その使用量はエピハロヒドリンの量に対し5~100重量%、好ましくは10~90重量%である。 Furthermore, in order to make the reaction proceed smoothly, the reaction may be carried out by adding an aprotic polar solvent such as dimethylsulfone or dimethylsulfoxide in addition to alcohols such as methanol and ethanol. When alcohols are used, the amount used is 2 to 20% by weight, preferably 4 to 15% by weight, based on the amount of epihalohydrin. When an aprotic polar solvent is used, the amount used is 5 to 100% by weight, preferably 10 to 90% by weight, based on the amount of epihalohydrin.
 このようなエポキシ化反応の反応生成物を水洗した後、又は水洗することなく、加熱減圧下、例えば110~250℃、圧力1.3kPa(10mmHg)以下の条件下で、エピハロヒドリンや他の添加溶媒などを除去して、目的とするエポキシ樹脂(a)を得る。 Epihalohydrin and other added solvents can be obtained after washing the reaction product of such an epoxidation reaction with or without washing with water under reduced pressure by heating, for example, at 110 to 250 ° C. and a pressure of 1.3 kPa (10 mmHg) or less. Are removed to obtain the desired epoxy resin (a).
 また、更に加水分解性ハロゲンの少ないエポキシ樹脂とするために、得られたエポキシ樹脂を再びトルエン、メチルイソブチルケトンなどの溶剤に溶解し、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウムなどのアルカリ金属水酸化物の水溶液を加えて反応を行い、閉環を確実なものにすることもできる。この場合、アルカリ金属水酸化物の使用量はエポキシ化に使用した一般式(1-a-1)で表される化合物の水酸基1当量に対して好ましくは0.01~0.3モル、特に好ましくは0.05~0.2モルである。反応温度は50~120℃、反応時間は通常0.5~2時間である。 In addition, in order to obtain an epoxy resin with less hydrolyzable halogen, the obtained epoxy resin is dissolved again in a solvent such as toluene or methyl isobutyl ketone, and an alkali metal hydroxide such as sodium hydroxide or potassium hydroxide is dissolved. The reaction can be carried out by adding an aqueous solution to ensure ring closure. In this case, the amount of the alkali metal hydroxide used is preferably 0.01 to 0.3 mol, particularly with respect to 1 equivalent of the hydroxyl group of the compound represented by the general formula (1-a-1) used for epoxidation. The amount is preferably 0.05 to 0.2 mol. The reaction temperature is 50 to 120 ° C., and the reaction time is usually 0.5 to 2 hours.
 反応終了後、生成した塩を濾過、水洗などにより除去し、更に、加熱減圧下、トルエン、メチルイソブチルケトンなどの溶剤を留去することにより、前記一般式(1-a)で表されるエポキシ樹脂(a)を得ることができる。 After completion of the reaction, the produced salt is removed by filtration, washing with water, and the like, and the solvent represented by the general formula (1-a) is removed by distilling off a solvent such as toluene and methyl isobutyl ketone under heating and reduced pressure. Resin (a) can be obtained.
(2) 不飽和基含有カルボン酸(b)
 不飽和基含有カルボン酸(b)としては、エチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する不飽和カルボン酸が挙げられ、具体例としては、(メタ)アクリル酸、クロトン酸、o-、m-、p-ビニル安息香酸、(メタ)アクリル酸のα位ハロアルキル、アルコキシル、ハロゲン、ニトロ、シアノ置換体などのモノカルボン酸、2-(メタ)アクリロイロキシエチルコハク酸、2-アクリロイロキシエチルアジピン酸、2-(メタ)アクリロイロキシエチルフタル酸、2-(メタ)アクリロイロキシエチルヘキサヒドロフタル酸、2-(メタ)アクリロイロキシエチルマレイン酸、2-(メタ)アクリロイロキシプロピルコハク酸、2-(メタ)アクリロイロキシプロピルアジピン酸、2-(メタ)アクリロイロキシプロピルテトラヒドロフタル酸、2-(メタ)アクリロイロキシプロピルフタル酸、2-(メタ)アクリロイロキシプロピルマレイン酸、2-(メタ)アクリロイロキシブチルコハク酸、2-(メタ)アクリロイロキシブチルアジピン酸、2-(メタ)アクリロイロキシブチルヒドロフタル酸、2-(メタ)アクリロイロキシブチルフタル酸、2-(メタ)アクリロイロキシブチルマレイン酸、(メタ)アクリル酸にε-カプロラクトン、β-プロピオラクトン、γ-ブチロラクトン、δ-バレロラクトン等のラクトン類を付加させたものである単量体、或いはヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールトリ(メタ)アクリレートに(無水)コハク酸、(無水)フタル酸、(無水)マレイン酸などの酸(無水物)を付加させた単量体、(メタ)アクリル酸ダイマーなどが挙げられる。
(2) Unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b)
Examples of the unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b) include unsaturated carboxylic acids having an ethylenically unsaturated double bond, and specific examples include (meth) acrylic acid, crotonic acid, o-, m-, p -Monocarboxylic acids such as vinyl benzoic acid, α-position haloalkyl, alkoxyl, halogen, nitro, and cyano substituents of (meth) acrylic acid, 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl succinic acid, 2-acryloyloxyethyl adipic acid , 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl phthalate, 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl hexahydrophthalic acid, 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl maleate, 2- (meth) acryloyloxy propyl acid 2- (meth) acryloyloxypropyl adipic acid, 2- (meth) acryloyloxypropyl tetrahydrophthalic acid, 2- (Meth) acryloyloxypropylphthalic acid, 2- (meth) acryloyloxypropylmaleic acid, 2- (meth) acryloyloxybutylsuccinic acid, 2- (meth) acryloyloxybutyladipic acid, 2- (meth) Acryloyloxybutylhydrophthalic acid, 2- (meth) acryloyloxybutylphthalic acid, 2- (meth) acryloyloxybutylmaleic acid, (meth) acrylic acid with ε-caprolactone, β-propiolactone, γ- Monomers to which lactones such as butyrolactone and δ-valerolactone are added, or hydroxyalkyl (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, (anhydrous) succinic acid, (anhydrous) phthalic acid, ( Monomer) to which acid (anhydride) such as maleic acid is added, (meth) acrylic acid dye Chromatography and the like.
 これらの内、感度の点から、特に好ましいものは(メタ)アクリル酸である。これらは1種を単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を併用してもよい。 Of these, (meth) acrylic acid is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of sensitivity. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
(3) エポキシ樹脂(a)と不飽和基含有カルボン酸(b)との反応
 エポキシ樹脂(a)中のエポキシ基と不飽和基含有カルボン酸(b)とを反応させる方法としては公知の手法を用いることができる。例えば、エポキシ樹脂(a)と不飽和基含有カルボン酸(b)とを、トリエチルアミン、ベンジルメチルアミン等の3級アミン、ドデシルトリメチルアンモニウムクロライド、テトラメチルアンモニウムクロライド、テトラエチルアンモニウムクロライド、ベンジルトリエチルアンモニウムクロライド等の4級アンモニウム塩、ピリジン、トリフェニルホスフィン等を触媒として、有機溶剤中、反応温度50~150℃で数~数十時間反応させることにより、エポキシ樹脂にカルボン酸を付加することができる。
(3) Reaction of epoxy resin (a) with unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b) Known method for reacting epoxy group in epoxy resin (a) with unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b) Can be used. For example, an epoxy resin (a) and an unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b) are converted into a tertiary amine such as triethylamine or benzylmethylamine, dodecyltrimethylammonium chloride, tetramethylammonium chloride, tetraethylammonium chloride, benzyltriethylammonium chloride, etc. Carboxylic acid can be added to the epoxy resin by reacting in an organic solvent at a reaction temperature of 50 to 150 ° C. for several to several tens of hours using a quaternary ammonium salt, pyridine or triphenylphosphine as a catalyst.
 該触媒の使用量は、反応原料混合物(エポキシ樹脂(a)と不飽和基含有カルボン酸(b)との合計)に対して好ましくは0.01~10重量%、特に好ましくは0.3~5重量%である。 The amount of the catalyst used is preferably from 0.01 to 10% by weight, particularly preferably from 0.3 to 10% by weight based on the reaction raw material mixture (total of epoxy resin (a) and unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b)). 5% by weight.
 また、反応中の重合を防止するために、重合防止剤(例えばメトキノン、ハイドロキノン、メチルハイドロキノン、p-メトキシフェノール、ピロガロール、tert-ブチルカテコール、フェノチアジン等)を使用することが好ましく、その使用量は、反応原料混合物に対して好ましくは0.01~10重量%、特に好ましくは0.1~5重量%である。 In order to prevent polymerization during the reaction, it is preferable to use a polymerization inhibitor (for example, methoquinone, hydroquinone, methylhydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, pyrogallol, tert-butylcatechol, phenothiazine, etc.). The amount is preferably 0.01 to 10% by weight, particularly preferably 0.1 to 5% by weight, based on the reaction raw material mixture.
 エポキシ樹脂(a)のエポキシ基に不飽和基含有カルボン酸(b)を付加させる割合は、通常90~100モル%である。エポキシ基の残存は保存安定性に悪影響を与えるため、不飽和基含有カルボン酸(b)はエポキシ樹脂(a)のエポキシ基1当量に対して、通常0.8~1.5当量、特に0.9~1.1当量の割合で反応を行うことが好ましい。 The proportion of the unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b) added to the epoxy group of the epoxy resin (a) is usually 90 to 100 mol%. Residual epoxy groups adversely affect storage stability. Therefore, the unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b) is usually 0.8 to 1.5 equivalents, particularly 0, to 1 equivalent of the epoxy group of the epoxy resin (a). It is preferable to carry out the reaction at a ratio of 9 to 1.1 equivalents.
(4) 多塩基酸及びその無水物(c)
 エポキシ樹脂(a)と不飽和基含有カルボン酸(b)との反応物の水酸基に付加させる多塩基酸及びその無水物(c)としては、公知のものが使用でき、マレイン酸、コハク酸、イタコン酸、フタル酸、テトラヒドロフタル酸、ヘキサヒドロフタル酸、メチルエンドメチレンテトラヒドロフタル酸、クロレンド酸、メチルテトラヒドロフタル酸、5-ノルボルネン-2,3-ジカルボン酸、メチル-5-ノルボルネン-2,3-ジカルボン酸等の二塩基性カルボン酸又はその無水物;トリメリット酸、ピロメリット酸、ベンゾフェノンテトラカルボン酸、ビフェニルテトラカルボン酸等の多塩基性カルボン酸又はその無水物等が挙げられる。中でも好ましくは、テトラヒドロ無水フタル酸又は無水コハク酸が挙げられる。これらは1種を単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を併用してもよい。
(4) Polybasic acid and its anhydride (c)
As the polybasic acid to be added to the hydroxyl group of the reaction product of the epoxy resin (a) and the unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b) and its anhydride (c), known ones can be used, maleic acid, succinic acid, Itaconic acid, phthalic acid, tetrahydrophthalic acid, hexahydrophthalic acid, methylendomethylenetetrahydrophthalic acid, chlorendic acid, methyltetrahydrophthalic acid, 5-norbornene-2,3-dicarboxylic acid, methyl-5-norbornene-2,3 A dibasic carboxylic acid such as dicarboxylic acid or an anhydride thereof; a polybasic carboxylic acid such as trimellitic acid, pyromellitic acid, benzophenone tetracarboxylic acid, biphenyltetracarboxylic acid, or an anhydride thereof. Among these, tetrahydrophthalic anhydride or succinic anhydride is preferable. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 多塩基酸及びその無水物(c)のうち少なくとも一方の付加率は、エポキシ樹脂(a)に不飽和基含有カルボン酸(b)を付加させたときに生成される水酸基の、通常10~100モル%、好ましくは20~100モル%、より好ましくは30~100モル%である。この付加率が多すぎると、現像時の残膜率が低下することがあり、少なすぎると溶解性が不足したり、基板への密着性が不足することがある。尚、多塩基酸とその無水物を併用する場合には、上記付加率は、多塩基酸とその無水物の合計の付加率を表す。 The addition rate of at least one of the polybasic acid and its anhydride (c) is usually 10 to 100 of the hydroxyl group produced when the unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b) is added to the epoxy resin (a). The mol%, preferably 20 to 100 mol%, more preferably 30 to 100 mol%. If the addition rate is too high, the remaining film rate during development may decrease, and if it is too low, the solubility may be insufficient or the adhesion to the substrate may be insufficient. In addition, when using a polybasic acid and its anhydride together, the said addition rate represents the total addition rate of a polybasic acid and its anhydride.
 前記エポキシ樹脂(a)に、不飽和基含有カルボン酸(b)を付加させた後、多塩基酸及びその無水物(c)のうち少なくとも一方を付加させる方法としては、公知の方法を用いることができる。 As a method of adding at least one of the polybasic acid and its anhydride (c) after adding the unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b) to the epoxy resin (a), a known method is used. Can do.
 また、本発明においては、このようにして多塩基酸及びその無水物(c)のうち少なくとも一方を付加後、生成したカルボキシル基の一部にエポキシ基含有化合物(d)を付加させてもよい。この場合、エポキシ基含有化合物(d)として、光感度を向上させるために、グリシジル(メタ)アクリレート、3,4-エポキシシクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレートや、重合性不飽和基を有するグリシジルエーテル化合物などの、エポキシ基含有不飽和化合物を付加させたり、また、現像性を向上させるために、重合性不飽和基を有さないグリシジルエーテル化合物を付加させることもでき、この両者を併用してもよい。重合性不飽和基を有さないグリシジルエーテル化合物の具体例としてはフェニル基やアルキル基を有するグリシジルエーテル化合物(ナガセ化成工業(株)製、商品名:デナコールEX-111、デナコールEX-121、デナコールEX-141、デナコールEX-145、デナコールEX-146、デナコールEX-171、デナコールEX-192)等がある。 In the present invention, after adding at least one of the polybasic acid and the anhydride (c) in this way, the epoxy group-containing compound (d) may be added to a part of the generated carboxyl group. . In this case, as the epoxy group-containing compound (d), in order to improve photosensitivity, glycidyl (meth) acrylate, 3,4-epoxycyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, glycidyl ether compound having a polymerizable unsaturated group, etc. In order to add an epoxy group-containing unsaturated compound or to improve developability, a glycidyl ether compound having no polymerizable unsaturated group can be added, or both of them may be used in combination. Specific examples of the glycidyl ether compound having no polymerizable unsaturated group include a glycidyl ether compound having a phenyl group or an alkyl group (manufactured by Nagase Chemical Industries, Ltd., trade names: Denacol EX-111, Denacol EX-121, Denacol). EX-141, Denacol EX-145, Denacol EX-146, Denacol EX-171, Denacol EX-192) and the like.
 本発明に係るアルカリ可溶性樹脂(A)は、前述のエポキシ樹脂(a)と不飽和基含有カルボン酸(b)との反応物を、更に多塩基酸及びその無水物(c)のうち少なくとも一方と反応させて得られる樹脂の、カルボキシル基の一部にこのようなエポキシ基含有化合物(d)を付加させて得られる樹脂であってもよい。 The alkali-soluble resin (A) according to the present invention is a reaction product of the epoxy resin (a) and the unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b), and at least one of a polybasic acid and its anhydride (c). It may be a resin obtained by adding such an epoxy group-containing compound (d) to a part of the carboxyl group of a resin obtained by reacting with.
(5) アルカリ可溶性樹脂(A)の物性等
 本発明で用いるアルカリ可溶性樹脂(A)の、ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィー(GPC)で測定したポリスチレン換算の重量平均分子量(Mw)は通常1500以上、好ましくは2000以上であり、通常50000以下、好ましくは30000以下、より好ましくは10000以下である。このアルカリ可溶性樹脂(A)の重量平均分子量が小さすぎると、感度が劣り、大きすぎると現像液に対する溶解性が不足するため好ましくない。
(5) Physical Properties of Alkali-Soluble Resin (A), etc. The weight-average molecular weight (Mw) in terms of polystyrene measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC) of the alkali-soluble resin (A) used in the present invention is usually 1500 or more, preferably Is 2000 or more, usually 50000 or less, preferably 30000 or less, more preferably 10,000 or less. If the weight average molecular weight of the alkali-soluble resin (A) is too small, the sensitivity is inferior, and if it is too large, the solubility in the developer is insufficient, which is not preferable.
 また、本発明で用いるアルカリ可溶性樹脂(A)の酸価(mgKOH/g)は、通常10以上、好ましくは50以上であり、通常200以下、好ましくは150以下である。アルカリ可溶性樹脂(A)の酸価が低すぎると十分な溶解性が得られない場合があり、酸価が高すぎると硬化性が不足し、塗布膜の表面性が悪化する傾向がある。 The acid value (mgKOH / g) of the alkali-soluble resin (A) used in the present invention is usually 10 or more, preferably 50 or more, and usually 200 or less, preferably 150 or less. If the acid value of the alkali-soluble resin (A) is too low, sufficient solubility may not be obtained. If the acid value is too high, curability is insufficient and the surface properties of the coating film tend to deteriorate.
 なお、前記一般式(1-a-2)で表される化合物とフェノール系化合物の縮合反応、該縮合反応により得られる前記一般式(1-a-1)で表される化合物とエピハロヒドリンとの反応、不飽和基含有カルボン酸(b)並びに多塩基酸及びその無水物(c)のうち少なくとも一方との付加反応など、アルカリ可溶性樹脂(A)の合成反応は公知の方法にて行うことができ、例えば日本国特開2005-55814号公報に記載の方法にて行うことができる。 The condensation reaction of the compound represented by the general formula (1-a-2) and the phenol compound, and the compound represented by the general formula (1-a-1) obtained by the condensation reaction and the epihalohydrin The synthesis reaction of the alkali-soluble resin (A) such as reaction, addition reaction with at least one of the unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b) and the polybasic acid and its anhydride (c) can be performed by a known method. For example, it can be performed by the method described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-55814.
<アルカリ可溶性樹脂(A)>
 本発明におけるバインダー樹脂として、特に好ましいものの他の例として、下記一般式(1-a)で示されるエポキシ化合物(a)と、不飽和基含有カルボン酸(b)との反応物を、多塩基酸及びその無水物(c)のうち少なくとも一方と反応させて得られるアルカリ可溶性樹脂(A)が挙げられる。
<Alkali-soluble resin (A ' )>
As the binder resin in the present invention, particularly preferred other examples of things, 'epoxy compound represented by (a following general formula (1-a)' and), the reaction product of an unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b ') And an alkali-soluble resin (A ) obtained by reacting with at least one of a polybasic acid and its anhydride (c ).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
〔上記一般式(1-a)において、p及びqはそれぞれ独立に0~4の整数を表し、R31及びR32はそれぞれ独立してアルキル基又はハロゲン原子を表す。R33及びR34はそれぞれ独立してアルキレン基を表す。x及びyはそれぞれ独立して0以上の整数を表す。〕 [In the general formula (1-a ), p and q each independently represent an integer of 0 to 4, and R 31 and R 32 each independently represent an alkyl group or a halogen atom. R 33 and R 34 each independently represents an alkylene group. x and y each independently represents an integer of 0 or more. ]
(1) 一般式(1-a)で表されるエポキシ化合物(a
 まず、前記一般式(1-a)で示されるエポキシ化合物(a)(以下、「(a)成分」と称することがある)について説明する。
(1) In formula (1-a ') an epoxy compound represented by (a')
First, the epoxy compound (a ) represented by the general formula (1-a ) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “(a ) component”) will be described.
 前記一般式(1-a)において、R31及びR32のアルキル基としては、炭素数1~10のアルキル基が好ましく、ハロゲン原子としてはCl、Br、F等が挙げられる。R31及びR32としては、それぞれ独立に炭素数1~5のアルキル基が特に好ましい。 In the general formula (1-a ), the alkyl group of R 31 and R 32 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and the halogen atom includes Cl, Br, F and the like. R 31 and R 32 are particularly preferably each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
 R31及びR32のアルキル基、ハロゲン原子の作用機構の詳細は明らかではないが、分子の3次元構造に影響を与え、現像液に対しての溶解しやすさを制御しているものと推測される。
 従って上記観点からは、前記一般式(1-a)におけるp及びqはそれぞれ独立して0~4の整数を表すが、好ましくは1又は2である。
Although details of the mechanism of action of the alkyl groups and halogen atoms of R 31 and R 32 are not clear, it is assumed that they affect the three-dimensional structure of the molecule and control the solubility in the developer. Is done.
Therefore, from the above viewpoint, p and q in the general formula (1-a ) each independently represents an integer of 0 to 4, preferably 1 or 2.
 R31及びR32のベンゼン環への結合位置は、特に制限は無いが、 The bonding position of R 31 and R 32 to the benzene ring is not particularly limited,
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
又は Or
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
に対してo-位が好ましい。 The o-position is preferred.
 なお、R31及びR32は同じ基であっても異なる基であってもよいが、製造上のコストの点から、同じ基であることが好ましい。 R 31 and R 32 may be the same group or different groups, but are preferably the same group from the viewpoint of production cost.
 R33及びR34のアルキレン基としては、炭素数1~10のアルキレン基が挙げられ、特にそれぞれ独立してエチレン基又はプロピレン基である場合が好ましい。 Examples of the alkylene group for R 33 and R 34 include an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and it is particularly preferable that they are each independently an ethylene group or a propylene group.
 x及びyは、それぞれ独立して0以上の整数を表すが、通常0~6であり、好ましくは0~3である。一般にx及びyは大きいほど溶解性が高いが、大きすぎる場合には、感度が低下する可能性がある。 X and y each independently represents an integer of 0 or more, but is usually 0 to 6, preferably 0 to 3. In general, the larger x and y, the higher the solubility, but if it is too large, the sensitivity may decrease.
 なお、R33及びR34は同じ基であっても異なる基であってもよいが、製造上のコストの点から、同じ基であることが好ましい。 R 33 and R 34 may be the same group or different groups, but are preferably the same group from the viewpoint of production cost.
 これら(a)成分の分子量は、ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィー(GPC)測定による標準ポリスチレン換算の重量平均分子量(Mw)として、通常200~200,000、好ましくは300~100,000の範囲である。分子量を下限値以上とすることにより皮膜形成性が良好となり、また上限値以下とすることにより、後述する不飽和基含有カルボン酸(b)の付加反応時のゲル化が抑制される。 The molecular weight of these components (a ) is usually in the range of 200 to 200,000, preferably 300 to 100,000, as the weight average molecular weight (Mw) in terms of standard polystyrene as measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC). . When the molecular weight is at least the lower limit value, the film-forming property is improved, and when the molecular weight is at most the upper limit value, gelation during the addition reaction of the unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b ) described later is suppressed.
(2) 不飽和基含有カルボン酸(b
 不飽和基含有カルボン酸(b)(以下、「(b)成分」と称することがある)としては、<アルカリ可溶性樹脂(A’’),アルカリ可溶性樹脂(A1’’)>における不飽和基含有カルボン酸(b’’)として挙げたものと同様の化合物が使用できる。これらの内、α,β-不飽和カルボン酸の中では(メタ)アクリル酸が好ましく、特にアクリル酸が反応性に富むため好ましい。またエステル部分にカルボキシル基を有するα,β-不飽和カルボン酸エステルの中では、2-(メタ)アクリロイロキシエチルフタル酸、及び2-(メタ)アクリロイロキシエチルマレイン酸が好ましい。
(2) Unsaturated carboxylic acid (b ' )
Examples of the unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b ) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “(b ) component”) include those in <Alkali-soluble resin (A ″), Alkali-soluble resin (A1 ″)>. The same compounds as those mentioned as the saturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b ″) can be used. Of these, (meth) acrylic acid is preferred among α, β-unsaturated carboxylic acids, and acrylic acid is particularly preferred because of its high reactivity. Of the α, β-unsaturated carboxylic acid esters having a carboxyl group in the ester moiety, 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl phthalic acid and 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl maleic acid are preferred.
 (b)成分の使用量は、(a)成分のエポキシ基1当量に対し0.5~1.2当量の範囲が好ましく、さらに好ましくは0.7~1.1当量の範囲である。
 (b)成分の使用量を下限値以上とすることにより、十分な量の不飽和基を導入することができ、また続く多塩基酸及びその無水物(c)のうち少なくとも一方との反応も十分となる。また、多量のエポキシ基が残存しない点も好ましい。(b)成分の使用量を上限値以下とすることにより、未反応物として残存しない点で好ましい。上記範囲を満たすことにより、高い光硬化特性を得ることができる。
The amount of component (b ) used is preferably in the range of 0.5 to 1.2 equivalents, more preferably in the range of 0.7 to 1.1 equivalents, relative to 1 equivalent of the epoxy group of component (a ). .
(B ' ) By making the usage-amount of a component more than a lower limit, a sufficient quantity of unsaturated groups can be introduce | transduced, and also with at least one of the following polybasic acid and its anhydride (c ' ) The reaction is also sufficient. Moreover, the point that a large amount of epoxy groups does not remain is also preferable. By making the usage-amount of (b ' ) component or less into an upper limit, it is preferable at the point which does not remain as an unreacted substance. By satisfying the above range, high photocuring characteristics can be obtained.
(3) 多塩基酸及びその無水物(c
 多塩基酸及びその無水物(c)としても、<アルカリ可溶性樹脂(A’’),アルカリ可溶性樹脂(A1’’)>における多塩基酸及びその無水物(c’’)として挙げたものと同様の化合物が挙げられ、中でもテトラヒドロフタル酸、ビフェニルテトラカルボン酸、及びこれらの無水物が好ましい。
(3) Polybasic acid and its anhydride (c )
As the polybasic acid and its anhydride (c ), those listed as the polybasic acid and its anhydride (c ) in <Alkali-soluble resin (A ″), Alkali-soluble resin (A1 ″)> And the like, and tetrahydrophthalic acid, biphenyltetracarboxylic acid, and anhydrides thereof are preferable.
 多塩基酸及びその無水物(c’)のうち少なくとも一方の付加率は、最終的に得られるアルカリ可溶性樹脂(A’)の酸価が10~150mg-KOH/gとなるようにすることが好ましく、20~140mg-KOH/gとなるようにすることがより好ましい。酸価を上記下限値以上とすることにより、アルカリ現像性が良好となり、また上限値以下とすることにより、十分な光硬化性が得られる。 The addition rate of at least one of the polybasic acid and its anhydride (c ′) should be such that the final alkali-soluble resin (A ′) has an acid value of 10 to 150 mg-KOH / g. More preferably, it is 20 to 140 mg-KOH / g. By setting the acid value to be equal to or higher than the above lower limit, alkali developability is improved, and by setting the acid value to be equal to or lower than the upper limit, sufficient photocurability is obtained.
 なお、この(c)成分の付加反応時に、トリメチロールプロパン、ペンタエリスリトール、ジペンタエリスリトールなどの多官能アルコール(d)を添加し、多分岐構造を導入したものとしてもよい。多価アルコール(d)としては、例えば<アルカリ可溶性樹脂(A’’),アルカリ可溶性樹脂(A1’’)>における多価アルコール(d’’)として前述したものと同様の化合物が挙げられ、好ましい化合物及び好ましい使用量も同様である。 In addition, it is good also as what introduce | transduced polyfunctional alcohol (d ' ), such as a trimethylol propane, a pentaerythritol, a dipentaerythritol, and introduce | transduced the multibranched structure at the time of this addition reaction of (c ' ) component. Examples of the polyhydric alcohol (d ′) include compounds similar to those described above as the polyhydric alcohol (d ) in <Alkali-soluble resin (A ″), Alkali-soluble resin (A1 ″)>. The same applies to the preferred compounds and preferred amounts.
 エポキシ化合物(a)に対する不飽和基含有カルボン酸(b)並びに多塩基酸及びその無水物(c)のうち少なくとも一方の付加反応など、アルカリ可溶性樹脂(A)の合成反応はいずれも公知の方法にて行うことができ、例えば日本国特開2005-126685号公報、日本国特開2005-325331号公報、及び日本国特開2006-241224号公報などに記載の方法を参照して行うことができる。 What is the synthesis reaction of the alkali-soluble resin (A ), such as an addition reaction of at least one of the unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b ) and the polybasic acid and its anhydride (c ) to the epoxy compound (a )? Can also be performed by known methods. For example, see the methods described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-126585, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-325331, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-241224, and the like. Can be done.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂(A)のゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィー(GPC)測定による標準ポリスチレン換算の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、通常1,000以上、好ましくは1,500以上であり、通常30,000以下、好ましくは20,000以下、さらに好ましくは10,000以下、特に好ましくは8,000以下である。重量平均分子量を上記上限値以下とすることにより現像性が良好となり、また下限値以上とすることにより耐アルカリ性が良好になる。 The weight average molecular weight in terms of standard polystyrene by gel permeation chromatography (GPC) of the alkali-soluble resin (A ') (Mw) is usually 1,000 or more, preferably 1,500 or more, usually 30,000 or less , Preferably 20,000 or less, more preferably 10,000 or less, particularly preferably 8,000 or less. When the weight average molecular weight is not more than the above upper limit value, the developability is good, and when it is not less than the lower limit value, the alkali resistance is good.
<アルカリ可溶性樹脂(A’’’)>
 本発明におけるバインダー樹脂として、特に好ましいものの他の例として、下記一般式(1-a’’’)で示されるエポキシ樹脂(a’’’)と不飽和基含有カルボン酸(b’’’)との反応物を、多塩基酸及びその無水物(c’’’)のうち少なくとも一方と反応させて得られるアルカリ可溶性樹脂(A’’’)が挙げられる。
<Alkali-soluble resin (A ''')>
Other examples of particularly preferable binder resins in the present invention include an epoxy resin (a ′ ″) represented by the following general formula (1-a ′ ″) and an unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b ′ ″). And an alkali-soluble resin (A ′ ″) obtained by reacting the reaction product with at least one of a polybasic acid and its anhydride (c ′ ″).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
〔上記一般式(1-a’’’)において、R51は水素原子又は炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表し、R52は炭素数5~16の2価の多環式炭化水素基を表し、R53及びR54は各々独立に、水素原子又はグリシジル基を表す。sは1又は2を表す。t及びzは各繰り返し単位の割合を示し、t≧z≧0.5tである。〕 [In the above general formula (1-a ′ ″), R 51 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and R 52 represents a divalent polycyclic hydrocarbon group having 5 to 16 carbon atoms. R 53 and R 54 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a glycidyl group. s represents 1 or 2. t and z represent the proportion of each repeating unit, and t ≧ z ≧ 0.5t. ]
 一般式(1-a’’’)において、R51は水素原子又は炭素数1~4のアルキル基を表すが、中でも光硬化性の観点から、好ましくは水素原子又はメチル基である。またsは1又は2を表すが、好ましくは1である。 In the general formula (1-a ′ ″), R 51 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. Among them, a hydrogen atom or a methyl group is preferable from the viewpoint of photocurability. S represents 1 or 2, and is preferably 1.
 R52は、炭素数5~16の2価の多環式炭化水素基を表す。このような基は、同じ骨格で炭素-炭素二重結合を少なくとも2個有する不飽和多環式炭化水素環化合物(以下、単に「不飽和多環式炭化水素化合物」と称することがある)を原料とし、後述する反応を行うことにより形成することができる。 R 52 represents a divalent polycyclic hydrocarbon group having 5 to 16 carbon atoms. Such a group refers to an unsaturated polycyclic hydrocarbon ring compound having the same skeleton and at least two carbon-carbon double bonds (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “unsaturated polycyclic hydrocarbon compound”). It can be formed by using the raw material and carrying out the reaction described below.
 原料となる不飽和多環式炭化水素環化合物としては、例えば以下の化合物が挙げられるが、これらに限定されるものではない。 Examples of the unsaturated polycyclic hydrocarbon ring compound as a raw material include the following compounds, but are not limited thereto.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
 これらの中でも、架橋炭素環がより好ましく、ジシクロペンタジエンが特に好ましい。 Among these, a bridged carbocycle is more preferable, and dicyclopentadiene is particularly preferable.
 前記一般式(1-a’’’)で示されるエポキシ樹脂(a’’’)は、上述した不飽和多環式炭化水素化合物と、下記一般式で表されるフェノール系化合物との重付加反応物の、水酸基をグリシジル化することにより得ることができる。 The epoxy resin (a ′ ″) represented by the general formula (1-a ′ ″) is a polyaddition of the unsaturated polycyclic hydrocarbon compound described above and a phenol compound represented by the following general formula. It can be obtained by glycidylation of the hydroxyl group of the reaction product.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
〔上記一般式中、R51及びsは前記一般式(1-a’’’)における定義と同義である。〕 [In the above general formula, R 51 and s are as defined in the general formula (1-a ′ ″). ]
 エポキシ樹脂(a’’’)としては、ジシクロペンタジエンと上記フェノール系化合物との重付加反応物をグリシジル化してなる、下記一般式(1-a’’’-1)で表される化合物が特に好ましい。 As the epoxy resin (a ′ ″), a compound represented by the following general formula (1-a ′ ″-1) obtained by glycidylation of a polyaddition reaction product of dicyclopentadiene and the above-described phenol compound is used. Particularly preferred.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
〔上記一般式(1-a’’’-1)において、R53、R54、t及びzは、前記一般式(1-a’’’)における定義と同義である。〕 [In the above general formula (1-a ′ ″-1), R 53 , R 54 , t and z have the same definitions as in the general formula (1-a ′ ″). ]
 前記一般式(1-a’’’)及び一般式(1-a’’’-1)におけるグリシジル基の導入割合は、グリシジル化前の前記フェノール樹脂中のフェノール性水酸基のうち50~100モル%、即ち前記一般式(1-a’’’)及び一般式(1-a’’’-1)におけるt及びzが、t≧z≧0.5tの関係を有する必要があり、好ましくは70~100モル%がグリシジル基で置換されるのが好ましい。 The introduction ratio of the glycidyl group in the general formula (1-a ′ ″) and the general formula (1-a ′ ″-1) is 50 to 100 mol of the phenolic hydroxyl group in the phenol resin before glycidylation. %, That is, t and z in the general formula (1-a ′ ″) and the general formula (1-a ′ ″-1) must have a relationship of t ≧ z ≧ 0.5t, preferably It is preferable that 70 to 100 mol% is substituted with a glycidyl group.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂(A’’’)は、前記一般式(1-a’’’)で示されるエポキシ樹脂(a’’’)と不飽和基含有カルボン酸(b’’’)との反応物を、多塩基酸及びその無水物(c’’’)のうち少なくとも一方と反応させて得られる樹脂である。 The alkali-soluble resin (A ′ ″) is a reaction product of the epoxy resin (a ′ ″) represented by the general formula (1-a ′ ″) and the unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b ′ ″). Is a resin obtained by reacting at least one of a polybasic acid and its anhydride (c ′ ″).
 不飽和基含有カルボン酸(b’’’)としては、<アルカリ可溶性樹脂(A’’),アルカリ可溶性樹脂(A1’’)>における不飽和基含有カルボン酸(b’’)として挙げたものと同様の化合物が使用でき、好ましい化合物とその理由も前記と同様である。 As unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b ′ ″), those listed as unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b ″) in <Alkali-soluble resin (A ″), alkali-soluble resin (A1 ″)> The same compounds can be used, and preferred compounds and the reasons thereof are the same as described above.
 エポキシ樹脂(a’’’)のエポキシ基に不飽和基含有カルボン酸(b’’’)を付加させる割合は、通常90~100モル%である。エポキシ基の残存は保存安定性に悪影響を与えるため、不飽和基含有カルボン酸(b’’’)はエポキシ樹脂(a’’’)のエポキシ基1当量に対して、通常0.8~1.5当量、特に0.9~1.1当量の割合で反応を行うことが好ましい。 The proportion of the unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b ′ ″) added to the epoxy group of the epoxy resin (a ″ ″) is usually 90 to 100 mol%. Since the remaining epoxy group adversely affects storage stability, the unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b ′ ″) is usually 0.8 to 1 with respect to 1 equivalent of the epoxy group of the epoxy resin (a ″ ′). It is preferable to carry out the reaction at a ratio of 0.5 equivalent, particularly 0.9 to 1.1 equivalent.
 多塩基酸及びその無水物(c’’’)としても、<アルカリ可溶性樹脂(A’’),アルカリ可溶性樹脂(A1’’)>における多塩基酸及びその無水物(c’’)として挙げたものと同様の化合物が挙げられ、好ましい化合物とその理由も前記と同様である。 Polybasic acid and its anhydride (c ′ ″) are also exemplified as polybasic acid and its anhydride (c ″) in <Alkali-soluble resin (A ″), Alkali-soluble resin (A1 ″)>. The same compounds as those described above can be used, and preferred compounds and the reasons thereof are the same as described above.
 多塩基酸及びその無水物(c’’’)のうち少なくとも一方の付加率は、エポキシ樹脂(a’’’)に不飽和基含有カルボン酸(b’’’)を付加させたときに生成される水酸基の、通常15~100モル%、好ましくは20~90モル%であり、最終的に得られるアルカリ可溶性樹脂(A’’’)の酸価が45~160mg-KOH/gとなることが好ましい。この付加率を上記上限値以下とすることにより、現像時の残膜率低下を防止することができ、また上記下限値以上とすることにより、良好な溶解性や基板への密着性を得ることができる。尚、多塩基酸とその無水物を併用する場合は、上記付加率は、多塩基酸とその無水物の合計の付加率を表す。 The addition rate of at least one of the polybasic acid and its anhydride (c ′ ″) is generated when an unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b ′ ″) is added to the epoxy resin (a ′ ″). The hydroxyl group is usually 15 to 100 mol%, preferably 20 to 90 mol%, and the final acid-soluble resin (A ′ ″) has an acid value of 45 to 160 mg-KOH / g. Is preferred. By making this addition rate not more than the above upper limit value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the remaining film rate during development, and by making it not less than the above lower limit value, good solubility and adhesion to the substrate can be obtained. Can do. In addition, when using a polybasic acid and its anhydride together, the said addition rate represents the total addition rate of a polybasic acid and its anhydride.
 不飽和多環式炭化水素化合物とフェノール系化合物の反応、及び該反応にて得られたフェノール樹脂における水酸基のグリシジル化反応、不飽和基含有カルボン酸(b’’’)及び多塩基酸及びその無水物(c’’’)のうち少なくとも一方の付加反応など、アルカリ可溶性樹脂(A’’’)の合成反応はいずれも公知の方法にて行うことができ、例えば日本国特開平5-214048号公報に記載の方法を参照して行うことができる。 Reaction of unsaturated polycyclic hydrocarbon compound and phenolic compound, and glycidylation reaction of hydroxyl group in phenol resin obtained by the reaction, unsaturated group-containing carboxylic acid (b ′ ″), polybasic acid and its Any of the synthesis reactions of the alkali-soluble resin (A ′ ″), such as an addition reaction of at least one of the anhydrides (c ′ ″), can be carried out by a known method, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 5-214048. It can carry out with reference to the method as described in gazette.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂(A’’’)の重量平均分子量は、通常1,500~4,000、好ましくは2,000~3,500、より好ましくは2,500~3,000である。重量平均分子量が小さすぎる場合には、現像溶解性が高すぎるという問題が生じる可能性があり、また大きすぎると現像溶解性が低すぎるという問題が生じる可能性がある。 The weight average molecular weight of the alkali-soluble resin (A '' ') is usually 1,500 to 4,000, preferably 2,000 to 3,500, more preferably 2,500 to 3,000. If the weight average molecular weight is too small, there may be a problem that the developing solubility is too high, and if it is too large, there may be a problem that the developing solubility is too low.
 本発明において、これらのバインダー樹脂は、1種を単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を併用してもよい。 In the present invention, these binder resins may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 本発明の着色感光性組成物におけるバインダー樹脂としては、上記のアルカリ可溶性樹脂(A)、(A’)、(A’’)、(A’’’)、(A1’’)の内、形状や段差のコントロール、基板との密着性のバランスの点からアルカリ可溶性樹脂(A)と(A’’’)が好ましい。 As the binder resin in the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention, among the above alkali-soluble resins (A), (A ′), (A ″), (A ′ ″), (A1 ″), the shape Alkali-soluble resins (A) and (A ′ ″) are preferable from the viewpoints of control of the level difference and the balance of adhesion to the substrate.
 バインダー樹脂の含有量は、本発明の着色感光性組成物の全固形分に対して、通常5重量%以上、好ましくは10重量%以上であり、通常80重量%以下、好ましくは70重量%以下である。バインダー樹脂の含有量を上記下限値以上とすることにより、形状や段差のコントロールが可能となる上に、未露光部分の現像液に対する溶解性も確保することができる。また、上記上限値以下とすることにより、熱硬化時の過度な収縮によるシワの発生を抑制することができる。 The content of the binder resin is usually 5% by weight or more, preferably 10% by weight or more, and usually 80% by weight or less, preferably 70% by weight or less, based on the total solid content of the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention. It is. By setting the content of the binder resin to the above lower limit value or more, the shape and level difference can be controlled, and the solubility of the unexposed portion in the developer can be ensured. Moreover, by setting it as the said upper limit or less, generation | occurrence | production of the wrinkle by the excessive shrinkage | contraction at the time of thermosetting can be suppressed.
[3]光重合性モノマー
 本発明において、光重合開始剤は、エチレン性不飽和化合物等の光重合性モノマーと共に用いられる。
[3] Photopolymerizable monomer In the present invention, the photopolymerization initiator is used together with a photopolymerizable monomer such as an ethylenically unsaturated compound.
 ここで使用されるエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、エチレン性不飽和結合を分子内に1個以上有する化合物を意味するが、重合性、架橋性、及びそれに伴う露光部と非露光部の現像液溶解性の差異を拡大できる等の点から、エチレン性不飽和結合を分子内に2個以上有する化合物であることが好ましく、また、そのエチレン性不飽和結合は(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基に由来する(メタ)アクリレート化合物が更に好ましい。 As used herein, an ethylenically unsaturated compound means a compound having at least one ethylenically unsaturated bond in the molecule, but it is polymerizable, crosslinkable, and a developer for exposed and non-exposed areas associated therewith. A compound having two or more ethylenically unsaturated bonds in the molecule is preferable from the viewpoint that the difference in solubility can be expanded, and the ethylenically unsaturated bond is derived from a (meth) acryloyloxy group. More preferred are (meth) acrylate compounds.
 更に、エチレン性不飽和結合を分子内に3個以上有する化合物を用いると電圧保持率の観点から好ましい。
 エチレン性不飽和結合を分子内に1個以上有する化合物としては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸、クロトン酸、イソクロトン酸、マレイン酸、イタコン酸、シトラコン酸等の不飽和カルボン酸、及びそのアルキルエステル、(メタ)アクリロニトリル、(メタ)アクリルアミド、スチレン等が挙げられる。
Furthermore, it is preferable from the viewpoint of voltage holding ratio to use a compound having three or more ethylenically unsaturated bonds in the molecule.
Examples of the compound having one or more ethylenically unsaturated bond in the molecule, for example, (meth) acrylic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, itaconic acid, unsaturated carboxylic acids such as citraconic acid, and their alkyl esters , (Meth) acrylonitrile, (meth) acrylamide, styrene and the like.
 エチレン性不飽和結合を分子内に2個以上有する化合物としては、代表的には、不飽和カルボン酸とポリヒドロキシ化合物とのエステル類、(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基含有ホスフェート類、ヒドロキシ(メタ)アクリレート化合物とポリイソシアネート化合物とのウレタン(メタ)アクリレート類、及び、(メタ)アクリル酸又はヒドロキシ(メタ)アクリレート化合物とポリエポキシ化合物とのエポキシ(メタ)アクリレート類等が挙げられる。 The compounds having two or more ethylenically unsaturated bonds are typically esters of unsaturated carboxylic acids and polyhydroxy compounds, (meth) acryloyloxy group-containing phosphates, hydroxy (meth) acrylates. Examples include urethane (meth) acrylates of a compound and a polyisocyanate compound, and epoxy (meth) acrylates of a (meth) acrylic acid or hydroxy (meth) acrylate compound and a polyepoxy compound.
 不飽和カルボン酸とポリヒドロキシ化合物とのエステル類としては、具体的には以下の化合物が挙げられる。 Specific examples of esters of an unsaturated carboxylic acid and a polyhydroxy compound include the following compounds.
 不飽和カルボン酸と糖アルコールとの反応物;糖アルコールは具体的には、エチレングリコール、ポリエチレングリコール(付加数2~14)、プロピレングリコール、ポリプロピレングリコール(付加数2~14)、トリメチレングリコール、テトラメチレングリコール、ヘキサメチレングリコール、トリメチロールプロパン、グリセロール、ペンタエリスリトール、ジペンタエリスリトール等が挙げられる。 Reaction product of unsaturated carboxylic acid and sugar alcohol; specifically, sugar alcohol includes ethylene glycol, polyethylene glycol (addition number 2-14), propylene glycol, polypropylene glycol (addition number 2-14), trimethylene glycol, Examples include tetramethylene glycol, hexamethylene glycol, trimethylolpropane, glycerol, pentaerythritol, dipentaerythritol and the like.
 不飽和カルボン酸と糖アルコールのアルキレンオキサイド付加物との反応物;糖アルコールは上記と同じ。アルキレンオキサイド付加物とは具体的にはエチレンオキサイド付加物、又はプロピレンオキサイド付加物等が挙げられる。
 不飽和カルボン酸とアルコールアミンとの反応物;アルコールアミン類とは具体的にはジエタノールアミン、トリエタノールアミン等が挙げられる。
Reaction product of unsaturated carboxylic acid and alkylene oxide adduct of sugar alcohol; sugar alcohol is the same as above. Specific examples of the alkylene oxide adduct include an ethylene oxide adduct and a propylene oxide adduct.
Reaction product of unsaturated carboxylic acid and alcohol amine; specific examples of alcohol amines include diethanolamine and triethanolamine.
 具体的な不飽和カルボン酸とポリヒドロキシ化合物とのエステル類は以下の通りである。
 エチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ジエチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、プロピレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパンジ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパンエチレンオキサイド付加トリ(メタ)アクリレート、グリセロールジ(メタ)アクリレート、グリセロールトリ(メタ)アクリレート、グリセロールプロピレンオキサイド付加トリ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールトリ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート等、及び同様のクロトネート、イソクロトネート、マレエート、イタコネート、シトラコネート等
Specific esters of unsaturated carboxylic acid and polyhydroxy compound are as follows.
Ethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, diethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, propylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane di (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane ethylene oxide addition tri (meta) ) Acrylate, glycerol di (meth) acrylate, glycerol tri (meth) acrylate, glycerol propylene oxide addition tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol di (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate , Dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate , And similar crotonate, isobutyl crotonate, maleate, itaconate, citraconate, etc.
 その他の、不飽和カルボン酸とポリヒドロキシ化合物とのエステル類としては、不飽和カルボン酸と、ヒドロキノン、レゾルシン、ピロガロール、ビスフェノールF、ビスフェノールA等の芳香族ポリヒドロキシ化合物、或いはそれらのエチレンオキサイド付加物との反応物が挙げられる。具体的には、例えば、ビスフェノールAジ(メタ)アクリレート、ビスフェノールAビス〔オキシエチレン(メタ)アクリレート〕、ビスフェノールAビス〔グリシジルエーテル(メタ)アクリレート〕等、また、前記の如き不飽和カルボン酸と、トリス(2-ヒドロキシエチル)イソシアヌレート等の複素環式ポリヒドロキシ化合物との反応物、例えば、トリス(2-ヒドロキシエチル)イソシアヌレートのジ(メタ)アクリレート、トリ(メタ)アクリレート等、また、不飽和カルボン酸と多価カルボン酸とポリヒドロキシ化合物との反応物、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸とフタル酸とエチレングリコールとの縮合物、(メタ)アクリル酸とマレイン酸とジエチレングリコールとの縮合物、(メタ)アクリル酸とテレフタル酸とペンタエリスリトールとの縮合物、(メタ)アクリル酸とアジピン酸とブタンジオールとグリセリンとの縮合物等が挙げられる。 Other esters of unsaturated carboxylic acids and polyhydroxy compounds include unsaturated carboxylic acids and aromatic polyhydroxy compounds such as hydroquinone, resorcinol, pyrogallol, bisphenol F, bisphenol A, or their ethylene oxide adducts. And the reaction product. Specifically, for example, bisphenol A di (meth) acrylate, bisphenol A bis [oxyethylene (meth) acrylate], bisphenol A bis [glycidyl ether (meth) acrylate], etc., and the unsaturated carboxylic acid as described above A reaction product with a heterocyclic polyhydroxy compound such as tris (2-hydroxyethyl) isocyanurate, such as di (meth) acrylate or tri (meth) acrylate of tris (2-hydroxyethyl) isocyanurate, Reaction product of unsaturated carboxylic acid, polyvalent carboxylic acid and polyhydroxy compound, for example, condensate of (meth) acrylic acid, phthalic acid and ethylene glycol, condensate of (meth) acrylic acid, maleic acid and diethylene glycol , (Meth) acrylic acid, terephthalic acid and pentae Condensates of Suritoru include condensates of (meth) acrylic acid and adipic acid and butane diol and glycerol.
 (メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基含有ホスフェート類としては、下記一般式(6)、(7)、(8)で表されるものが好ましい。 As the (meth) acryloyloxy group-containing phosphates, those represented by the following general formulas (6), (7) and (8) are preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
(式(6),(7)及び(8)中、Rは水素原子又はメチル基を示し、e及びgは1~25の整数、fは1、2、又は3である。) (In the formulas (6), (7) and (8), R A represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, e and g are integers of 1 to 25, and f is 1, 2 or 3.)
 ここで、e及びgは1~10、特に1~4であるのが好ましく、これらの具体例としては、例えば、(メタ)アクリロイルオキシエチルホスフェート、ビス〔(メタ)アクリロイルオキシエチル〕ホスフェート、(メタ)アクリロイルオキシエチレングリコールホスフェート等が挙げられ、これらはそれぞれが単独で用いられても混合物として用いられてもよい。 Here, e and g are preferably 1 to 10, particularly 1 to 4. Specific examples thereof include (meth) acryloyloxyethyl phosphate, bis [(meth) acryloyloxyethyl] phosphate, ( (Meth) acryloyloxyethylene glycol phosphate and the like, and these may be used alone or as a mixture.
 ヒドロキシ(メタ)アクリレート化合物とポリイソシアネート化合物とのウレタン(メタ)アクリレート類としては、例えば、ヒドロキシメチル(メタ)アクリレート、ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、テトラメチロールエタントリ(メタ)アクリレート等のヒドロキシ(メタ)アクリレート化合物と、ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネート、1,8-ジイソシアネート-4-イソシアネートメチルオクタン等の脂肪族ポリイソシアネート、シクロヘキサンジイソシアネート、ジメチルシクロヘキサンジイソシアネート、4,4-メチレンビス(シクロヘキシルイソシアネート)、イソホロンジイソシアネート、ビシクロヘプタントリイソシアネート等の脂環式ポリイソシアネート、4,4-ジフェニルメタンジイソシアネート、トリス(イソシアネートフェニル)チオホスフェート等の芳香族ポリイソシアネート、イソシアヌレート等の複素環式ポリイソシアネート、等のポリイソシアネート化合物との反応物等が挙げられる。 Examples of urethane (meth) acrylates of a hydroxy (meth) acrylate compound and a polyisocyanate compound include hydroxy (meth) acrylates such as hydroxymethyl (meth) acrylate, hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate, and tetramethylolethane tri (meth) acrylate. ) Acrylate compound, aliphatic polyisocyanate such as hexamethylene diisocyanate, 1,8-diisocyanate-4-isocyanate methyloctane, cyclohexane diisocyanate, dimethylcyclohexane diisocyanate, 4,4-methylenebis (cyclohexyl isocyanate), isophorone diisocyanate, bicycloheptanetri Cycloaliphatic polyisocyanates such as isocyanate, 4,4-diphenylmethane diisocyanate, tri Aromatic polyisocyanates such as (isocyanate phenyl) thiophosphate, heterocyclic polyisocyanates such as isocyanurate, a reaction product of a polyisocyanate compounds and the like.
 このようなものとしては例えば、新中村化学社製商品名「U-4HA」「UA-306A」「UA-MC340H」「UA-MC340H」「U6LPA」等が挙げられる。 Examples of such products include trade names “U-4HA”, “UA-306A”, “UA-MC340H”, “UA-MC340H”, “U6LPA” manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd., and the like.
 これらの中でも、1分子中に4個以上のウレタン結合〔-NH-CO-O-〕及び4個以上の(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基を有する化合物が好ましく、該化合物は、例えば、ペンタエリスリトール、ポリグリセリン等の1分子中に4個以上の水酸基を有する化合物に、ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネート、トリメチルヘキサメチレンジイソシアネート、イソホロンジイソシアネート、トリレンジイソシアネート等のジイソシアネート化合物を反応させて得られた化合物、或いは、エチレングリコール等の1分子中に2個以上の水酸基を有する化合物に、旭化成工業社製「デュラネート24A-100」、同「デュラネート22A-75PX」、同「デュラネート21S-75E」、同「デュラネート18H-70B」等ビウレットタイプ、同「デュラネートP-301-75E」、同「デュラネートE-402-90T」、同「デュラネートE-405-80T」等のアダクトタイプ等の1分子中に3個以上のイソシアネート基を有する化合物を反応させて得られた化合物、或いは、イソシアネートエチル(メタ)アクリレート等を重合若しくは共重合させて得られた化合物等の、1分子中に4個以上、好ましくは6個以上のイソシアネート基を有する化合物等、例えば、旭化成工業社製「デュラネートME20-100」と、ペンタエリスリトールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールトリ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート等の、1分子中に1個以上の水酸基及び2個以上、好ましくは3個以上の(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基を有する化合物とを、反応させることにより得ることができる。 Among these, a compound having 4 or more urethane bonds [—NH—CO—O—] and 4 or more (meth) acryloyloxy groups in one molecule is preferable, and examples of the compound include pentaerythritol, poly A compound obtained by reacting a diisocyanate compound such as hexamethylene diisocyanate, trimethylhexamethylene diisocyanate, isophorone diisocyanate, tolylene diisocyanate with a compound having 4 or more hydroxyl groups in one molecule such as glycerin, or ethylene glycol As a compound having two or more hydroxyl groups in one molecule, “Duranate 24A-100”, “Duranate 22A-75PX”, “Duranate 21S-75E”, “Duranate 21H-70B”, etc. manufactured by Asahi Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd. Biuret type, A compound having 3 or more isocyanate groups in one molecule such as adduct type such as “Duranate P-301-75E”, “Duranate E-402-90T” and “Duranate E-405-80T” is reacted. A compound having 4 or more, preferably 6 or more isocyanate groups in one molecule, such as a compound obtained by polymerizing or copolymerizing isocyanate ethyl (meth) acrylate or the like, For example, “Duranate ME20-100” manufactured by Asahi Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd., pentaerythritol di (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol tri (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, etc. One or more hydroxyl groups in one molecule and FOB, can preferably be obtained by a compound having three or more (meth) acryloyloxy group, it is reacted.
 (メタ)アクリル酸又はヒドロキシ(メタ)アクリレート化合物とポリエポキシ化合物とのエポキシ(メタ)アクリレート類としては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸、又は前記の如きヒドロキシ(メタ)アクリレート化合物と、(ポリ)エチレングリコールポリグリシジルエーテル、(ポリ)プロピレングリコールポリグリシジルエーテル、(ポリ)テトラメチレングリコールポリグリシジルエーテル、(ポリ)ペンタメチレングリコールポリグリシジルエーテル、(ポリ)ネオペンチルグリコールポリグリシジルエーテル、(ポリ)ヘキサメチレングリコールポリグリシジルエーテル、(ポリ)トリメチロールプロパンポリグリシジルエーテル、(ポリ)グリセロールポリグリシジルエーテル、(ポリ)ソルビトールポリグリシジルエーテル等の脂肪族ポリエポキシ化合物、フェノールノボラックポリエポキシ化合物、ブロム化フェノールノボラックポリエポキシ化合物、(o-,m-,p-)クレゾールノボラックポリエポキシ化合物、ビスフェノールAポリエポキシ化合物、ビスフェノールFポリエポキシ化合物等の芳香族ポリエポキシ化合物、ソルビタンポリグリシジルエーテル、トリグリシジルイソシアヌレート、トリグリシジルトリス(2-ヒドロキシエチル)イソシアヌレート等の複素環式ポリエポキシ化合物、等のポリエポキシ化合物との反応物等が挙げられる。 Examples of epoxy (meth) acrylates of (meth) acrylic acid or a hydroxy (meth) acrylate compound and a polyepoxy compound include (meth) acrylic acid, or a hydroxy (meth) acrylate compound as described above, and (poly) Ethylene glycol polyglycidyl ether, (poly) propylene glycol polyglycidyl ether, (poly) tetramethylene glycol polyglycidyl ether, (poly) pentamethylene glycol polyglycidyl ether, (poly) neopentyl glycol polyglycidyl ether, (poly) hexamethylene Glycol polyglycidyl ether, (poly) trimethylolpropane polyglycidyl ether, (poly) glycerol polyglycidyl ether, (poly) sorbitol polyglycidyl ether Aliphatic polyepoxy compounds such as ruthenium, phenol novolac polyepoxy compounds, brominated phenol novolac polyepoxy compounds, (o-, m-, p-) cresol novolac polyepoxy compounds, bisphenol A polyepoxy compounds, bisphenol F polyepoxy compounds Aromatic polyepoxy compounds such as sorbitan polyglycidyl ether, triglycidyl isocyanurate, heterocyclic polyepoxy compounds such as triglycidyl tris (2-hydroxyethyl) isocyanurate, and reactants with polyepoxy compounds such as It is done.
 その他のエチレン性不飽和化合物として、前記以外に、例えば、エチレンビス(メタ)アクリルアミド等の(メタ)アクリルアミド類、フタル酸ジアリル等のアリルエステル類、ジビニルフタレート等のビニル基含有化合物類、エーテル結合含有エチレン性不飽和化合物のエーテル結合を5硫化燐等により硫化してチオエーテル結合に変えることにより架橋速度を向上せしめたチオエーテル結合含有化合物類、及び、例えば、日本国特許第3164407号公報及び日本国特開平9-100111号公報等に記載の、多官能(メタ)アクリレート化合物と、粒子径5~30nmのシリカゾル〔例えば、イソプロパノール分散オルガノシリカゾル(日産化学社製「IPA-ST」)、メチルエチルケトン分散オルガノシリカゾル(日産化学社製「MEK-ST」)、メチルイソブチルケトン分散オルガノシリカゾル(日産化学社製「MIBK-ST」)等〕とを、イソシアネート基或いはメルカプト基含有シランカップリング剤を用いて結合させた化合物等の、エチレン性不飽和化合物にシランカップリング剤を介してシリカゾルを反応させ結合させることにより硬化物としての強度や耐熱性を向上せしめた化合物類、等が挙げられる。 Other ethylenically unsaturated compounds include, for example, (meth) acrylamides such as ethylenebis (meth) acrylamide, allyl esters such as diallyl phthalate, vinyl group-containing compounds such as divinyl phthalate, ether bonds Thioether bond-containing compounds in which the ether bond of the ethylenically unsaturated compound is sulfurized with phosphorus pentasulfide or the like to change to a thioether bond to improve the crosslinking rate, and for example, Japanese Patent No. 3164407 and Japan A polyfunctional (meth) acrylate compound and a silica sol having a particle diameter of 5 to 30 nm (for example, isopropanol-dispersed organosilica sol (“IPA-ST” manufactured by Nissan Chemical Co., Ltd.)), methyl ethyl ketone-dispersed organo described in JP-A-9-100111, etc. Silica sol (Nissan Chemical Co., Ltd.) MEK-ST ”), methyl isobutyl ketone-dispersed organosilica sol (“ MIBK-ST ”manufactured by NISSAN CHEMICAL CO., LTD.)] And the like, and the like, by using an isocyanate group or a mercapto group-containing silane coupling agent. Examples thereof include compounds in which the strength and heat resistance as a cured product are improved by reacting and bonding a silica sol with a functional unsaturated compound via a silane coupling agent.
 本発明において、エチレン性不飽和化合物としては、エステル(メタ)アクリレート類、又は、ウレタン(メタ)アクリレート類が好ましく、中でも、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート等、5官能以上のものが特に好ましい。 In the present invention, as the ethylenically unsaturated compound, ester (meth) acrylates or urethane (meth) acrylates are preferable, and among them, dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate and the like. Those having 5 or more functional groups are particularly preferred.
 以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物は、それぞれ単独で用いられてもよく、2種以上が併用されてもよい。 These ethylenically unsaturated compounds may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 本発明の着色感光性組成物中の光重合性モノマーの割合は、全固形分に対して通常1~60重量%、好ましくは5~40重量%、特に好ましくは12~30重量%である。この範囲よりも光重合性モノマーの割合が多すぎると、他の成分の割合が減るにつれ硬化度が低下するため電圧保持率が悪化する傾向がある。一方少なすぎるとアルカリ樹脂の量が増えるため現像性が低下する傾向がある。 The proportion of the photopolymerizable monomer in the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention is usually 1 to 60% by weight, preferably 5 to 40% by weight, particularly preferably 12 to 30% by weight, based on the total solid content. If the proportion of the photopolymerizable monomer is too much within this range, the degree of curing tends to decrease as the proportion of the other components decreases, so the voltage holding ratio tends to deteriorate. On the other hand, if the amount is too small, the amount of the alkali resin increases, so that the developability tends to decrease.
[4]光重合開始剤
 光重合開始剤は、通常、加速剤との混合物(光重合開始剤系)として用いられ、必要に応じて添加される増感色素等が併用される。
[4] Photopolymerization initiator The photopolymerization initiator is usually used as a mixture (photopolymerization initiator system) with an accelerator, and a sensitizing dye added as necessary is used in combination.
 光重合開始剤系は、光を直接吸収し、或いは光増感されて分解反応又は水素引き抜き反応を起こし、重合活性ラジカルを発生する機能を有する成分である。 The photopolymerization initiator system is a component that directly absorbs light or is photosensitized to cause a decomposition reaction or a hydrogen abstraction reaction to generate a polymerization active radical.
 光重合開始剤系成分を構成する光重合開始剤としては、例えば、国際公開第2008/153000号などに記載の各種化合物を使用することができる。 As the photopolymerization initiator constituting the photopolymerization initiator system component, for example, various compounds described in International Publication No. 2008/153000 can be used.
 本発明の着色感光性組成物に使用される光重合開始剤として特に好ましくは、重合活性ラジカルの発生効率が良好な点からオキシムエステル系化合物が挙げられ、中でも以下に例示する化合物を好ましく用いることができる。 The photopolymerization initiator used in the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention is particularly preferably an oxime ester compound from the viewpoint of good generation efficiency of polymerization active radicals. Among them, the compounds exemplified below are preferably used. Can do.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
 光重合開始剤系成分を構成する加速剤及び増感色素の例としては、例えば国際公開第2008/153000号などに記載の各種化合物が挙げられ,好ましい化合物も国際公開第2008/153000号に記載された化合物と同様である。 Examples of the accelerator and the sensitizing dye constituting the photopolymerization initiator component include, for example, various compounds described in International Publication No. 2008/153000, and preferable compounds are also described in International Publication No. 2008/153000. It is the same as the prepared compound.
 光重合開始剤系成分(光重合開始剤と加速剤の混合物)の含有割合は、本発明の着色感光性組成物中の全固形分中、通常0.1~40重量%、好ましくは0.5~30重量%である。この含有割合が著しく低いと露光光線に対する感度が低下する原因となることがあり、反対に著しく高いと未露光部分の現像液に対する溶解性が低下し、現像不良を誘起させることがある。 The content ratio of the photopolymerization initiator system component (mixture of photopolymerization initiator and accelerator) is usually 0.1 to 40% by weight, preferably 0.8% in the total solid content in the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention. 5 to 30% by weight. If this content is extremely low, the sensitivity to exposure light may be reduced. On the other hand, if it is extremely high, the solubility of the unexposed portion in the developer may be reduced, leading to poor development.
 本発明の着色感光性組成物中に占める増感色素の含有割合は着色感光性組成物中の全固形分中、通常0~20重量%、好ましくは0~15重量%、更に好ましくは0~10重量%である。 The content of the sensitizing dye in the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention is usually 0 to 20% by weight, preferably 0 to 15% by weight, more preferably 0 to 0% by weight based on the total solid content in the colored photosensitive composition. 10% by weight.
[5]分散剤・分散助剤
 本発明の着色感光性組成物は、顔料の分散性の向上、分散安定性の向上のために、顔料分散剤及び分散助剤のうち少なくとも一方を併用する事が好ましい。中でも、特に顔料分散剤として高分子分散剤を用いると経時の分散安定性に優れるので好ましい。なお、ここで、高分子分散剤は顔料の分散安定性を確保するための、顔料とは全く構造の異なるポリマーであり、分散助剤とは顔料の分散性を高めるための顔料誘導体等をいう。
[5] Dispersant / dispersion aid In the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention, at least one of a pigment dispersant and a dispersion aid is used in combination in order to improve the dispersibility and dispersion stability of the pigment. Is preferred. Among them, it is particularly preferable to use a polymer dispersant as the pigment dispersant because it is excellent in dispersion stability with time. Here, the polymer dispersant is a polymer having a completely different structure from the pigment for ensuring the dispersion stability of the pigment, and the dispersion aid means a pigment derivative or the like for enhancing the dispersibility of the pigment. .
 高分子分散剤としては、例えば、ウレタン系分散剤、ポリエチレンイミン系分散剤、ポリオキシエチレンアルキルエーテル系分散剤、ポリオキシエチレングリコールジエステル系分散剤、ソルビタン脂肪族エステル系分散剤、脂肪族変性ポリエステル系分散剤等を挙げることができる。これら分散剤の具体例としては、商品名で、EFKA(BASF社製)、DisperBYK(ビックケミー社製)、ディスパロン(楠本化成(株)製)、SOLSPERSE(ゼネカ社製)、KP(信越化学工業(株)製)、ポリフロー(共栄社化学(株)製)等を挙げることができる。 Examples of the polymer dispersant include a urethane dispersant, a polyethyleneimine dispersant, a polyoxyethylene alkyl ether dispersant, a polyoxyethylene glycol diester dispersant, a sorbitan aliphatic ester dispersant, and an aliphatic modified polyester. And the like, and the like. Specific examples of these dispersants are trade names of EFKA (manufactured by BASF), DisperBYK (manufactured by Big Chemie), Disparon (manufactured by Enomoto Kasei Co., Ltd.), SOLPERSE (manufactured by Geneca), KP (Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd. Co., Ltd.), Polyflow (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.) and the like.
 これらの高分子分散剤は、1種単独で又は2種以上を混合して使用することができる。 These polymer dispersants can be used singly or in combination of two or more.
 顔料誘導体としてはアゾ系、フタロシアニン系、キナクリドン系、ベンズイミダゾロン系、キノフタロン系、イソインドリノン系、ジオキサジン系、アントラキノン系、インダンスレン系、ペリレン系、ペリノン系、ジケトピロロピロール系、ジオキサジン系等の誘導体が挙げられるが、中でもキノフタロン系が好ましい。顔料誘導体の置換基としてはスルホン酸基、スルホンアミド基及びその4級塩、フタルイミドメチル基、ジアルキルアミノアルキル基、水酸基、カルボキシル基、アミド基等が顔料骨格に直接又はアルキル基、アリール基、複素環基等を介して結合したものが挙げられ、好ましくはスルホン酸基である。またこれら置換基は一つの顔料骨格に複数置換していてもよい。 As pigment derivatives, azo, phthalocyanine, quinacridone, benzimidazolone, quinophthalone, isoindolinone, dioxazine, anthraquinone, indanthrene, perylene, perinone, diketopyrrolopyrrole, dioxazine Derivatives such as quinophthalone are preferable, among which quinophthalone is preferable. Substituents of pigment derivatives include sulfonic acid groups, sulfonamide groups and quaternary salts thereof, phthalimidomethyl groups, dialkylaminoalkyl groups, hydroxyl groups, carboxyl groups, amide groups, etc. directly on the pigment skeleton or alkyl groups, aryl groups, and complex groups. Examples thereof include those bonded via a ring group and the like, and a sulfonic acid group is preferable. Further, a plurality of these substituents may be substituted on one pigment skeleton.
 顔料誘導体の具体例としてはフタロシアニンのスルホン酸誘導体、キノフタロンのスルホン酸誘導体、アントラキノンのスルホン酸誘導体、キナクリドンのスルホン酸誘導体、ジケトピロロピロールのスルホン酸誘導体、ジオキサジンのスルホン酸誘導体等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of pigment derivatives include phthalocyanine sulfonic acid derivatives, quinophthalone sulfonic acid derivatives, anthraquinone sulfonic acid derivatives, quinacridone sulfonic acid derivatives, diketopyrrolopyrrole sulfonic acid derivatives, and dioxazine sulfonic acid derivatives.
 これらの顔料誘導体は1種を単独で或いは2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。 These pigment derivatives can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 本発明の着色感光性組成物において、分散剤及び分散助剤のうち少なくとも一方の含有量は、顔料に対して通常5重量%以上120重量%以下であり、好ましくは5重量%以上90重量%以下、更にこのましくは5重量%以上60重量%以下、特に好ましい範囲は5重量%以上40重量%以下である。分散剤及び分散助剤の含有量が少な過ぎると、十分な分散性が得られない場合があり、多過ぎると相対的に他の成分の割合が減って電圧保持率が低下する場合がある。尚、分散剤と分散助剤を併用する場合には、上記含有量は、分散剤と分散助剤の合計の含有量を表す。
 顔料誘導体を用いる場合、その使用量は着色感光性組成物中の顔料に対して通常0.1~30重量%、好ましくは0.1~20重量%、より好ましくは0.1~10重量%、さらに好ましくは0.1~5重量%である。
In the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention, the content of at least one of the dispersant and the dispersion aid is usually 5% by weight to 120% by weight, preferably 5% by weight to 90% by weight, based on the pigment. Hereinafter, more preferably, it is 5 wt% or more and 60 wt% or less, and a particularly preferred range is 5 wt% or more and 40 wt% or less. If the content of the dispersant and the dispersion aid is too small, sufficient dispersibility may not be obtained. If the content is too large, the ratio of other components may be relatively decreased, and the voltage holding ratio may be decreased. In addition, when using a dispersing agent and a dispersing aid together, the said content represents content of the sum total of a dispersing agent and a dispersing aid.
When a pigment derivative is used, the amount used is usually 0.1 to 30% by weight, preferably 0.1 to 20% by weight, more preferably 0.1 to 10% by weight, based on the pigment in the colored photosensitive composition. More preferably, it is 0.1 to 5% by weight.
[6]溶剤
 本発明の着色感光性組成物は、一般に上述の顔料、バインダー樹脂、光重合性モノマー、光重合開始剤、分散剤及び分散助剤や、後述のその他の成分の固形分を溶剤に溶解ないし分散させて調製される。
[6] Solvent The colored photosensitive composition of the present invention generally contains the above-described pigment, binder resin, photopolymerizable monomer, photopolymerization initiator, dispersant and dispersion aid, and the solid content of other components described below as a solvent. It is prepared by dissolving or dispersing in.
 溶剤は、本発明の着色感光性組成物において、顔料、バインダー樹脂、光重合性モノマー、光重合開始剤等を溶解又は分散させ、粘度を調節する機能を有する。 The solvent has a function of adjusting the viscosity by dissolving or dispersing the pigment, binder resin, photopolymerizable monomer, photopolymerization initiator, and the like in the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention.
 溶剤としては、沸点が100~300℃の範囲のものを選択するのが好ましい。より好ましくは120~280℃の沸点をもつ溶剤である。
 このような溶剤としては、例えば国際公開第2008/153000号などに記載の各種溶剤が挙げられる。
A solvent having a boiling point in the range of 100 to 300 ° C. is preferably selected. A solvent having a boiling point of 120 to 280 ° C. is more preferable.
Examples of such a solvent include various solvents described in International Publication No. 2008/153000.
 これらの溶剤は、1種を単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を併用してもよい。 These solvents may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 特に、フォトリソグラフィー法にてブラックフォトスペーサーを形成する場合、溶剤としては沸点が100~200℃(圧力1013.25[hPa]条件下。以下、沸点に関しては全て同様。)の範囲のものを選択するのがより好ましい。とりわけ好ましくは120~170℃の沸点を持つものである。
 上記国際公開第2008/153000号に記載された溶剤のうち、塗布性、表面張力などのバランスがよく、組成物中の構成成分の溶解度が比較的高い点からは、グリコールアルキルエーテルアセテート類が好ましい。
In particular, when forming a black photospacer by photolithography, a solvent having a boiling point in the range of 100 to 200 ° C. (under a pressure of 101.25 [hPa], the same applies to the boiling points hereinafter) is selected. More preferably. Particularly preferred are those having a boiling point of 120 to 170 ° C.
Of the solvents described in the above International Publication No. 2008/153000, glycol alkyl ether acetates are preferred from the viewpoint of good balance of coating properties, surface tension, etc., and relatively high solubility of constituents in the composition. .
 また、グリコールアルキルエーテルアセテート類は、単独で使用してもよいが、他の溶剤を併用してもよい。併用する溶剤として、特に好ましいのはグリコールモノアルキルエーテル類である。中でも、特に組成物中の構成成分の溶解性からプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルが好ましい。なお、グリコールモノアルキルエーテル類は極性が高く、添加量が多すぎると顔料が凝集しやすく、経時により着色感光性組成物の粘度が上がっていくなどの保存安定性が低下する傾向があるので、溶剤中のグリコールモノアルキルエーテル類の割合は5重量%~30重量%が好ましく、5重量%~20重量%がより好ましい。 In addition, glycol alkyl ether acetates may be used alone or in combination with other solvents. As the solvent used in combination, glycol monoalkyl ethers are particularly preferable. Of these, propylene glycol monomethyl ether is particularly preferred because of the solubility of the constituent components in the composition. Glycol monoalkyl ethers are highly polar, and if the amount added is too large, the pigment is likely to aggregate, and the storage stability such as the viscosity of the colored photosensitive composition tends to increase over time tends to decrease. The proportion of glycol monoalkyl ethers in the solvent is preferably 5 to 30% by weight, more preferably 5 to 20% by weight.
 また、150℃以上の沸点をもつ溶剤(以下「高沸点溶剤」と称す場合がある。)を併用することも好ましい。このような高沸点溶剤を併用することにより、着色感光性組成物は乾きにくくなるが、組成物中における顔料の均一な分散状態が、急激な乾燥により破壊されることを防止する効果がある。すなわち、例えばスリットノズル先端における、色材などの析出・固化による異物欠陥の発生を防止する効果がある。このような効果が高い点から、上述の国際公開第2008/153000号に記載された各種溶剤の中でも、特にジエチレングリコールモノ-n-ブチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノ-n-ブチルエーテルアセテート、及びジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテートが好ましい。 It is also preferable to use a solvent having a boiling point of 150 ° C. or higher (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “high boiling point solvent”). By using such a high-boiling solvent in combination, the colored photosensitive composition becomes difficult to dry, but there is an effect of preventing the uniform dispersion state of the pigment in the composition from being destroyed by rapid drying. That is, for example, there is an effect of preventing the occurrence of a foreign matter defect due to precipitation or solidification of a color material or the like at the tip of the slit nozzle. Because of such high effects, among the various solvents described in the above-mentioned International Publication No. 2008/153000, diethylene glycol mono-n-butyl ether, diethylene glycol mono-n-butyl ether acetate, and diethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate are particularly preferred. preferable.
 溶剤中の高沸点溶剤の含有割合は、3重量%~50重量%が好ましく、5重量%~40重量%がより好ましく、5重量%~30重量%が特に好ましい。高沸点溶剤の量を上記下限値以上とすることにより、例えばスリットノズル先端における顔料などの析出・固化による異物欠陥発生を防止することができ、また上記上限値以下とすることにより、後述するカラーフィルター製造工程において、減圧乾燥プロセスのタクト不良や、プリベークのピン跡といった問題を惹き起こさないよう、組成物の乾燥速度を適度に保つことが可能となる。
 なお沸点150℃以上の高沸点溶剤が、グリコールアルキルエーテルアセテート類であってもよく、またグリコールアルキルエーテル類であってもよく、この場合は、沸点150℃以上の高沸点溶剤を別途含有させなくてもかまわない。
The content of the high boiling point solvent in the solvent is preferably 3% to 50% by weight, more preferably 5% to 40% by weight, and particularly preferably 5% to 30% by weight. The amount of high boiling point solvent by the above-described lower limit, for example, foreign matter defects can be prevented by precipitation and solidification of such a pigment in the slit nozzle tip, also by the above-described upper limit or less, the color to be described later In the filter manufacturing process, it is possible to keep the drying rate of the composition moderate so as not to cause problems such as tact defects in the vacuum drying process and pin marks of prebaking.
The high boiling point solvent having a boiling point of 150 ° C. or higher may be glycol alkyl ether acetates or glycol alkyl ethers. In this case, a high boiling point solvent having a boiling point of 150 ° C. or higher is not separately contained. It doesn't matter.
 好ましい高沸点溶剤として、例えば前述の各種溶剤の中ではジエチレングリコールモノ-n-ブチルエーテルアセテート、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート、ジプロピレングリコールメチルエーテルアセテート、1,3-ブチレングリコールジアセテート、1,6-ヘキサノールジアセテート、トリアセチンなどが挙げられる。 Preferred high boiling solvents include, for example, diethylene glycol mono-n-butyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, dipropylene glycol methyl ether acetate, 1,3-butylene glycol diacetate, and 1,6-hexanol diester. Examples include acetate and triacetin.
 本発明の着色感光性組成物全体に占める溶剤の含有量は特に制限はないが、通常99重量%以下であり、通常50重量%以上、好ましくは55重量%以上、更に好ましくは60重量%以上である。溶剤の割合を上記上限値以下とすることにより、着色感光性組成物中に顔料、バインダー樹脂、光重合性モノマー等の固形分を必要十分な量含有することができる。また上記下限値以上とすることにより、増粘を抑制し、良好な塗布性と塗布膜の膜厚均一性を得ることができる。 The content of the solvent in the entire colored photosensitive composition of the present invention is not particularly limited, but is usually 99% by weight or less, usually 50% by weight or more, preferably 55% by weight or more, more preferably 60% by weight or more. It is. By setting the ratio of the solvent to the above upper limit or less, the colored photosensitive composition can contain a necessary and sufficient amount of solids such as a pigment, a binder resin, and a photopolymerizable monomer. Moreover, by setting it as more than the said lower limit, thickening can be suppressed and favorable applicability | paintability and the film thickness uniformity of a coating film can be obtained.
 なお、上記事情を勘案し、本発明の着色感光性組成物は溶剤を使用して、その固形分濃度が通常5~50重量%、好ましくは10~30重量%となるように、調液される。 In consideration of the above circumstances, the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention is prepared by using a solvent so that the solid content concentration is usually 5 to 50% by weight, preferably 10 to 30% by weight. The
[7]その他の成分
 本発明の着色感光性組成物には、上記の成分の他に、さらに重合加速剤、増感色素、界面活性剤、光酸発生剤、架橋剤、密着性向上剤、可塑剤、保存安定剤、表面保護剤、有機カルボン酸、有機カルボン酸無水物、現像改良剤、熱重合防止剤等を含んでいてもよい。
[7] Other components In addition to the above components, the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention further includes a polymerization accelerator, a sensitizing dye, a surfactant, a photoacid generator, a crosslinking agent, an adhesion improver, A plasticizer, a storage stabilizer, a surface protective agent, an organic carboxylic acid, an organic carboxylic acid anhydride, a development improver, a thermal polymerization inhibitor and the like may be contained.
[7-1]光酸発生剤
 光酸発生剤とは、紫外線により酸を発生することができる化合物であり、露光を行った際に発生する酸の作用により、例えばメラミン化合物等架橋剤があることで架橋反応を進行させることとなる。係る光酸発生剤の中でも、溶剤に対する溶解性、特に着色感光性組成物に使われる溶剤に対する溶解性が大きいものが好ましいものであり、例えば、ジフェニルヨードニウム、ジトリルヨードニウム、フェニル(p-アニシル)ヨードニウム、ビス(m-ニトロフェニル)ヨードニウム、ビス(p-tert-ブチルフェニル)ヨードニウム、ビス(p-クロロフェニル)ヨードニウム、ビス(n-ドデシル)ヨードニウム、p-イソブチルフェニル(p-トリル)ヨードニウム、p-イソプロピルフェニル(p-トリル)ヨードニウムなどのジアリールヨードニウム、あるいはトリフェニルスルホニウムなどのトリアリールスルホニウムのクロリド、ブロミド、あるいはホウフッ化塩、へキサフルオロフォスフェート塩、ヘキサフルオロアルセネート塩、芳香族スルホン酸塩、テトラキス(ペンタフルオロフェニル)ボレート塩等や、ジフェニルフェナシルスルホニウム(n-ブチル)トリフェニルボレート等のスルホニウム有機ホウ素錯体類、あるいは、2-メチル-4,6-ビストリクロロメチルトリアジン、2-(4-メトキシフェニル)-4,6-ビストリクロロメチルトリアジンなどのトリアジン化合物等を挙げることができるがこの限りではない。
 これらの光酸発生剤は、1種を単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を併用してもよい。
[7-1] Photoacid generator The photoacid generator is a compound capable of generating an acid by ultraviolet rays, and there is a crosslinking agent such as a melamine compound by the action of the acid generated upon exposure. As a result, the crosslinking reaction proceeds. Among such photoacid generators, those having a high solubility in a solvent, particularly in a solvent used in a colored photosensitive composition, are preferred. For example, diphenyliodonium, ditolyliodonium, phenyl (p-anisyl) Iodonium, bis (m-nitrophenyl) iodonium, bis (p-tert-butylphenyl) iodonium, bis (p-chlorophenyl) iodonium, bis (n-dodecyl) iodonium, p-isobutylphenyl (p-tolyl) iodonium, p Diaryl iodonium such as isopropylphenyl (p-tolyl) iodonium, or triarylsulfonium chloride such as triphenylsulfonium, bromide or borofluoride, hexafluorophosphate salt, hexafluoroa Senate salts, aromatic sulfonates, tetrakis (pentafluorophenyl) borate salts and the like, sulfonium organoboron complexes such as diphenylphenacylsulfonium (n-butyl) triphenylborate, or 2-methyl-4,6- Examples thereof include, but are not limited to, triazine compounds such as bistrichloromethyltriazine and 2- (4-methoxyphenyl) -4,6-bistrichloromethyltriazine.
These photoacid generators may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 光酸発生剤を用いる場合、その含有割合は、着色感光性組成物の全固形分に対して0~20重量%が好ましく、特に好ましくは2~15重量%である。 When a photoacid generator is used, its content is preferably 0 to 20% by weight, particularly preferably 2 to 15% by weight, based on the total solid content of the colored photosensitive composition.
[7-2]架橋剤
 本発明の着色感光性組成物には、さらに架橋剤を加えることができ、例えばメラミン又はグアナミン系の化合物を用いることができる。これら架橋剤としては、例えば、下記一般式(XI)で示されるメラミン又はグアナミン系の化合物を挙げることができる。
[7-2] Crosslinking agent To the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention, a crosslinking agent can be further added. For example, a melamine or guanamine compound can be used. Examples of these crosslinking agents include melamine or guanamine compounds represented by the following general formula (XI).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
〔式中、R61は-NR6667基又はアリール基を表し、R61が-NR6667基の場合はR62、R63、R64、R65、R66及びR67の一つ、そしてR61がアリール基の場合はR62、R63、R64及びR65の一つが-CHOR68基を表し、R62、R63、R64、R65、R66及びR67の残りは互いに独立に、水素原子又は-CHOR68基を表し、ここにR68は水素原子又はアルキル基を表す。〕 [Wherein, R 61 represents a —NR 66 R 67 group or an aryl group, and when R 61 is a —NR 66 R 67 group, one of R 62 , R 63 , R 64 , R 65 , R 66 and R 67 And when R 61 is an aryl group, one of R 62 , R 63 , R 64 and R 65 represents a —CH 2 OR 68 group, and R 62 , R 63 , R 64 , R 65 , R 66 and R 65 The rest of 67 , independently of each other, represents a hydrogen atom or a —CH 2 OR 68 group, where R 68 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group. ]
 ここで、アリール基は典型的にはフェニル基、1-ナフチル基又は2-ナフチル基であり、これらのフェニル基やナフチル基には、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、ハロゲン原子などの置換基が結合していてもよい。アルキル基及びアルコキシ基は、それぞれ炭素数1~6であることができる。R68で表されるアルキル基は、上記のなかでも、メチル基又はエチル基、とりわけメチル基であるのが一般的である。 Here, the aryl group is typically a phenyl group, a 1-naphthyl group, or a 2-naphthyl group, and a substituent such as an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or a halogen atom is bonded to the phenyl group or naphthyl group. It may be. The alkyl group and the alkoxy group can each have 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Alkyl group represented by R 68 is, among the above, methyl group or ethyl group, especially common that a methyl group.
 一般式(XI)に相当するメラミン系化合物、すなわち下記一般式(XI-1)の化合物には、へキサメチロールメラミン、ペンタメチロールメラミン、テトラメチロールメラミン、ヘキサメトキシメチルメラミン、ペンタメトキシメチルメラミン、テトラメトキシメチルメラミン、ヘキサエトキシメチルメラミンなどが包含される。 Melamine compounds corresponding to the general formula (XI), that is, compounds of the following general formula (XI-1) include hexamethylol melamine, pentamethylol melamine, tetramethylol melamine, hexamethoxymethyl melamine, pentamethoxymethyl melamine, tetra Methoxymethyl melamine, hexaethoxymethyl melamine and the like are included.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
〔式中、R62、R63、R64、R65、R66及びR67の一つがアリール基の場合はR62、R63、R64及びR65の一つが-CHOR68基を表し、R62、R63、R64、R65、R66及びR67の残りは互いに独立に、水素原子又は-CHOR68基を表し、ここにR68は水素原子又はアルキルを表す。〕 [Wherein, when one of R 62 , R 63 , R 64 , R 65 , R 66 and R 67 is an aryl group, one of R 62 , R 63 , R 64 and R 65 represents a —CH 2 OR 68 group. And the remainder of R 62 , R 63 , R 64 , R 65 , R 66 and R 67 independently of one another represents a hydrogen atom or a —CH 2 OR 68 group, wherein R 68 represents a hydrogen atom or alkyl. ]
 また、一般式(XI)に相当するグアナミン系化合物、すなわち一般式(XI)中のR61がアリール基である化合物には、テトラメチロールベンゾグアナミン、テトラメトキシメチルベンゾグアナミン、トリメトキシメチルベンゾグアナミン、テトラエトキシメチルベンゾグアナミンなどが包含される。 In addition, guanamine compounds corresponding to the general formula (XI), that is, compounds in which R 61 in the general formula (XI) is an aryl group include tetramethylol benzoguanamine, tetramethoxymethyl benzoguanamine, trimethoxymethyl benzoguanamine, tetraethoxymethyl. Benzoguanamine and the like are included.
 さらに、メチロール基又はメチロールアルキルエーテル基を有する架橋剤を用いることもできる。以下にその例を挙げる。
 2,6-ビス(ヒドロキシメチル)-4-メチルフェノール、4-tert-ブチル-2,6-ビス(ヒドロキシメチル)フェノール、5-エチル-1,3-ビス(ヒドロキシメチル)ペルヒドロ-1,3,5-トリアジン-2-オン(通称N-エチルジメチロールトリアゾン)又はそのジメチルエーテル体、ジメチロールトリメチレン尿素又はそのジメチルエーテル体、3,5-ビス(ヒドロキシメチル)ペルヒドロ-1,3,5-オキサジアジン-4-オン(通称ジメチロールウロン)又はそのジメチルエーテル体、テトラメチロールグリオキザールジウレイン又はそのテトラメチルエーテル体。
Furthermore, a crosslinking agent having a methylol group or a methylol alkyl ether group can also be used. Examples are given below.
2,6-bis (hydroxymethyl) -4-methylphenol, 4-tert-butyl-2,6-bis (hydroxymethyl) phenol, 5-ethyl-1,3-bis (hydroxymethyl) perhydro-1,3 , 5-triazin-2-one (commonly known as N- ethyl-dimethylol triazone) or its dimethyl ether thereof, dimethylol trimethylene urea or dimethyl ether thereof, 3,5-bis (hydroxymethyl) perhydro-1,3,5 Oxadiazin-4-one (commonly called dimethyloluron) or a dimethyl ether thereof, tetramethylol glyoxal diurein or a tetramethyl ether thereof.
 尚、これら架橋剤は1種を単独で用いても、2種以上を組み合わせて使用してもよい。 In addition, these crosslinking agents may be used individually by 1 type, or may be used in combination of 2 or more type.
 架橋剤を用いる際の量は、着色感光性組成物の全固形分に対して0.1~15重量%が好ましく、特に好ましくは0.5~10重量%である。 The amount when the crosslinking agent is used is preferably from 0.1 to 15% by weight, particularly preferably from 0.5 to 10% by weight, based on the total solid content of the colored photosensitive composition.
[7-3]密着向上剤
 本発明の着色感光性組成物には、細い線やドットを充分密着させるために、密着向上剤を含有させてもよい。
[7-3] Adhesion Improving Agent The colored photosensitive composition of the present invention may contain an adhesion improving agent in order to sufficiently adhere fine lines and dots.
 密着向上剤としては、窒素原子を含有する化合物や燐酸基含有化合物、シランカップリング剤などが好ましく、窒素原子を含有する化合物としては、例えば、ジアミン類(日本国特開平11-184080号公報記載の密着増強剤、他)やアゾール類が好ましい。なかでもアゾール類が好ましく、特にイミダゾール類(日本国特開平9-236923号公報記載の密着向上剤、他)、ベンゾイミダゾール類、ベンゾトリアゾール類(日本国特開2000-171968号公報記載の密着向上剤、他)が好ましく、イミダゾール類とベンゾイミダゾール類が最も好ましい。これらのなかで、カブリが生じにくく、密着性を大きく向上させることができる点から2-ヒドロキシベンゾイミダゾール、2-ヒドロキシエチルベンゾイミダゾール、ベンゾイミダゾール、2-ヒドロキシイミダゾール、イミダゾール、2-メルカプトイミダゾール、2-アミノイミダゾールが好ましく、2-ヒドロキシベンゾイミダゾール、ベンゾイミダゾール、2-ヒドロキシイミダゾール、イミダゾールが特に好ましい。シランカップリング剤の種類としては、エポキシ系、メタクリル系、アミノ系等種々の物が使用できるが、特にエポキシ系やイソシアネート系のシランカップリング剤が好ましい。 As the adhesion improver, a compound containing a nitrogen atom, a phosphoric acid group-containing compound, a silane coupling agent and the like are preferable. Examples of the compound containing a nitrogen atom include diamines (described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-184080). And other azoles are preferred. Among them, azoles are preferable, and in particular, imidazoles (adhesion improvers described in JP-A-9-236923, etc.), benzimidazoles, benzotriazoles (adhesion improvement described in JP-A-2000-171968). Agents, etc.) are preferred, and imidazoles and benzimidazoles are most preferred. Of these, 2-hydroxybenzimidazole, 2-hydroxyethylbenzimidazole, benzimidazole, 2-hydroxyimidazole, imidazole, 2-mercaptoimidazole, 2 are less likely to cause fogging and greatly improve the adhesion. -Aminoimidazole is preferred, and 2-hydroxybenzimidazole, benzimidazole, 2-hydroxyimidazole, and imidazole are particularly preferred. Various types of silane coupling agents such as epoxy, methacrylic, amino, etc. can be used, and epoxy and isocyanate silane coupling agents are particularly preferred.
 これらは1種を単独で或いは2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。 These can be used singly or in combination of two or more.
 これらの密着向上剤を配合する場合、その配合割合は、用いる密着向上剤の種類によっても異なるが、着色感光性組成物の全固形分に対して0.01~5重量%、特に0.05~3重量%とすることが好ましい。これよりも少ないと十分な密着性の向上効果が得られない場合があり、多すぎると現像性を下げる場合がある。 When blending these adhesion improvers, the blending ratio varies depending on the type of the adhesion improver used, but is 0.01 to 5% by weight, particularly 0.05%, based on the total solid content of the colored photosensitive composition. It is preferable to set it to 3% by weight. If it is less than this, sufficient adhesion improving effect may not be obtained, and if it is too much, developability may be lowered.
[7-4]増感色素
 増感色素としては、例えば日本国特開平4-221958号、日本国特開平4-219756号公報に記載のキサンテン色素、日本国特開平3-239703号、日本国特開平5-289335号公報に記載の複素環を有するクマリン色素、日本国特開平3-239703号、日本国特開平5-289335号公報に記載の3-ケトクマリン化合物、日本国特開平6-19240号公報に記載のピロメテン色素、その他、日本国特開昭47-2528号、日本国特開昭54-155292号、日本国特公昭45-37377号、日本国特開昭48-84183号、日本国特開昭52-112681号、日本国特開昭58-15503号、日本国特開昭60-88005号、日本国特開昭59-56403号、日本国特開平2-69号、日本国特開昭57-168088号、日本国特開平5-107761号、日本国特開平5-210240号、日本国特開平4-288818号公報に記載のジアルキルアミノベンゼン骨格を有する色素等を挙げることができる。
[7-4] Sensitizing dye Examples of the sensitizing dye include xanthene dyes described in JP-A-4-221958 and JP-A-4-219756, JP-A-3-239703, and Japan. A coumarin dye having a heterocyclic ring described in JP-A-5-289335, a 3-ketocoumarin compound described in JP-A-3-239703, JP-A-5-289335, and JP-A-6-19240. Japanese Patent Publication No. 47-2528, Japanese Patent Publication No. 54-155292, Japanese Patent Publication No. 45-37377, Japanese Patent Publication No. 48-84183, Japan Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 52-112682, Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 58-15503, Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 60-88005, Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 59-56403, Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. The dialkylaminobenzene skeleton described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2-69, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 57-168088, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 5-107761, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 5-210240, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 4-288818. The pigment | dye which has can be mentioned.
 これらは1種を単独で或いは2種以上を組み合わせて用いることができる。 These can be used singly or in combination of two or more.
 増感色素を配合する場合、着色感光性組成物中の全固形分中における増感色素の含有率は、通常0.01~5重量%、好ましくは0.05~3重量%である。これより少ないと増感効果が出ない場合があり、多すぎると現像性を下げる場合がある。 When a sensitizing dye is blended, the content of the sensitizing dye in the total solid content in the colored photosensitive composition is usually 0.01 to 5% by weight, preferably 0.05 to 3% by weight. If it is less than this, the sensitization effect may not be obtained, and if it is too much, developability may be lowered.
[7-5]界面活性剤
 界面活性剤としてはアニオン系、カチオン系、非イオン系、両性界面活性剤等各種のものの1種又は2種以上を用いることができるが、諸特性に悪影響を及ぼす可能性が低い点で、非イオン系界面活性剤を用いるのが好ましい。また、フッ素系やシリコン系のものは、塗布性の面で効果的である。
[7-5] Surfactant As the surfactant, one or more of anionic, cationic, nonionic, amphoteric surfactants and the like can be used, but they adversely affect various properties. In view of low possibility, it is preferable to use a nonionic surfactant. In addition, fluorine-based and silicon-based materials are effective in terms of coating properties.
 界面活性剤を用いる場合、その配合割合としては、着色感光性組成物中の全固形分に対して通常0.001~10重量%、好ましくは0.005~1重量%、さらに好ましくは0.01~0.5重量%、最も好ましくは0.03~0.3重量%の範囲である。界面活性剤の添加量が上記範囲よりも少ないと塗布膜の平滑性、均一性が発現できない場合があり、多いと塗布膜の平滑性、均一性が発現できない場合がある他、他の特性が悪化する場合がある。 When a surfactant is used, the blending ratio is usually 0.001 to 10% by weight, preferably 0.005 to 1% by weight, more preferably 0.8%, based on the total solid content in the colored photosensitive composition. The range is from 01 to 0.5% by weight, most preferably from 0.03 to 0.3% by weight. If the addition amount of the surfactant is less than the above range, the smoothness and uniformity of the coating film may not be expressed. If the addition amount is large, the smoothness and uniformity of the coating film may not be expressed, and other characteristics may be exhibited. It may get worse.
[7-6]有機カルボン酸、有機カルボン酸無水物
 本発明の着色感光性組成物は、現像性の向上や地汚れ改善の目的で有機カルボン酸及び有機カルボン酸無水物のうち少なくとも一方を含んでいてもよい。
[7-6] Organic Carboxylic Acid, Organic Carboxylic Anhydride The colored photosensitive composition of the present invention contains at least one of an organic carboxylic acid and an organic carboxylic anhydride for the purpose of improving developability and improving background stains. You may go out.
 有機カルボン酸としては、脂肪族カルボン酸及び芳香族カルボン酸が挙げられる。
 脂肪族カルボン酸としては、具体的には、ギ酸、酢酸、プロピオン酸、酪酸、吉草酸、ピバル酸、カプロン酸、ジエチル酢酸、エナント酸、カプリル酸、グリコール酸、アクリル酸、メタクリル酸などのモノカルボン酸、シュウ酸、マロン酸、コハク酸、グルタル酸、アジピン酸、ピメリン酸、スベリン酸、アゼライン酸、セバシン酸、ブラシル酸、メチルマロン酸、エチルマロン酸、ジメチルマロン酸、メチルコハク酸、テトラメチルコハク酸、シクロヘキサンジカルボン酸、シクロヘキセンジカルボン酸、イタコン酸、シトラコン酸、マレイン酸、フマル酸などのジカルボン酸、トリカルバリル酸、アコニット酸、カンホロン酸などのトリカルボン酸などが挙げられる。
 また、芳香族カルボン酸としては、具体的には、安息香酸、トルイル酸、クミン酸、へメリト酸、メシチレン酸、フタル酸、フタル酸、イソフタル酸、テレフタル酸、トリメリット酸、トリメシン酸、メロファン酸、ピロメリット酸、フェニル酢酸、ヒドロアトロパ酸、ヒドロケイ皮酸、マンデル酸、フェニルコハク酸、アトロパ酸、ケイ皮酸、ケイ皮酸メチル、ケイ皮酸ベンジル、シンナミリデン酢酸、クマル酸、ウンベル酸などのフェニル基に直接カルボキシル基が結合したカルボン酸、及びフェニル基から炭素結合を介してカルボキシル基が結合したカルボン酸等が挙げられる。
Examples of organic carboxylic acids include aliphatic carboxylic acids and aromatic carboxylic acids.
Specific examples of the aliphatic carboxylic acid include monoacids such as formic acid, acetic acid, propionic acid, butyric acid, valeric acid, pivalic acid, caproic acid, diethyl acetic acid, enanthic acid, caprylic acid, glycolic acid, acrylic acid, and methacrylic acid. Carboxylic acid, oxalic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, glutaric acid, adipic acid, pimelic acid, suberic acid, azelaic acid, sebacic acid, brassic acid, methylmalonic acid, ethylmalonic acid, dimethylmalonic acid, methylsuccinic acid, tetramethyl Examples thereof include dicarboxylic acids such as succinic acid, cyclohexanedicarboxylic acid, cyclohexenedicarboxylic acid, itaconic acid, citraconic acid, maleic acid, and fumaric acid, and tricarboxylic acids such as tricarbaryl acid, aconitic acid, and camphoric acid.
Specific examples of the aromatic carboxylic acid include benzoic acid, toluic acid, cumic acid, hemellitic acid, mesitylene acid, phthalic acid, phthalic acid, isophthalic acid, terephthalic acid, trimellitic acid, trimesic acid, and melophane. Acids, pyromellitic acid, phenylacetic acid, hydroatropic acid, hydrocinnamic acid, mandelic acid, phenylsuccinic acid, atropaic acid, cinnamic acid, methyl cinnamate, benzyl cinnamate, cinnamylidene acetic acid, coumaric acid, umberic acid, etc. Examples thereof include carboxylic acids in which a carboxyl group is directly bonded to a phenyl group, and carboxylic acids in which a carboxyl group is bonded to the phenyl group through a carbon bond.
 上記有機カルボン酸の中では、モノカルボン酸、ジカルボン酸が好ましく、中でもマロン酸、グルタル酸、グリコール酸が更に好ましく、マロン酸が特に好ましい。 Among the above organic carboxylic acids, monocarboxylic acids and dicarboxylic acids are preferable, among which malonic acid, glutaric acid, and glycolic acid are more preferable, and malonic acid is particularly preferable.
 上記有機カルボン酸の分子量は、通常1000以下であり、通常50以上である。上記有機カルボン酸の分子量が大きすぎると地汚れ改善効果が不十分となる場合があり、少なすぎると昇華、揮発などにより、添加量の減少やプロセス汚染を起こす恐れがある。 The molecular weight of the organic carboxylic acid is usually 1000 or less and usually 50 or more. If the molecular weight of the organic carboxylic acid is too large, the effect of improving background stains may be insufficient. If the molecular weight is too small, the addition amount may decrease or process contamination may occur due to sublimation or volatilization.
 有機カルボン酸無水物としては、脂肪族カルボン酸無水物及び芳香族カルボン酸無水物が挙げられ、脂肪族カルボン酸無水物としては、具体的には無水酢酸、無水トリクロロ酢酸、無水トリフルオロ酢酸、無水テトラヒドロフタル酸、無水コハク酸、無水マレイン酸、無水イタコン酸、無水シトラコン酸、無水グルタル酸、無水1,2-シクロヘキセンジカルボン酸、無水n-オクタデシルコハク酸、無水5-ノルボルネン-2,3-ジカルボン酸などの脂肪族カルボン酸無水物が挙げられる。芳香族カルボン酸無水物としては、具体的には無水フタル酸、トリメリット酸無水物、ピロメリット酸無水物、無水ナフタル酸などが挙げられる。 Examples of organic carboxylic acid anhydrides include aliphatic carboxylic acid anhydrides and aromatic carboxylic acid anhydrides. Specific examples of aliphatic carboxylic acid anhydrides include acetic anhydride, trichloroacetic anhydride, trifluoroacetic anhydride, Tetrahydrophthalic anhydride, succinic anhydride, maleic anhydride, itaconic anhydride, citraconic anhydride, glutaric anhydride, 1,2-cyclohexenedicarboxylic anhydride, n-octadecyl succinic anhydride, 5-norbornene-2,3- Aliphatic carboxylic acid anhydrides such as dicarboxylic acids are mentioned. Specific examples of the aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride include phthalic anhydride, trimellitic anhydride, pyromellitic anhydride, and naphthalic anhydride.
 上記有機カルボン酸無水物の中では、無水マレイン酸、無水コハク酸、無水イタコン酸、無水シトラコン酸が好ましく、無水マレイン酸が更に好ましい。 Among the above organic carboxylic acid anhydrides, maleic anhydride, succinic anhydride, itaconic anhydride, and citraconic anhydride are preferable, and maleic anhydride is more preferable.
 上記有機カルボン酸無水物の分子量は、通常800以下、好ましくは600以下、更に好ましくは500以下であり、通常50以上である。上記有機カルボン酸無水物の分子量が大きすぎると地汚れ改善効果が不十分となる場合があり、少なすぎると昇華、揮発などにより、添加量の減少やプロセス汚染を起こす恐れがある。 The molecular weight of the organic carboxylic acid anhydride is usually 800 or less, preferably 600 or less, more preferably 500 or less, and usually 50 or more. If the molecular weight of the organic carboxylic acid anhydride is too large, the effect of improving scumming may be insufficient. If the molecular weight is too small, the amount added may be reduced or process contamination may occur due to sublimation or volatilization.
 これらの有機カルボン酸及び有機カルボン酸無水物は、それぞれ1種を単独で用いてもよく、2種以上を混合して用いてもよい。 These organic carboxylic acids and organic carboxylic acid anhydrides may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 これらの有機カルボン酸及び有機カルボン酸無水物を用いる場合、その添加量は、それぞれ、本発明の着色感光性組成物の全固形分中、通常0.01重量%~5重量%、好ましくは0.03重量%~3重量%である。その添加量が少なすぎると十分な添加効果が得られない場合があり、多すぎると表面平滑性や感度が悪化し、未溶解剥離片が発生する場合がある。 When these organic carboxylic acids and organic carboxylic acid anhydrides are used, the amount added is usually 0.01% by weight to 5% by weight, preferably 0%, based on the total solid content of the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention. 0.03% to 3% by weight. If the addition amount is too small, a sufficient addition effect may not be obtained. If the addition amount is too large, surface smoothness and sensitivity may be deteriorated, and undissolved peeling pieces may be generated.
[7-7]熱重合防止剤
 熱重合防止剤としては、例えば、ハイドロキノン、p-メトキシフェノール、ピロガロール、カテコール、2,6-t-ブチル-p-クレゾール、β-ナフトール等の1種又は2種以上が用いられる。
[7-7] Thermal polymerization inhibitor Examples of the thermal polymerization inhibitor include one or two of hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, pyrogallol, catechol, 2,6-t-butyl-p-cresol, β-naphthol and the like. More than seeds are used.
 熱重合防止剤の配合割合は、着色感光性組成物中の全固形分に対し0~2重量%の範囲であることが好ましく、これよりも多いと遮光性、着色感光性組成物の感度の低下を招く場合がある。 The blending ratio of the thermal polymerization inhibitor is preferably in the range of 0 to 2% by weight with respect to the total solid content in the colored photosensitive composition, and if it is more than this, the light shielding property and the sensitivity of the colored photosensitive composition are improved. It may cause a decrease.
[7-8]可塑剤
 可塑剤としては、例えば、ジオクチルフタレート、ジドデシルフタレート、トリエチレングリコールジカプリレート、ジメチルグリコールフタレート、トリクレジルホスフェート、ジオクチルアジペート、ジブチルセバケート、トリアセチルグリセリン等の1種又は2種以上が用いられる。
[7-8] Plasticizer Examples of the plasticizer include dioctyl phthalate, didodecyl phthalate, triethylene glycol dicaprylate, dimethyl glycol phthalate, tricresyl phosphate, dioctyl adipate, dibutyl sebacate, and triacetyl glycerin. Species or two or more are used.
 これら可塑剤の配合割合は、着色感光性組成物の全固形分に対し0~5重量%の範囲であることが好ましく、これよりも多いとブラックフォトスペーサーの硬化点が低下する。 The blending ratio of these plasticizers is preferably in the range of 0 to 5% by weight with respect to the total solid content of the colored photosensitive composition, and if it is more than this, the curing point of the black photospacer is lowered.
[着色感光性組成物の調製方法]
 本発明の着色感光性組成物は常法に従って調製される。以下に、例を挙げて具体的に説明するが、本発明における着色感光性組成物の調製方法は、当該方法に限定される訳ではない。
[Preparation Method of Colored Photosensitive Composition]
The colored photosensitive composition of the present invention is prepared according to a conventional method. Hereinafter, examples will be described in detail, but the method for preparing the colored photosensitive composition in the present invention is not limited to this method.
 顔料の分散安定性の確保の点から、本発明の着色感光性組成物は、以下に述べるように、予め顔料分散液を調製し、これにその他の成分を混合する調製方法が好ましい。 From the standpoint of securing the dispersion stability of the pigment, the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention is preferably prepared by preparing a pigment dispersion in advance and mixing other components thereto as described below.
[1]顔料分散液の製造方法
 顔料、溶剤及び分散剤、必要に応じて分散助剤を各々所定量秤量し、分散処理工程において、顔料を分散させて液状の顔料分散液とする。この分散処理工程では、ペイントコンディショナー(ペイントシェイカー)、サンドグラインダー、ボールミル、ロールミル、ストーンミル、ジェットミル、ホモジナイザーなどを使用することができる。この分散処理を行うことによって顔料が微粒子化されるため、このようにして調製された顔料分散液を用いた着色感光性組成物は塗布特性、及び形状や直線性などのパターニング特性が向上する。
[1] Method for Producing Pigment Dispersion A predetermined amount of each of a pigment, a solvent, a dispersant, and, if necessary, a dispersion aid is weighed, and in the dispersion treatment step, the pigment is dispersed to obtain a liquid pigment dispersion. In the dispersion treatment step, it is possible to use a paint conditioner (paint shaker), a sand grinder, a ball mill, a roll mill, stone mill, a jet mill, a homogenizer or the like. Since the pigment is formed into fine particles by performing this dispersion treatment, the colored photosensitive composition using the pigment dispersion prepared in this way has improved coating characteristics and patterning characteristics such as shape and linearity.
 サンドグラインダーやペイントシェイカーを用いて分散処理を行う場合は、0.1~8mm径のガラスビーズ、又はジルコニアビーズを用いるのが好ましい。分散処理する際の温度は通常0℃~100℃の範囲、好ましくは室温~80℃の範囲に設定する。なお、分散時間は、顔料分散液の組成(顔料、溶剤、分散剤等)、及び装置の大きさなどにより適正時間が異なるため、適宜調整する必要がある。
 この場合、JIS Z8741(1997)における20度鏡面光沢度が100~200の範囲となるように顔料分散液の光沢を制御するのが分散の目安である。顔料分散液の光沢が低い場合には分散処理が十分でなく荒い顔料粒子が残っていることが多く、現像性、密着性、解像性等の点で不十分となる場合がある。また、光沢値が上記範囲を超えるまで分散処理すると超微粒子が多数生じるために却って分散安定性が損なわれることになりやすい。
When the dispersion treatment is performed using a sand grinder or a paint shaker, it is preferable to use glass beads or zirconia beads having a diameter of 0.1 to 8 mm. The temperature during the dispersion treatment is usually set in the range of 0 to 100 ° C., preferably in the range of room temperature to 80 ° C. The dispersion time needs to be appropriately adjusted because the appropriate time varies depending on the composition of the pigment dispersion (pigment, solvent, dispersant, etc.) and the size of the apparatus.
In this case, the standard of dispersion is to control the gloss of the pigment dispersion so that the 20 ° specular gloss in JIS Z8741 (1997) is in the range of 100 to 200. When the gloss of the pigment dispersion is low, the dispersion treatment is not sufficient and rough pigment particles often remain, which may be insufficient in terms of developability, adhesion, resolution, and the like. Further, when the dispersion treatment is performed until the gloss value exceeds the above range, a large number of ultrafine particles are generated, so that the dispersion stability tends to be impaired.
 顔料を分散処理する際には、前記のバインダー樹脂、又は分散助剤などを適宜併用してもよい。バインダー樹脂を含むことにより、顔料分散液を製造する際の分散安定性を高めることができる。
 この場合、バインダー樹脂の添加量は、顔料分散液中の顔料に対して、通常5~100重量%、好ましくは10~60重量%とすることが好ましい。バインダー樹脂の添加量を上記下限値以上とすることにより、より高い分散安定性やパターニング特性を有することができ、また上記上限値以下とすることにより、高い顔料濃度を確保でき、より高い遮光性が得られるため好ましい。
When the pigment is subjected to a dispersion treatment, the binder resin or the dispersion aid may be appropriately used in combination. By including the binder resin, it is possible to improve the dispersion stability when producing the pigment dispersion.
In this case, the addition amount of the binder resin is usually 5 to 100% by weight, preferably 10 to 60% by weight, based on the pigment in the pigment dispersion. By making the addition amount of the binder resin more than the above lower limit value, it can have higher dispersion stability and patterning characteristics, and by making it less than the above upper limit value, it is possible to ensure a high pigment concentration and higher light shielding properties. Is preferable.
 なお、顔料分散液の固形分濃度は、通常10~40重量%である。
 ここで、「全固形分」とは、溶剤以外の顔料分散液の全成分を指す。
The solid content concentration of the pigment dispersion is usually 10 to 40% by weight.
Here, “total solid content” refers to all components of the pigment dispersion other than the solvent.
[2]着色感光性組成物の製造方法
 本発明の着色感光性組成物は、上記工程により得られた顔料分散液に、着色感光性組成物が含有する他の成分を添加し、混合して均一な溶液とすることにより調製される。なお、着色感光性組成物として配合する全成分を同時に混合した液での分散処理は、分散時に生じる発熱のため高反応性の成分が変性するおそれがある。また、製造工程においては微細なゴミが液中に混じることが多いため、得られた着色感光性組成物溶液はフィルター等により濾過処理するのが望ましい。
[2] Method for Producing Colored Photosensitive Composition The colored photosensitive composition of the present invention is prepared by adding the other components contained in the colored photosensitive composition to the pigment dispersion obtained by the above steps and mixing them. It is prepared by making a uniform solution. In addition, the dispersion process with the liquid which mixed all the components mix | blended as a coloring photosensitive composition simultaneously has a possibility that a highly reactive component may modify | denature because of the heat_generation | fever which arises at the time of dispersion | distribution. Further, since fine dust is often mixed in the liquid in the manufacturing process, it is desirable that the obtained colored photosensitive composition solution is filtered by a filter or the like.
[ブラックフォトスペーサー]
 本発明の着色感光性組成物は、公知のカラーフィルター用着色感光性組成物と同様の用途に使用されるが、以下、ブラックフォトスペーサーとして使用される場合について、本発明の着色感光性組成物を用いたブラックフォトスペーサーの形成方法の具体例に従って説明する。
[Black Photo Spacer]
The colored photosensitive composition of the present invention is used in the same applications as known colored photosensitive compositions for color filters. Hereinafter, the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention is used as a black photospacer. This will be described according to a specific example of a method for forming a black photospacer using.
 通常、ブラックフォトスペーサーが設けられるべき基板上に、着色感光性組成物溶液を、塗布等の方法により膜状或いはパターン状に供給し、溶剤を乾燥させる。続いて、露光-現像を行うフォトリソグラフィー法などの方法によりパターン形成を行う。その後、必要により追露光や熱硬化処理を行うことにより、該基板上にブラックフォトスペーサーが形成される。 Usually, a colored photosensitive composition solution is supplied in a film shape or a pattern shape by a method such as coating on a substrate on which a black photospacer is to be provided, and the solvent is dried. Subsequently, pattern formation is performed by a method such as exposure-development photolithography. Thereafter, a black photo spacer is formed on the substrate by performing additional exposure or thermosetting treatment as necessary.
[1]基板への供給方法
 本発明の着色感光性組成物は、通常、溶剤に溶解或いは分散された状態で、基板上へ供給される。その供給方法としては、従来公知の方法、例えば、スピナー法、ワイヤーバー法、フローコート法、ダイコート法、ロールコート法、スプレーコート法などによって行うことができる。また、インクジェット法や印刷法などにより、パターン状に供給されてもよい。中でも、ダイコート法によれば、塗布液の使用量が大幅に削減され、かつ、スピンコート法によった際に付着するミストなどの影響が全くない、異物発生が抑制されるなど、総合的な観点から好ましい。
[1] Supplying Method to Substrate The colored photosensitive composition of the present invention is usually supplied onto a substrate in a state dissolved or dispersed in a solvent. As the supply method, a conventionally known method such as a spinner method, a wire bar method, a flow coating method, a die coating method, a roll coating method, a spray coating method, or the like can be used. Further, it may be supplied in a pattern by an inkjet method or a printing method. Among them, according to a die coating method, the reduction of consumption is much coating liquid, and there is no influence of mist adhering upon by a spin coating method, a foreign substance generation is suppressed, a comprehensive It is preferable from the viewpoint.
 塗布量は用途により異なるが、例えばブラックフォトスペーサーの場合には、乾燥膜厚として、通常0.5μm~10μm、好ましくは1μm~9μm、特に好ましくは1μm~7μmの範囲である。また、乾燥膜厚あるいは最終的に形成されたスペーサーの高さが、基板全域に渡って均一であることが重要である。ばらつきが大きい場合には、液晶パネルにムラ欠陥を生ずることとなる。 The coating amount varies depending on the application, but in the case of a black photospacer, for example, the dry film thickness is usually in the range of 0.5 μm to 10 μm, preferably 1 μm to 9 μm, particularly preferably 1 μm to 7 μm. In addition, it is important that the dry film thickness or the height of the finally formed spacer is uniform over the entire area of the substrate. When the variation is large, a nonuniformity defect occurs in the liquid crystal panel.
 ただし、本発明の着色感光性組成物をフォトリソグラフィー法により高さの異なるブラックフォトスペーサーを一括形成する場合は最終的に形成されたブラックフォトスペーサーの高さは異なるものとなる。 However, when the black photosensitive spacers having different heights are collectively formed by the photolithography method in the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention, the final height of the black photosensitive spacers is different.
 尚、基板としてはガラス基板など、公知の基板を使用することができる。また、基板表面は平面であることが好適である。 A known substrate such as a glass substrate can be used as the substrate. The substrate surface is preferably a flat surface.
[2]乾燥方法
 基板上に着色感光性組成物溶液を供給した後の乾燥は、ホットプレート、IRオーブン、コンベクションオーブンを使用した乾燥方法によるのが好ましい。また、温度を高めず、減圧チャンバー内で乾燥を行う、減圧乾燥法を組み合わせてもよい。
[2] Drying method The drying after supplying the colored photosensitive composition solution onto the substrate is preferably performed by a drying method using a hot plate, an IR oven, or a convection oven. Moreover, you may combine the reduced pressure drying method of drying in a reduced pressure chamber, without raising temperature.
 乾燥の条件は、溶剤成分の種類、使用する乾燥機の性能などに応じて適宜選択することができる。乾燥時間は、溶剤成分の種類、使用する乾燥機の性能などに応じて、通常は、40℃~130℃の温度で15秒~5分間の範囲で選ばれ、好ましくは50℃~110℃の温度で30秒~3分間の範囲で選ばれる。 Drying conditions can be appropriately selected according to the type of solvent component and the performance of the dryer used. The drying time is usually selected within a range of 15 seconds to 5 minutes at a temperature of 40 ° C. to 130 ° C., preferably 50 ° C. to 110 ° C., depending on the type of solvent component and the performance of the dryer used. The temperature is selected in the range of 30 seconds to 3 minutes.
[3]露光方法
 露光は、着色感光性組成物の塗布膜上に、ネガのマスクパターンを重ね、このマスクパターンを介し、紫外線又は可視光線の光源を照射して行う。露光マスクを用いて露光を行う場合には、露光マスクを着色感光性組成物の塗布膜に近接させる方法や、露光マスクを着色感光性組成物の塗布膜から離れた位置に配置し、該露光マスクを介した露光光を投影する方法によってもよい。また、マスクパターンを用いないレーザー光による走査露光方式によってもよい。この際、必要に応じ、酸素による光重合性層の感度の低下を防ぐため、脱酸素雰囲気下で行ったり、光重合性層上にポリビニルアルコール層などの酸素遮断層を形成した後に露光を行ったりしてもよい。
[3] Exposure Method Exposure is performed by superimposing a negative mask pattern on the coating film of the colored photosensitive composition and irradiating an ultraviolet light source or a visible light source through this mask pattern. When exposure is performed using an exposure mask, the exposure mask is placed close to the coating film of the colored photosensitive composition, or the exposure mask is placed at a position away from the coating film of the colored photosensitive composition, and the exposure is performed. A method of projecting exposure light through a mask may be used. Further, a scanning exposure method using a laser beam without using a mask pattern may be used. At this time, if necessary, in order to prevent the sensitivity of the photopolymerizable layer from being lowered by oxygen, the exposure is performed in a deoxygenated atmosphere or after forming an oxygen blocking layer such as a polyvinyl alcohol layer on the photopolymerizable layer. Or you may.
 本発明の好ましい態様として、フォトリソグラフィー法により高さの異なるブラックフォトスペーサーを同時に形成する場合は、例えば、前述の如く、遮光部(光透過率0%)と、複数の開口部として、平均光透過率の最も高い開口部(完全透過開口部)に対して平均光透過率の小さい開口部(中間透過開口部)を有する露光マスクを用いる。この方法により、中間透過開口部と完全透過開口部の平均光透過率の差(一般的には5%~40%)、即ち露光量の差により、残膜率の差異を生じさせる。
 中間透過開口部は、例えば、微小な多角形の遮光ユニットを有するマトリックス状遮光パターンによって作成する方法等が知られている。また吸収体として、クロム系、モリブデン系、タングステン系、シリコン系などの材料の膜によって、光透過率を制御し作成する方法等が知られている。
As a preferred embodiment of the present invention, when black photo spacers having different heights are simultaneously formed by a photolithography method, for example, as described above, a light shielding portion (light transmittance of 0%) and a plurality of openings are used as an average light. An exposure mask having an opening (intermediate transmission opening) having a small average light transmittance relative to an opening having the highest transmittance (complete transmission opening) is used. By this method, a difference in the residual film rate is caused by a difference in average light transmittance between the intermediate transmission opening and the complete transmission opening (generally 5% to 40%), that is, a difference in exposure amount.
For example, a method of creating the intermediate transmission opening by a matrix-shaped light shielding pattern having a minute polygonal light shielding unit is known. Also known is a method of controlling the light transmittance with a film of a material such as chromium, molybdenum, tungsten, or silicon as the absorber.
 上記の露光に使用される光源は、特に限定されるものではない。光源としては、例えば、キセノンランプ、ハロゲンランプ、タングステンランプ、高圧水銀灯、超高圧水銀灯、メタルハライドランプ、中圧水銀灯、低圧水銀灯、カーボンアーク、蛍光ランプなどのランプ光源や、アルゴンイオンレーザー、YAGレーザー、エキシマレーザー、窒素レーザー、ヘリウムカドミニウムレーザー、青紫色半導体レーザー、近赤外半導体レーザーなどのレーザー光源などが挙げられる。特定の波長の光を照射して使用する場合には、光学フィルターを利用することもできる。 The light source used for the above exposure is not particularly limited. Examples of the light source include a xenon lamp, a halogen lamp, a tungsten lamp, a high-pressure mercury lamp, an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp, a metal halide lamp, a medium-pressure mercury lamp, a low-pressure mercury lamp, a carbon arc, and a fluorescent lamp, an argon ion laser, a YAG laser, Examples include laser light sources such as excimer laser, nitrogen laser, helium cadmium laser, blue-violet semiconductor laser, and near infrared semiconductor laser. An optical filter can also be used when used by irradiating light of a specific wavelength.
 光学フィルターとしては、例えば薄膜で露光波長における光透過率を制御可能なタイプでもよく、その場合の材質としては、例えばCr化合物(Crの酸化物、窒化物、酸窒化物、フッ化物など)、MoSi、Si、W、Al等が挙げられる。 The optical filter may be of a type that can control the light transmittance at the exposure wavelength with a thin film, for example, and the material in that case is, for example, a Cr compound (Cr oxide, nitride, oxynitride, fluoride, etc.), Examples include MoSi, Si, W, and Al.
 露光量としては、通常、1mJ/cm以上、好ましくは5mJ/cm以上、より好ましくは10mJ/cm以上であり、通常300mJ/cm以下、好ましくは200mJ/cm以下、より好ましくは150mJ/cm以下である。
 また、近接露光方式の場合には、露光対象とマスクパターンとの距離としては、通常10μm以上、好ましくは50μm以上、より好ましくは75μm以上であり、通常500μm以下、好ましくは400μm以下、より好ましくは300μm以下である。
Energy of exposure generally, 1 mJ / cm 2 or more, preferably 5 mJ / cm 2 or more, more preferably 10 mJ / cm 2 or more, usually 300 mJ / cm 2 or less, preferably 200 mJ / cm 2 or less, more preferably 150 mJ / cm 2 or less.
In the case of the proximity exposure method, the distance between the exposure target and the mask pattern is usually 10 μm or more, preferably 50 μm or more, more preferably 75 μm or more, and usually 500 μm or less, preferably 400 μm or less, more preferably 300 μm or less.
[4]現像方法
 上記の露光を行った後、アルカリ性化合物の水溶液、又は有機溶剤を用いる現像によって、基板上に画像パターンを形成することができる。この水溶液には、さらに界面活性剤、有機溶剤、緩衝剤、錯化剤、染料又は顔料を含ませることができる。
[4] Development Method After performing the above exposure, an image pattern can be formed on the substrate by development using an aqueous solution of an alkaline compound or an organic solvent. This aqueous solution may further contain a surfactant, an organic solvent, a buffering agent, a complexing agent, a dye or a pigment.
 アルカリ性化合物としては、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、水酸化リチウム、炭酸ナトリウム、炭酸カリウム、炭酸水素ナトリウム、炭酸水素カリウム、ケイ酸ナトリウム、ケイ酸カリウム、メタケイ酸ナトリウム、リン酸ナトリウム、リン酸カリウム、リン酸水素ナトリウム、リン酸水素カリウム、リン酸二水素ナトリウム、リン酸二水素カリウム、水酸化アンモニウムなどの無機アルカリ性化合物や、モノ-・ジ-又はトリエタノールアミン、モノ-・ジ-又はトリメチルアミン、モノ-・ジ-又はトリエチルアミン、モノ-又はジイソプロピルアミン、n-ブチルアミン、モノ-・ジ-又はトリイソプロパノールアミン、エチレンイミン、エチレンジイミン、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド(TMAH)、コリンなどの有機アルカリ性化合物が挙げられる。これらのアルカリ性化合物は、2種以上の混合物であってもよい。 Alkaline compounds include sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, lithium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate, sodium bicarbonate, potassium bicarbonate, sodium silicate, potassium silicate, sodium metasilicate, sodium phosphate, potassium phosphate Inorganic alkaline compounds such as sodium hydrogen phosphate, potassium hydrogen phosphate, sodium dihydrogen phosphate, potassium dihydrogen phosphate, ammonium hydroxide, mono-di- or triethanolamine, mono-di- or trimethylamine , Mono-di- or triethylamine, mono- or diisopropylamine, n-butylamine, mono-di- or triisopropanolamine, ethyleneimine, ethylenediimine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide (TMAH), choline, etc. Organic alkaline compounds. These alkaline compounds may be a mixture of two or more.
 上記界面活性剤としては、例えば、ポリオキシエチレンアルキルエーテル類、ポリオキシエチレンアルキルアリールエーテル類、ポリオキシエチレンアルキルエステル類、ソルビタンアルキルエステル類、モノグリセリドアルキルエステル類などのノニオン系界面活性剤;アルキルベンゼンスルホン酸塩類、アルキルナフタレンスルホン酸塩類、アルキル硫酸塩類、アルキルスルホン酸塩類、スルホコハク酸エステル塩類などのアニオン性界面活性剤;アルキルベタイン類、アミノ酸類などの両性界面活性剤、が挙げられる。 Examples of the surfactant include nonionic surfactants such as polyoxyethylene alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene alkyl aryl ethers, polyoxyethylene alkyl esters, sorbitan alkyl esters, monoglyceride alkyl esters; Anionic surfactants such as acid salts, alkylnaphthalene sulfonates, alkyl sulfates, alkyl sulfonates, sulfosuccinic acid ester salts; amphoteric surfactants such as alkylbetaines and amino acids.
 有機溶剤としては、例えば、イソプロピルアルコール、ベンジルアルコール、エチルセロソルブ、ブチルセロソルブ、フェニルセロソルブ、プロピレングリコール、ジアセトンアルコールなどが挙げられる。有機溶剤は、単独でも水溶液と併用して使用できる。 Examples of the organic solvent include isopropyl alcohol, benzyl alcohol, ethyl cellosolve, butyl cellosolve, phenyl cellosolve, propylene glycol, diacetone alcohol and the like. The organic solvent can be used alone or in combination with an aqueous solution.
 現像処理の方法については特に制限は無いが、通常、10℃~50℃、好ましくは15℃~45℃の現像温度で、浸漬現像、スプレー現像、ブラシ現像、超音波現像等の方法により行われる。 The development processing method is not particularly limited, but is usually performed at a development temperature of 10 ° C. to 50 ° C., preferably 15 ° C. to 45 ° C., by a method such as immersion development, spray development, brush development, or ultrasonic development. .
[5]追露光及び熱硬化処理
 現像の後の基板には、必要により上記の露光方法と同様な方法により追露光を行ってもよく、また熱硬化処理を行ってもよい。この際の熱硬化処理条件は、温度は100℃~280℃の範囲、好ましくは150℃~250℃の範囲で選ばれ、時間は5分間~60分間の範囲で選ばれる。
[5] Additional exposure and thermosetting treatment The substrate after development may be subjected to additional exposure by a method similar to the above exposure method, if necessary, or may be subjected to thermosetting treatment. The thermosetting treatment conditions at this time are selected such that the temperature is in the range of 100 ° C. to 280 ° C., preferably in the range of 150 ° C. to 250 ° C., and the time is selected in the range of 5 minutes to 60 minutes.
 本発明のブラックフォトスペーサーの大きさや形状等は、これを適用するカラーフィルターの仕様等によって適宜調整されるが、本発明の着色感光性組成物は、特に、フォトリソグラフィー法によりスペーサーとサブスペーサーの高さの異なるブラックフォトスペーサーを同時に形成するのに有用であり、その場合、スペーサーの高さは通常2~7μmであり、サブスペーサーは、スペーサーよりも通常0.2~1.5μm低い高さを有する。 The size, shape, etc. of the black photospacer of the present invention are appropriately adjusted according to the specifications of the color filter to which the black photospacer is applied, but the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention is particularly suitable for the spacer and sub-spacer by photolithography. It is useful for forming black photo spacers with different heights at the same time, in which case the height of the spacer is usually 2-7 μm and the sub-spacer is usually 0.2-1.5 μm lower than the spacer Have
[カラーフィルター]
 本発明のカラーフィルターは、上述のような本発明のブラックフォトスペーサーを備えるものであり、例えば透明基板としてのガラス基板上に、ブラックマトリクスと、赤色、緑色、青色の画素着色層と、オーバーコート層とが積層されて、ブラックフォトスペーサーを形成した後配向膜を形成して製造される。
[Color filter]
The color filter of the present invention comprises the black photo spacer of the present invention as described above. For example, on a glass substrate as a transparent substrate, a black matrix, red, green, and blue pixel coloring layers, and an overcoat The layers are laminated to form a black photo spacer, and then an alignment film is formed.
 このような本発明のブラックフォトスペーサーを有する本発明のカラーフィルターと液晶駆動側基板とを貼り合わせて液晶セルを形成し、形成した液晶セルに液晶を注入して液晶表示装置を製造することができる。 A liquid crystal cell is formed by bonding the color filter of the present invention having the black photo spacer of the present invention and the liquid crystal driving side substrate, and a liquid crystal is injected into the formed liquid crystal cell to manufacture a liquid crystal display device. it can.
 次に、実施例及び比較例を挙げて本実施の形態をより具体的に説明するが、本実施の形態はその要旨を超えない限り、以下の実施例に限定されるものではない。なお、以下において「部」は「重量部」を表す。 Next, the present embodiment will be described more specifically with reference to examples and comparative examples. However, the present embodiment is not limited to the following examples unless it exceeds the gist. In the following, “part” represents “part by weight”.
 以下の実施例及び比較例で用いた着色感光性組成物の構成成分は次の通りである。 The components of the colored photosensitive composition used in the following examples and comparative examples are as follows.
<バインダー樹脂-1>
 日本化薬(株)製「ZCR-1569H」(MW=3000~4000、酸価=約100mg-KOH/g)
 なお、このバインダー樹脂-1は、本発明における「アルカリ可溶性樹脂(A)」に相当する。
<Binder resin-1>
“ZCR-1569H” manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. (MW = 3000 to 4000, acid value = about 100 mg-KOH / g)
The binder resin-1 corresponds to the “alkali-soluble resin (A)” in the present invention.
<バインダー樹脂-2>
 日本化薬(株)製「ZCR-1642H」(MW=5000~6500、酸価=約100mg-KOH/g)
 なお、このバインダー樹脂-2は、本発明における「アルカリ可溶性樹脂(A)」に相当する。
<Binder resin-2>
“ZCR-1642H” manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. (MW = 5000-6500, acid value = about 100 mg-KOH / g)
The binder resin-2 corresponds to the “alkali-soluble resin (A)” in the present invention.
<バインダー樹脂-3>
 下記構造(11)のエポキシ化合物とアクリル酸との反応物を、トリメチロールプロパン(TMP)及びビフェニルテトラカルボン酸2無水物(BPDA)と反応させて得られた樹脂(MW=3500~4500、酸価=約110mg-KOH/g)
<Binder resin-3>
Resins obtained by reacting a reaction product of an epoxy compound having the following structure (11) with acrylic acid with trimethylolpropane (TMP) and biphenyltetracarboxylic dianhydride (BPDA) (MW = 3500 to 4500, acid Value = about 110 mg-KOH / g)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
 尚、バインダー樹脂-3は、下記方法に従い合成することができる。
<合成例1:バインダー樹脂-3の合成>
 上記構造(11)のエポキシ化合物(エポキシ当量264)50g、アクリル酸13.65g、メトキシブチルアセテート60.5g、トリフェニルホスフィン0.936g、及びパラメトキシフェノール0.032gを、温度計、攪拌機、冷却管を取り付けたフラスコに入れ、攪拌しながら90℃で酸価が5mgKOH/g以下になるまで反応させる。反応には12時間を要し、エポキシアクリレート溶液を得る。
The binder resin-3 can be synthesized according to the following method.
<Synthesis Example 1: Synthesis of Binder Resin-3>
50 g of the epoxy compound having the structure (11) (epoxy equivalent 264), 13.65 g of acrylic acid, 60.5 g of methoxybutyl acetate, 0.936 g of triphenylphosphine, and 0.032 g of paramethoxyphenol were added to a thermometer, a stirrer, and cooling. It puts into the flask which attached the pipe | tube, and is made to react at 90 degreeC, stirring until an acid value is set to 5 mgKOH / g or less. The reaction takes 12 hours to obtain an epoxy acrylate solution.
 上記エポキシアクリレート溶液25重量部及び、トリメチロールプロパン(TMP)0.74重量部、ビフェニルテトラカルボン酸2無水物(BPDA)3.95重量部、テトラヒドロフタル酸無水物(THPA)2.7重量部を、温度計、攪拌機、冷却管を取り付けたフラスコに入れ、攪拌しながら105℃までゆっくり昇温し反応させる。
 樹脂溶液が透明になったところでメトキシブチルアセテートで希釈し、固形分50重量%となるよう調製し、バインダー樹脂-3を得る。
25 parts by weight of the above epoxy acrylate solution, 0.74 parts by weight of trimethylolpropane (TMP), 3.95 parts by weight of biphenyltetracarboxylic dianhydride (BPDA), 2.7 parts by weight of tetrahydrophthalic anhydride (THPA) Is put in a flask equipped with a thermometer, a stirrer, and a cooling tube, and the temperature is slowly raised to 105 ° C. while stirring to react.
When the resin solution becomes transparent, it is diluted with methoxybutyl acetate to prepare a solid content of 50% by weight to obtain binder resin-3.
 なお、このバインダー樹脂-3は、本発明における「アルカリ可溶性樹脂(A1”)」に相当する。 This binder resin-3 corresponds to the “alkali-soluble resin (A1”) ”in the present invention.
<分散剤>
 ビックケミー社製「DisperBYK-2000」
<分散助剤>
 ループリゾール社製「S12000」
<界面活性剤>
 大日本インキ化学社製「メガファック F-475」
<溶剤-1>
 PGMEA:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート
<溶剤-2>
 MB:3-メトキシブタノール
<Dispersant>
"DisperBYK-2000" manufactured by Big Chemie
<Dispersing aid>
“S12000” manufactured by Loop Resor Co., Ltd.
<Surfactant>
“MegaFuck F-475” manufactured by Dainippon Ink & Chemicals, Inc.
<Solvent-1>
PGMEA: Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate <Solvent-2>
MB: 3-methoxybutanol
<光重合開始剤>
 下記化合物。
<Photopolymerization initiator>
The following compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
<光重合性モノマー>
 DPHA:日本化薬(株)製ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレート
<Photopolymerizable monomer>
DPHA: Dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.
[顔料分散液-1~10の調製]
 表1に記載の顔料、分散剤、分散助剤、バインダー樹脂、及び溶剤を、表1に記載の重量比で混合した。ここに、分散容器の容積の80%のジリコニアビーズ(平均粒径0.3mm)を混合した後、ピコミル分散容器に充填し、表1に示す必要なリテンション時間(RT)にて分散させて、各顔料分散液を調製した。
[Preparation of pigment dispersions 1 to 10]
The pigment, dispersant, dispersion aid, binder resin, and solvent described in Table 1 were mixed at a weight ratio described in Table 1. Here, 80% of the volume of the dispersion container is mixed with zirconia beads (average particle size 0.3 mm), and then filled into a picomil dispersion container and dispersed at the necessary retention time (RT) shown in Table 1. Each pigment dispersion was prepared.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000023
[実施例1~5、比較例1~6]
 上記の通り調製された顔料分散液と表2に示す他の各成分とを、表2に示す割合で配合、撹拌して着色感光性組成物を調製した。
[Examples 1 to 5, Comparative Examples 1 to 6]
The pigment dispersion prepared as described above and the other components shown in Table 2 were blended and stirred in the proportions shown in Table 2 to prepare a colored photosensitive composition.
 この着色感光性組成物を用いて、以下の通り各評価を行い、結果を表2に示した。 Using this colored photosensitive composition, each evaluation was performed as follows, and the results are shown in Table 2.
[段差(ΔH)、密着性、光学濃度(OD)の評価]
<高さの異なる硬化物の一括形成方法>
 ガラス基板(AGC社製「AN100」)上にスピナーを用いて各着色感光性組成物を塗布した。次いで、110℃にて70秒間、ホットプレート上で加熱乾燥して塗布膜を形成した。
 得られた塗布膜に対し、直径5~50μmの各種直径の円形パターンの完全透過開口部及び直径5~50μmの各種直径の円形パターンの中間透過開口部、さらにはベタ部を有する露光マスクを用いて露光処理を施した。中間透過開口部は、Cr酸化物の薄膜で波長365nmにおける光透過率を10±2%としたものである。露光ギャップ(マスクと塗布面間の距離)は、250μmであった。光射光としては、波長365nmでの強度が32mW/cmである紫外線を用い、露光量は40~90mJ/cmの6水準とした。また、紫外線照射は空気下で行った。
[Evaluation of step (ΔH), adhesion, optical density (OD)]
<Batch formation method of cured products with different heights>
Each colored photosensitive composition was applied onto a glass substrate (“AN100” manufactured by AGC) using a spinner. Next, the coating film was formed by heating and drying on a hot plate at 110 ° C. for 70 seconds.
For the obtained coating film, an exposure mask having a circular transmission pattern having a circular pattern with various diameters of 5 to 50 μm, an intermediate transmission opening having a circular pattern with various diameters of 5 to 50 μm, and a solid part is used. The exposure process was performed. The intermediate transmission opening is a Cr oxide thin film having a light transmittance of 10 ± 2% at a wavelength of 365 nm. The exposure gap (distance between the mask and the coated surface) was 250 μm. The light Shako, intensity at a wavelength of 365nm is used ultraviolet is 32 mW / cm 2, the exposure amount was 6 levels of 40 ~ 90mJ / cm 2. Moreover, ultraviolet irradiation was performed under air.
 続いて、0.05重量%の水酸化カリウムと0.08重量%のノニオン性界面活性剤(花王社製「A-60」)を含有する水溶液よりなる現像液を用い、25℃において水圧0.15MPaのシャワー現像を施した後、純水にて現像を停止し、水洗スプレーにて洗浄した。シャワー現像時間は、10~120秒間の間で調整し、未露光の塗膜が溶解除去される時間の1.5倍とした。
 これらの操作により、不要部分を除去したパターンを得た。当該パターンの形成された基板をオーブン中、230℃で20分間加熱してパターンを硬化させ、略円柱状のスペーサーパターンを得た。
Subsequently, a developer composed of an aqueous solution containing 0.05% by weight of potassium hydroxide and 0.08% by weight of a nonionic surfactant (“A-60” manufactured by Kao Corporation) was used. After performing the shower development at 15 MPa, the development was stopped with pure water and washed with a water spray. The shower development time was adjusted between 10 and 120 seconds, and was 1.5 times as long as the unexposed coating film was dissolved and removed.
By these operations, a pattern from which unnecessary portions were removed was obtained. The board | substrate with which the said pattern was formed was heated at 230 degreeC for 20 minute (s) in oven, the pattern was hardened, and the substantially cylindrical spacer pattern was obtained.
<段差の評価>
 直径15μmの円形パターンの完全透過開口部及び直径35μmの円形パターンの中間透過開口部の高さの差異(段差ΔH)を算出し、露光量40~90mJ/cmにおける最大値を求めると共に、ΔHの値を以下の基準で評価した。
  (段差ΔHの評価基準)
   0.5μm以上       :○
   0.3μm以上0.5μm未満:△
   0.3μm未満       :×
<Evaluation of steps>
The height difference (step ΔH) between the complete transmission opening of the circular pattern with a diameter of 15 μm and the intermediate transmission opening of the circular pattern with a diameter of 35 μm is calculated, and the maximum value at an exposure amount of 40 to 90 mJ / cm 2 is obtained. Was evaluated according to the following criteria.
(Evaluation criteria for step ΔH)
0.5 μm or more: ○
0.3 μm or more and less than 0.5 μm: Δ
Less than 0.3 μm: ×
<基板密着性の評価>
 高さの差異(ΔH)が最大となる露光量にて、5~50μmの円形パターンの完全透過開口部と、同じく5~50μmの中間透過開口部において、それぞれパターンが解像性良く残っている最小の開口直径(μm)を最小密着として表2に示した。この値は小さい程基板密着性に優れる。尚、解像性良く残っているとは、同一サイズのパターンを24個形成して、その全てのパターンが正常に形成されていることをいう。
<Evaluation of substrate adhesion>
The pattern remains with good resolution at a completely transmissive aperture of a circular pattern of 5 to 50 μm and an intermediate transmissive aperture of 5 to 50 μm at an exposure amount that maximizes the height difference (ΔH). The minimum opening diameter (μm) is shown in Table 2 as the minimum adhesion. The smaller this value, the better the substrate adhesion. “Remaining with good resolution” means that 24 patterns of the same size are formed and all the patterns are formed normally.
<光学濃度(OD)の評価>
 ベタ部の光学濃度(OD)を透過濃度計(グレタグマクベス社製「D 200-II」)にて測定した。さらに測定箇所の膜厚も測定し、単位膜厚あたりの光学濃度(単位OD)を算出し、以下の基準で評価した。なお、OD値は遮光能力を示す数値であり数値が大きい程高遮光性であることを示す。
  (単位ODの評価基準)
   0.8以上 :○
   0.8未満 :×
<Evaluation of optical density (OD)>
The optical density (OD) of the solid part was measured with a transmission densitometer (“D 200-II” manufactured by Gretag Macbeth). Furthermore, the film thickness at the measurement location was also measured, and the optical density per unit film thickness (unit OD) was calculated and evaluated according to the following criteria. The OD value is a numerical value indicating the light shielding ability, and the larger the numerical value, the higher the light shielding property.
(Evaluation criteria for unit OD)
0.8 or more: ○
Less than 0.8: ×
[電圧保持率(VHR)評価]
<液晶セルの作製>
 5cm角の片全面にITO膜を形成した電極基板A(イーエッチシー製、評価用ガラスITOベタ)と、2.5cm角の同ガラス基板の片面中央部に、2mm幅の取り出し電極がつながった1cm角のITO膜を形成した電極基板B(イーエッチシー製、評価用ガラスSZ-B111MIN(B))を用意した。
[Voltage holding ratio (VHR) evaluation]
<Production of liquid crystal cell>
An extraction substrate having a width of 2 mm was connected to the center of one side of the 2.5 cm square glass substrate and the electrode substrate A (Ec Sea, glass ITO solid for evaluation) having an ITO film formed on the entire surface of a 5 cm square piece. An electrode substrate B (manufactured by ECH, evaluation glass SZ-B111MIN (B)) on which a 1 cm square ITO film was formed was prepared.
 電極基板Aの上に、各着色感光性組成物を塗布し、1分間真空乾燥後、ホットプレート上で90℃にて1.5分間プリベークし、乾燥膜厚2.0μmの塗布膜を得た。その後、外縁部が2mmマスキングして、それぞれ3kW高圧水銀を用い50mJ/cmの露光条件にて画像露光を施した。次いで、約0.06重量%の水酸化カリウムと約0.14重量%のノニオン性界面活性剤(花王(株)製「A-60」)を含有する水溶液よりなる現像液を用い、25℃において水圧0.15MPaのシャワー現像を施した後、純水にて現像を停止し、水洗スプレーにてリンスした。シャワー現像時間は、10~120秒間の間で調整し、非感光層が溶解除去される時間(ブレークタイム)の約1.5倍とした。 Each colored photosensitive composition was applied on the electrode substrate A, vacuum-dried for 1 minute, and then pre-baked on a hot plate at 90 ° C. for 1.5 minutes to obtain a coating film having a dry film thickness of 2.0 μm. . Thereafter, the outer edge portion was masked by 2 mm, and image exposure was performed using 3 kW high-pressure mercury under exposure conditions of 50 mJ / cm 2 . Next, a developer composed of an aqueous solution containing about 0.06% by weight of potassium hydroxide and about 0.14% by weight of a nonionic surfactant (“A-60” manufactured by Kao Corporation) was used at 25 ° C. After performing shower development at a water pressure of 0.15 MPa, development was stopped with pure water and rinsed with a water spray. The shower development time was adjusted between 10 and 120 seconds, and was about 1.5 times the time (break time) during which the non-photosensitive layer was dissolved and removed.
 こうして画像形成された電極基板を230℃で20分間ポストベークし、レジストが施された電極基板を得た(レジスト基板)。その後、レジスト基板にポリイミド溶液を塗布し、ホットプレート上で70℃にて2分間プリベークし、220℃で24分間ポストベークした。こうして得られたレジスト基板を2.5cm角の基板にカットし、評価用電極基板Aを完成した。 The electrode substrate thus image-formed was post-baked at 230 ° C. for 20 minutes to obtain a resist-coated electrode substrate (resist substrate). Thereafter, a polyimide solution was applied to the resist substrate, pre-baked on a hot plate at 70 ° C. for 2 minutes, and post-baked at 220 ° C. for 24 minutes. The resist substrate thus obtained was cut into a 2.5 cm square substrate to complete an evaluation electrode substrate A.
 一方、電極基板Bの上にも、ポリイミド溶液を塗布し、ホットプレート上で70℃にて2分間プリベークし、220℃で24分間ポストベークし、評価電極基板Bを完成した。
 その後、電極基板Bの外周上に、ディスペンサーを用いて、直径5μmのシリカビーズを含有するエポキシ樹脂系シール剤を塗布した後、電極基板Bの表側(シール剤側)に評価用電極基板Aの塗布面を圧着したまま貼り付けて、空セルが完成した。熱風循環炉内で180℃で2時間加熱した。
 こうして得られた空セルに、液晶(メルクジャパン社製MLC-6608)を注入し、周辺部をUV硬化型シール剤によって封止し、電圧保持率測定用液晶セルを完成した。
On the other hand, a polyimide solution was also applied onto the electrode substrate B, pre-baked at 70 ° C. for 2 minutes on a hot plate, and post-baked at 220 ° C. for 24 minutes to complete the evaluation electrode substrate B.
Thereafter, an epoxy resin sealant containing silica beads having a diameter of 5 μm is applied on the outer periphery of the electrode substrate B using a dispenser, and then the electrode substrate A for evaluation is placed on the front side (the sealant side) of the electrode substrate B. The application surface was pasted and bonded to complete the empty cell. Heating was performed at 180 ° C. for 2 hours in a hot air circulating furnace.
A liquid crystal (MLC-6608 manufactured by Merck Japan Co., Ltd.) was injected into the empty cell thus obtained, and the peripheral portion was sealed with a UV curable sealant to complete a voltage holding ratio liquid crystal cell.
<電圧保持率(VHR)の評価>
 上記液晶セルを、アニール処理(熱風循環炉内で105℃、2.5時間加熱)した後、評価用電極基板A、Bに、電圧5V、0.6Hz、フレーム時間1667msecの条件で電圧印加し、電圧保持率を(株)東陽テクニカ製「VHR-6254型」にて測定した。
<Evaluation of voltage holding ratio (VHR)>
After annealing the liquid crystal cell (heating in a hot air circulating furnace at 105 ° C. for 2.5 hours), voltage was applied to the evaluation electrode substrates A and B under conditions of a voltage of 5 V, 0.6 Hz, and a frame time of 1667 msec. The voltage holding ratio was measured with “VHR-6254 type” manufactured by Toyo Corporation.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000024
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000024
 表2の結果から、顔料としてOr64及びB60を必須成分として含む本発明の着色感光性組成物、及び、顔料としてOr72及びB60を必須成分として含む本発明の着色感光性組成物は、遮光性と密着性、電圧保持率を維持しつつ、高さの異なる硬化物を同一材料で同時に形成するのに有用であることが分かる。 From the results of Table 2, the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention containing Or64 and B60 as essential components as pigments, and the colored photosensitive composition of the present invention containing Or72 and B60 as essential components as pigments have light shielding properties. It can be seen that it is useful for simultaneously forming cured products having different heights from the same material while maintaining adhesion and voltage holding ratio.
 本発明を詳細にまた特定の実施態様を参照して説明したが、本発明の精神と範囲を逸脱することなく様々な変更や修正を加えることができることは当業者にとって明らかである。本出願は2012年1月31日出願の日本特許出願(特願2012-018337)に基づくものであり、その内容はここに参照として取り込まれる。 Although the present invention has been described in detail and with reference to specific embodiments, it will be apparent to those skilled in the art that various changes and modifications can be made without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention. This application is based on a Japanese patent application filed on January 31, 2012 (Japanese Patent Application No. 2012-018337), the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

Claims (6)

  1.  顔料、バインダー樹脂、光重合性モノマー、及び光重合開始剤を含む着色感光性組成物であって、前記顔料が、下記(A)に示す顔料及び(B)に示す顔料を含む着色感光性組成物。
    (A)C.I.ピグメントオレンジ43、C.I.ピグメントオレンジ64、及びC.I.ピグメントオレンジ72からなる群より選ばれる1つ
    (B)C.I.ピグメントブルー60
    A colored photosensitive composition comprising a pigment, a binder resin, a photopolymerizable monomer, and a photopolymerization initiator, wherein the pigment comprises a pigment shown in (A) below and a pigment shown in (B) object.
    (A) C.I. I. Pigment orange 43, C.I. I. Pigment orange 64, and C.I. I. One selected from the group consisting of CI Pigment Orange 72 (B) C.I. I. Pigment Blue 60
  2.  前記顔料が、C.I.ピグメントオレンジ64及びC.I.ピグメントブルー60を含む請求項1に記載の着色感光性組成物。 The pigment is C.I. I. Pigment orange 64 and C.I. I. The colored photosensitive composition according to claim 1, comprising Pigment Blue 60.
  3.  前記顔料が、C.I.ピグメントレッド254、C.I.ピグメントバイオレット23、及びC.I.ピグメントバイオレット29からなる群より選ばれる1つをさらに含む請求項1又は2に記載の着色感光性組成物。 The pigment is C.I. I. Pigment red 254, C.I. I. Pigment violet 23, and C.I. I. The colored photosensitive composition according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising one selected from the group consisting of CI Pigment Violet 29.
  4.  前記顔料が、下記(1)に示す顔料又は(2)に示す顔料を含む請求項1に記載の着色感光性組成物。
     (1) C.I.ピグメントオレンジ64、C.I.ピグメントブルー60、及びC.I.ピグメントレッド254
     (2) C.I.ピグメントオレンジ64、C.I.ピグメントブルー60、及びC.I.ピグメントバイオレット29
    The colored photosensitive composition according to claim 1, wherein the pigment contains a pigment shown in the following (1) or a pigment shown in (2).
    (1) C.I. I. Pigment orange 64, C.I. I. Pigment blue 60, and C.I. I. Pigment Red 254
    (2) C.I. I. Pigment orange 64, C.I. I. Pigment blue 60, and C.I. I. Pigment Violet 29
  5.  請求項1乃至4のいずれか1項に記載の着色感光性組成物を用いて形成されたブラックフォトスペーサー。 A black photospacer formed using the colored photosensitive composition according to any one of claims 1 to 4.
  6.  請求項5に記載のブラックフォトスペーサーを含むカラーフィルター。 A color filter comprising the black photo spacer according to claim 5.
PCT/JP2013/052082 2012-01-31 2013-01-30 Colored photosensitive composition, black photo spacer, and color filter WO2013115268A1 (en)

Priority Applications (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
KR1020147019632A KR101985564B1 (en) 2012-01-31 2013-01-30 Colored photosensitive composition, black photo spacer, and color filter
CN201910370357.1A CN110244513B (en) 2012-01-31 2013-01-30 Colored photosensitive composition, black photo spacer and color filter
JP2013556472A JP6036708B2 (en) 2012-01-31 2013-01-30 Colored photosensitive composition, black photo spacer, and color filter
KR1020197014126A KR102078989B1 (en) 2012-01-31 2013-01-30 Colored photosensitive composition, black photo spacer, and color filter
CN201380007458.3A CN104081280B (en) 2012-01-31 2013-01-30 Coloring photosensitive combination, black light spacer and colour filter

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2012018337 2012-01-31
JP2012-018337 2012-01-31

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2013115268A1 true WO2013115268A1 (en) 2013-08-08

Family

ID=48905300

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2013/052082 WO2013115268A1 (en) 2012-01-31 2013-01-30 Colored photosensitive composition, black photo spacer, and color filter

Country Status (5)

Country Link
JP (3) JP6036708B2 (en)
KR (2) KR102078989B1 (en)
CN (2) CN104081280B (en)
TW (1) TWI585529B (en)
WO (1) WO2013115268A1 (en)

Cited By (15)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2015046178A1 (en) * 2013-09-25 2015-04-02 三菱化学株式会社 Photosensitive coloring composition, black matrix, coloring spacer, image display device, and pigment dispersion
WO2016027798A1 (en) * 2014-08-20 2016-02-25 東レ株式会社 Photosensitive coloring composition, method for manufacturing solid-state imaging element using same, and solid-state imaging element
JP2016133574A (en) * 2015-01-16 2016-07-25 Jsr株式会社 Radiation-sensitive colored composition, colored pattern, method for forming the same, and liquid crystal display element
JP2016164623A (en) * 2015-03-06 2016-09-08 三菱化学株式会社 Photosensitive colored composition, cured product, colored spacer, and image display device
JP2017076071A (en) * 2015-10-16 2017-04-20 新日鉄住金化学株式会社 Photosensitive resin composition for light-shielding film having spacer function, light-shielding film, liquid crystal display, manufacturing method of photosensitive resin composition for light-shielding film having spacer function, manufacturing method of light-shielding film, and manufacturing method of liquid crystal display
KR20170126912A (en) 2015-03-11 2017-11-20 미쯔비시 케미컬 주식회사 Photosensitive coloring composition for forming colored spacer, cured product, colored spacer, and image display device
JP2018072413A (en) * 2016-10-25 2018-05-10 東洋インキScホールディングス株式会社 Black photosensitive composition
KR20180096648A (en) 2015-12-24 2018-08-29 미쯔비시 케미컬 주식회사 Photosensitive coloring composition, cured product, coloring spacer, image display device
JP2019008014A (en) * 2017-06-21 2019-01-17 東洋インキScホールディングス株式会社 Photosensitive colored composition for color filter and color filter
KR20190062374A (en) 2016-10-14 2019-06-05 미쯔비시 케미컬 주식회사 Photosensitive coloring composition, cured product, coloring spacer, image display device
KR20200023297A (en) 2017-06-30 2020-03-04 미쯔비시 케미컬 주식회사 Photosensitive coloring composition, hardened | cured material, colored spacer, and an image display apparatus
KR20210105876A (en) 2018-12-18 2021-08-27 미쯔비시 케미컬 주식회사 Photosensitive coloring composition, cured product, colored spacer, and image display device
TWI746496B (en) * 2016-02-09 2021-11-21 日商東京應化工業股份有限公司 Photosensitive resin composition for black column spacer, black column spacer, display device, and method for forming black column spacer
WO2022239497A1 (en) 2021-05-10 2022-11-17 イーケムソリューションズジャパン株式会社 Black resist composition and method for forming black pattern by near-infrared photolithography
US11579527B2 (en) 2019-07-31 2023-02-14 Merck Patent Gmbh Negative type photosensitive composition comprising black colorant

Families Citing this family (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
KR102025359B1 (en) * 2016-03-08 2019-09-25 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 Photosensitive resin composition, black column spacerusing the same and color filter
CN110178083B (en) * 2017-02-15 2023-03-24 三菱化学株式会社 Photosensitive coloring composition, cured product, coloring spacer and image display device
KR102036684B1 (en) * 2017-04-20 2019-10-25 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive resin layer using the same and color filter
KR101840984B1 (en) * 2017-11-10 2018-03-21 동우 화인켐 주식회사 A photo sensitive resin composition, a color filter comprising a black metrics, a column spacer or black column spacer prepared by using the composition, and a display device comprising the color filter
KR102569648B1 (en) * 2018-11-19 2023-08-24 주식회사 엘지화학 Substrate
KR102279206B1 (en) * 2018-11-22 2021-07-19 삼성에스디아이 주식회사 Colored layer and display device including the same
KR102313742B1 (en) * 2018-12-03 2021-10-18 동우 화인켐 주식회사 IR-pass Photosensitive Resin Composition
KR102560228B1 (en) * 2018-12-24 2023-07-27 동우 화인켐 주식회사 Photosensitive resin composition, and color filter and liquid crystal display device formed therefrom
KR102325069B1 (en) * 2019-02-13 2021-11-11 동우 화인켐 주식회사 IR-pass Photosensitive Resin Composition

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH09302265A (en) * 1996-05-16 1997-11-25 Toppan Printing Co Ltd Colored resin composition for light-screening film formation, arraying substrate element, and liquid crystal display
JP2004219809A (en) * 2003-01-16 2004-08-05 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Light-shielding photosensitive resin composition, light-shielding photosensitive resin transfer material, method for forming light-shielding picture and color filter
JP2009031778A (en) * 2007-06-27 2009-02-12 Mitsubishi Chemicals Corp Photosensitive composition, method, cured product, and liquid crystal display device
JP2011118367A (en) * 2009-10-26 2011-06-16 Sakata Corp Color composition for black matrix

Family Cites Families (14)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH08234212A (en) 1995-02-28 1996-09-13 Casio Comput Co Ltd Liquid crystal display element
JP2001154206A (en) * 1999-11-25 2001-06-08 Jsr Corp Radiation sensitive resin composition for spacer, spacer and liquid crystal display element
JP2004219696A (en) * 2003-01-15 2004-08-05 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive transfer material and color filter
JP2005189720A (en) * 2003-12-26 2005-07-14 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive transfer material and image forming method
JP4635935B2 (en) * 2006-03-29 2011-02-23 Jsr株式会社 Radiation-sensitive composition for forming colored layer, color filter, and color liquid crystal display element
KR101390760B1 (en) * 2006-06-02 2014-05-02 후지필름 가부시키가이샤 Pigment dispersion composition, colored photosensitive resin composition and photosensitive resin transfer material using the same, and color filter, liquid crystal display and ccd device using the same
KR100793946B1 (en) * 2006-11-17 2008-01-16 제일모직주식회사 Photosensitive resin composition for forming column spacer of liquid crystal device
WO2008129986A1 (en) * 2007-04-20 2008-10-30 Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation Colored resin composition, color filter, liquid crystal display device, and organic el display
WO2008153000A1 (en) * 2007-06-11 2008-12-18 Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation Photosensitive color resin composition for color filter, color filter, liquid crystal display, and organic el display
WO2009025297A1 (en) * 2007-08-22 2009-02-26 Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation Resin black matrix, light blocking photosensitive resin composition, tft element substrate and liquid crystal display device
JP5176468B2 (en) * 2007-10-05 2013-04-03 Jsr株式会社 Radiation-sensitive composition for forming colored layer, color filter, and color liquid crystal display element
JP5109903B2 (en) * 2007-10-19 2012-12-26 Jsr株式会社 Radiation-sensitive composition for forming colored layer, color filter, and liquid crystal display device
JP5442960B2 (en) * 2008-05-21 2014-03-19 サカタインクス株式会社 Coloring composition for black matrix
JP2012181509A (en) * 2011-02-08 2012-09-20 Mitsubishi Chemicals Corp Photosensitive coloring composition, colored spacer, color filter and liquid crystal display device

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH09302265A (en) * 1996-05-16 1997-11-25 Toppan Printing Co Ltd Colored resin composition for light-screening film formation, arraying substrate element, and liquid crystal display
JP2004219809A (en) * 2003-01-16 2004-08-05 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Light-shielding photosensitive resin composition, light-shielding photosensitive resin transfer material, method for forming light-shielding picture and color filter
JP2009031778A (en) * 2007-06-27 2009-02-12 Mitsubishi Chemicals Corp Photosensitive composition, method, cured product, and liquid crystal display device
JP2011118367A (en) * 2009-10-26 2011-06-16 Sakata Corp Color composition for black matrix

Cited By (37)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2018097378A (en) * 2013-09-25 2018-06-21 三菱ケミカル株式会社 Photosensitive coloring composition, cured product, black matrix, colored spacer, and image display device
JP2021073529A (en) * 2013-09-25 2021-05-13 三菱ケミカル株式会社 Photosensitive coloring composition, coloring spacer, and image display device
CN105556390A (en) * 2013-09-25 2016-05-04 三菱化学株式会社 Photosensitive coloring composition, black matrix, coloring spacer, image display device, and pigment dispersion
KR102210576B1 (en) * 2013-09-25 2021-02-01 미쯔비시 케미컬 주식회사 Photosensitive coloring composition, black matrix, coloring spacer, image display device, and pigment dispersion
CN111190328A (en) * 2013-09-25 2020-05-22 三菱化学株式会社 Photosensitive coloring composition, black matrix, coloring spacer, image display device and pigment dispersion liquid
KR20200030639A (en) * 2013-09-25 2020-03-20 미쯔비시 케미컬 주식회사 Photosensitive coloring composition, black matrix, coloring spacer, image display device, and pigment dispersion
JPWO2015046178A1 (en) * 2013-09-25 2017-03-09 三菱化学株式会社 Photosensitive coloring composition, black matrix, coloring spacer, image display device, and pigment dispersion
JP2017061688A (en) * 2013-09-25 2017-03-30 三菱化学株式会社 Pigment dispersion
JP7099563B2 (en) 2013-09-25 2022-07-12 三菱ケミカル株式会社 Photosensitive coloring composition, coloring spacer and image display device
JP2019133167A (en) * 2013-09-25 2019-08-08 三菱ケミカル株式会社 Photosensitive coloring composition, coloring spacer, and image display device
WO2015046178A1 (en) * 2013-09-25 2015-04-02 三菱化学株式会社 Photosensitive coloring composition, black matrix, coloring spacer, image display device, and pigment dispersion
CN106575000B (en) * 2014-08-20 2019-09-13 东丽株式会社 Photosensitive coloring composition, using its solid photographic device manufacturing method and solid photographic device
JP5962865B1 (en) * 2014-08-20 2016-08-03 東レ株式会社 Photosensitive coloring composition and method for producing solid-state imaging device using the same
EP3185054A4 (en) * 2014-08-20 2018-03-28 Toray Industries, Inc. Photosensitive coloring composition, method for manufacturing solid-state imaging element using same, and solid-state imaging element
KR102392960B1 (en) 2014-08-20 2022-05-02 도레이 카부시키가이샤 Photosensitive coloring composition, method for manufacturing solid-state imaging element using same, and solid-state imaging element
WO2016027798A1 (en) * 2014-08-20 2016-02-25 東レ株式会社 Photosensitive coloring composition, method for manufacturing solid-state imaging element using same, and solid-state imaging element
US10032818B2 (en) 2014-08-20 2018-07-24 Toray Industries, Inc. Photosensitive coloring composition, method for manufacturing solid-state imaging element using same, and solid-state imaging element
CN106575000A (en) * 2014-08-20 2017-04-19 东丽株式会社 Photosensitive coloring composition, method for manufacturing solid-state imaging element using same, and solid-state imaging element
KR20170043545A (en) * 2014-08-20 2017-04-21 도레이 카부시키가이샤 Photosensitive coloring composition, method for manufacturing solid-state imaging element using same, and solid-state imaging element
JP2016133574A (en) * 2015-01-16 2016-07-25 Jsr株式会社 Radiation-sensitive colored composition, colored pattern, method for forming the same, and liquid crystal display element
JP2016164623A (en) * 2015-03-06 2016-09-08 三菱化学株式会社 Photosensitive colored composition, cured product, colored spacer, and image display device
JP7268700B2 (en) 2015-03-11 2023-05-08 三菱ケミカル株式会社 Photosensitive coloring composition, cured product, colored spacer, image display device
JPWO2016143878A1 (en) * 2015-03-11 2017-12-28 三菱ケミカル株式会社 Photosensitive coloring composition for forming colored spacer, cured product, colored spacer, image display device
KR20170126912A (en) 2015-03-11 2017-11-20 미쯔비시 케미컬 주식회사 Photosensitive coloring composition for forming colored spacer, cured product, colored spacer, and image display device
JP7131907B2 (en) 2015-03-11 2022-09-06 三菱ケミカル株式会社 Photosensitive coloring composition, cured product, colored spacer, image display device
JP2021182150A (en) * 2015-03-11 2021-11-25 三菱ケミカル株式会社 Photosensitive coloring composition, cured product, colored spacer, and image display device
JP2017076071A (en) * 2015-10-16 2017-04-20 新日鉄住金化学株式会社 Photosensitive resin composition for light-shielding film having spacer function, light-shielding film, liquid crystal display, manufacturing method of photosensitive resin composition for light-shielding film having spacer function, manufacturing method of light-shielding film, and manufacturing method of liquid crystal display
KR20180096648A (en) 2015-12-24 2018-08-29 미쯔비시 케미컬 주식회사 Photosensitive coloring composition, cured product, coloring spacer, image display device
TWI746496B (en) * 2016-02-09 2021-11-21 日商東京應化工業股份有限公司 Photosensitive resin composition for black column spacer, black column spacer, display device, and method for forming black column spacer
KR20190062374A (en) 2016-10-14 2019-06-05 미쯔비시 케미컬 주식회사 Photosensitive coloring composition, cured product, coloring spacer, image display device
JP2018072413A (en) * 2016-10-25 2018-05-10 東洋インキScホールディングス株式会社 Black photosensitive composition
JP2019008014A (en) * 2017-06-21 2019-01-17 東洋インキScホールディングス株式会社 Photosensitive colored composition for color filter and color filter
KR20200023297A (en) 2017-06-30 2020-03-04 미쯔비시 케미컬 주식회사 Photosensitive coloring composition, hardened | cured material, colored spacer, and an image display apparatus
KR20210105876A (en) 2018-12-18 2021-08-27 미쯔비시 케미컬 주식회사 Photosensitive coloring composition, cured product, colored spacer, and image display device
US11579527B2 (en) 2019-07-31 2023-02-14 Merck Patent Gmbh Negative type photosensitive composition comprising black colorant
WO2022239497A1 (en) 2021-05-10 2022-11-17 イーケムソリューションズジャパン株式会社 Black resist composition and method for forming black pattern by near-infrared photolithography
KR20230173140A (en) 2021-05-10 2023-12-26 이켐 솔루션즈 재팬 가부시키가이샤 Black resist composition and method of forming a black pattern using near-infrared photolithography

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
KR20190058671A (en) 2019-05-29
CN110244513A (en) 2019-09-17
KR101985564B1 (en) 2019-06-03
TW201337460A (en) 2013-09-16
JP6409936B2 (en) 2018-10-24
JPWO2013115268A1 (en) 2015-05-11
CN104081280B (en) 2019-05-31
JP6229210B2 (en) 2017-11-15
JP6036708B2 (en) 2016-11-30
KR102078989B1 (en) 2020-02-19
CN104081280A (en) 2014-10-01
KR20140121824A (en) 2014-10-16
TWI585529B (en) 2017-06-01
JP2017033023A (en) 2017-02-09
CN110244513B (en) 2022-10-14
JP2018009194A (en) 2018-01-18

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6409936B2 (en) Colored photosensitive composition, black photo spacer, color filter, and liquid crystal display device
JP6421837B2 (en) Colored photosensitive composition, colored spacer, color filter, and liquid crystal display device
JP2009069822A (en) Resin black matrix, light blocking photosensitive resin composition, tft element substrate and liquid crystal display device
JP5817099B2 (en) Green pigment colored resin composition, color filter, liquid crystal display device, and organic EL display device
JP2009003442A (en) Photosensitive resin composition, liquid crystal alignment control rib, spacer, color filter and image display device
WO2006016467A1 (en) Photosensitive resin composition, color filter and liquid crystal display device
JP2004295084A (en) Photosensitive composition, photosensitive color composition, color filter, and liquid crystal display
JP2008292677A (en) Reactive resin composition, color filter, and image display device
JP2012018246A (en) Colored photosensitive resin composition, cured product and liquid crystal display device
JP2012181509A (en) Photosensitive coloring composition, colored spacer, color filter and liquid crystal display device
US6524757B2 (en) Color filter and method for producing the same
JP2012083549A (en) Photosensitive coloring resin composition for color filter, color filter, liquid crystal display device, and organic el display
JP2010186175A (en) Coloring composition for color filter, color filter, and use thereof
JP2010186174A (en) Method for manufacturing color filter, color filter, and use thereof
JP5664127B2 (en) Green pigment colored resin composition, color filter, liquid crystal display device, and organic EL display device
JP2023057606A (en) Photosensitive coloring composition, cured product, and image display device
JP2022150019A (en) Method for preparing alkali-soluble resin, method for producing photosensitive resin composition, method for manufacturing cured product, and method for manufacturing image display device
JP2013205775A (en) Colored resin composition, color filter, liquid crystal display device, and organic el display device
JP2006313379A5 (en)

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 13742904

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2013556472

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20147019632

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 13742904

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1